Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act; Health Insurance Market Rules; Rate Review, 13405-13442 [2013-04335]
Download as PDF
Vol. 78
Wednesday,
No. 39
February 27, 2013
Part II
Department of Health and Human Services
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
45 CFR Parts 144, 147, 150, et al.
Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act; Health Insurance Market Rules;
Rate Review; Final Rule
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
PO 00000
Frm 00001
Fmt 4717
Sfmt 4717
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13406
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND
HUMAN SERVICES
45 CFR Parts 144, 147, 150, 154 and
156
[CMS–9972–F]
RIN 0938–AR40
Patient Protection and Affordable Care
Act; Health Insurance Market Rules;
Rate Review
Department of Health and
Human Services.
ACTION: Final rule.
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
AGENCY:
SUMMARY: This final rule implements
provisions related to fair health
insurance premiums, guaranteed
availability, guaranteed renewability,
single risk pools, and catastrophic
plans, consistent with title I of the
Patient Protection and Affordable Care
Act, as amended by the Health Care and
Education Reconciliation Act of 2010,
referred to collectively as the Affordable
Care Act. The final rule clarifies the
approach used to enforce the applicable
requirements of the Affordable Care Act
with respect to health insurance issuers
and group health plans that are nonfederal governmental plans. This final
rule also amends the standards for
health insurance issuers and states
regarding reporting, utilization, and
collection of data under the federal rate
review program, and revises the
timeline for states to propose statespecific thresholds for review and
approval by the Centers for Medicare &
Medicaid Services (CMS).
DATES: Effective Date. This rule is
effective on April 29, 2013, except 45
CFR 147.103 and the amendments to 45
CFR part 154 are effective on March 29,
2013.
Applicability Dates. The provisions of
this final rule generally apply to health
insurance coverage for plan or policy
years beginning on or after January 1,
2014. The provisions of 45 CFR 147.103
apply on March 29, 2013. The
amendments to 45 CFR part 154 apply
on April 1, 2013.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Jacob Ackerman, (410) 786–1565 (or by
email: marketreform@cms.hhs.gov),
concerning the health insurance market
rules; Douglas Pennington, (410) 786–
1553 (or by email: ratereview@hhs.gov),
concerning rate review.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Table of Contents
I. Background
A. Legislative Overview
B. Structure of the Final Rule
II. Provisions of the Proposed Rule and
Analysis and Responses to Comments
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
A. Part 144—Requirements Relating to
Health Insurance Coverage
1. Subpart A—General Provisions
B. Part 147—Health Insurance Reform
Requirements for the Group and
Individual Health Insurance Markets
1. Fair Health Insurance Premiums
2. State Reporting
3. Guaranteed Availability of Coverage
4. Guaranteed Renewability of Coverage
C. Part 150—CMS Enforcement in Group
and Individual Insurance Markets
D. Part 154—Health Insurance Issuer Rate
Increases: Disclosure and Review
Requirements
1. Subpart B—Disclosure and Review
Provisions
2. Subpart C—Effective Rate Review
Programs
E. Part 156—Health Insurance Issuer
Standards Under the Affordable Care
Act, Including Standards Related to
Exchanges
1. Subpart A—General Provisions
2. Subpart B—Standards for Essential
Health Benefits, Actuarial Value, and
Cost Sharing
F. Applicability to Special Plan Types
III. Modification of Effective Date of Certain
Provisions
IV. Provisions of the Final Regulations
V. Collection of Information Requirements
A. ICRs Regarding State Disclosures
B. ICRs Regarding Rate Increase Disclosure
and Review
VI. Regulatory Impact Analysis
A. Summary
B. Executive Orders
1. Need for Regulatory Action
2. Summary of Impacts
3. Anticipated Benefits, Costs, and
Transfers
C. Regulatory Alternatives
D. Regulatory Flexibility Act
E. Unfunded Mandates
F. Federalism
G. Congressional Review Act
Executive Summary: Beginning in
2014, health insurance issuers will be
prohibited from denying coverage to any
American because of a pre-existing
condition, and from charging
individuals and small employers higher
premiums based on health status or
gender. In addition, health insurance
issuers will no longer be able to segment
enrollees into separate rating pools in
order to charge high-risk individuals
more than low-risk individuals. These
reforms, combined with other
provisions in the Affordable Care Act,
will improve the functioning of both the
individual and small group markets and
make health insurance affordable and
accessible to millions of individuals and
families who currently lack affordable
coverage options.
The Department of Health and Human
Services (HHS) published proposed
standards to implement the 2014 market
reform provisions of the Affordable Care
Act and to amend the federal rate
review program in a November 26, 2012
PO 00000
Frm 00002
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Federal Register proposed rule entitled
‘‘Patient Protection and Affordable Care
Act; Health Insurance Market Rules;
Rate Review’’ (77 FR 70584). These
standards apply to health insurance
issuers offering non-grandfathered
health insurance coverage both inside
and outside of the new competitive
marketplaces called Affordable
Insurance Exchanges, or ‘‘Exchanges.’’
This final rule: (1) Provides that
health insurance issuers may vary the
premium rate for health insurance
coverage in the individual and small
group markets only based on family
size, geography, and age and tobacco
use within limits; (2) directs health
insurance issuers to offer coverage to
and accept every employer or individual
who applies for coverage in the group
and individual market, subject to certain
exceptions; (3) directs health insurance
issuers to renew or continue in force
coverage in the group and individual
market, subject to certain exceptions; (4)
codifies the requirement that issuers
maintain a single risk pool for the
individual market and a single risk pool
for the small group market (unless a
state decides to merge the markets into
a single risk pool); and (5) outlines
standards for enrollment in catastrophic
plans for young adults and people who
cannot otherwise afford health
insurance.
Finally, this rule amends the
standards under the rate review program
in 45 CFR part 154. The amendments
revise the timeline for states to propose
state-specific thresholds for review and
approval by CMS. The amendments also
direct health insurance issuers to submit
data relating to proposed rate increases
in a standardized format specified by
the Secretary of HHS (the Secretary),
and modify criteria and factors for states
to have an effective rate review program.
These changes are necessary to reflect
the new market reform provisions
discussed above and to fulfill the
statutory requirement beginning in 2014
that the Secretary, in conjunction with
the states, monitor premium increases of
health insurance coverage offered
through an Exchange and outside of an
Exchange. The provisions are also
designed to streamline data collection
for issuers, states, Exchanges, and HHS.
The substantive authority for these
final rules is generally sections 2701,
2702, 2703, 2723 and 2794 of the Public
Health Service Act (PHS Act) and
sections 1302(e), 1312(c), and 1560(c) of
the Affordable Care Act. PHS Act
section 2792 authorizes rulemaking as
necessary or appropriate to carry out the
provisions of title XXVII of the PHS Act,
including sections 2701, 2702, 2703,
2723, and 2794. Section 1321(a) of the
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
Affordable Care Act authorizes
rulemaking with respect to sections
1302(e), 1312(c), and 1560(c).
I. Background
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
A. Legislative Overview
The Patient Protection and Affordable
Care Act (Pub. L. 111–148) was enacted
on March 23, 2010. The Health Care and
Education Reconciliation Act of 2010
(Pub. L. 111–152) was enacted on March
30, 2010. We refer to the two statutes
collectively as the ‘‘Affordable Care
Act’’ in this final rule.
Subtitles A and C of title I of the
Affordable Care Act reorganized,
amended, and added to the provisions
of part A of title XXVII of the PHS Act
relating to health insurance issuers in
the group and individual markets and to
group health plans that are non-federal
governmental plans.1 As relevant here,
these PHS Act provisions include
section 2701 (fair health insurance
premiums), section 2702 (guaranteed
availability of coverage), section 2703
(guaranteed renewability of coverage),
and section 2794 (ensuring that
consumers get value for their dollars). In
addition, subtitle D of title I of the
Affordable Care Act includes section
1302(e) (catastrophic plans) and section
1312(c) (single risk pool). These
provisions will establish a federal floor
that ensures individuals and employers
in all states have certain basic
protections with respect to the
availability and affordability of health
insurance coverage.
Section 2701(a)(1) of the PHS Act
regarding fair health insurance
premiums provides that the premium
rate charged by a health insurance
issuer for health insurance coverage
offered in the individual or small group
market may vary with respect to a
particular plan or coverage only based
on the following factors: (1) Whether the
plan or coverage covers an individual or
family; (2) rating area; (3) age (within a
ratio of 3:1 for adults); and (4) tobacco
use (within a ratio of 1.5:1). Section
2701(a)(2) directs each state to establish
one or more rating areas and charges the
Secretary with reviewing the adequacy
of state-established rating areas. If the
Secretary determines that a state’s rating
areas are not adequate, or that a state
1 The Affordable Care Act also added section
715(a)(1) to the Employee Retirement Income
Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) and section 9815(a)(1)
to the Internal Revenue Code (the Code) to
incorporate the provisions of part A of title XXVII
of the PHS Act into ERISA and the Code, and to
make them applicable to group health plans other
than non-federal governmental group health plans.
The market reform provisions discussed in this
final rule apply only to health insurance issuers
offering health insurance coverage.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
does not establish such areas, the statute
authorizes the Secretary to establish
rating areas for that state. Section
2701(a)(3) directs the Secretary, in
consultation with the National
Association of Insurance Commissioners
(NAIC), to define permissible age bands
for rating purposes. Section 2701(a)(4)
provides that, for purposes of family
coverage, any rating variation for age
and tobacco use must be applied based
on the portion of the premium
attributable to each family member.
Section 2702 of the PHS Act directs
a health insurance issuer offering health
insurance coverage in the group or
individual market in a state to accept
every employer and individual in the
state that applies for the coverage,
subject to certain exceptions. These
exceptions allow issuers to restrict
enrollment in coverage: (1) To open and
special enrollment periods as described
in section 2702(b); (2) to employers with
eligible individuals who live, work, or
reside in the service area of a network
plan as described in section
2702(c)(1)(A); and (3) in certain
situations involving limited network
capacity and limited financial capacity
as described in section 2702(c)(1)(B) and
(d).
Section 2703 of the PHS Act requires
a health insurance issuer to renew or
continue in force any coverage in the
group or individual market at the option
of the plan sponsor or the individual.
Exceptions to this requirement
described in section 2703(b) allow the
issuer to nonrenew or discontinue
coverage for nonpayment of premiums,
fraud, or violation of participation or
contribution rules under state law. The
law also permits an issuer to cease to
offer either a particular type of product
or all coverage in a particular market, to
refuse to renew coverage if all of the
plan’s enrollees leave the service area of
a network plan, or if group health plan
coverage is provided through a bona
fide association and the employer’s
association membership ends. Finally,
an exception outlined in section 2703(d)
permits a health insurance issuer, at the
time of coverage renewal, to modify the
coverage offered to a group health plan
in the large group market, or in the
small group market if, for coverage that
is available in such market other than
through one or more bona fide
associations, the modification is
consistent with state law and effective
on a uniform basis among group health
plans with that product.2
2 Section 2742 of the PHS Act provides a
corresponding exception for the uniform
modification of coverage in the individual market.
PO 00000
Frm 00003
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13407
Section 2701 applies to health
insurance issuers offering health
insurance coverage in the individual
and small group markets, and in the
large group market if a state, beginning
in 2017, allows health insurance issuers
in the large group market to offer
qualified health plans (QHPs) in such
market through an Exchange pursuant to
section 1312(f)(2)(B) of the Affordable
Care Act.3 Sections 2702 and 2703
apply to issuers in the individual and
group (small and large) markets. These
provisions apply to health insurance
coverage in the respective markets
regardless of whether the coverage is a
QHP offered on Exchanges. Section
1255 of the Affordable Care Act
provides that sections 2701, 2702, and
2703 of the PHS Act are effective for
plan years (in the individual market,
policy years) beginning on or after
January 1, 2014.4 Section 1251(a)(2) of
the Affordable Care Act provides that
these PHS Act sections do not apply to
grandfathered health insurance
coverage.
Section 1302 of the Affordable Care
Act specifies levels of coverage or
‘‘actuarial values’’ that health plans in
the individual and small group markets,
both inside and outside of an Exchange,
will meet as part of the requirement to
cover an essential health benefits (EHB)
package beginning in 2014. These plans
will provide a bronze, silver, gold, or
platinum level of coverage as described
in section 1302(d), or a catastrophic
plan in the individual market as
described in section 1302(e) for young
adults and people who cannot otherwise
afford health insurance.
Section 1312(c)(1) and (2) of the
Affordable Care Act directs a health
insurance issuer to consider all
enrollees in all health plans (other than
grandfathered health plans) offered by
such issuer to be members of a single
risk pool for a market (the individual
market or small group market). Section
1312(c)(3) gives states the option to
merge the individual and small group
markets within the state into a single
risk pool. Section 1312(c) applies to
health plans offered both inside and
outside of an Exchange for plan years
(in the individual market, policy years)
beginning on or after January 1, 2014. It
does not apply to grandfathered health
plans, and explicitly preempts state law
3 The applicable definitions for ‘‘individual
market,’’ ‘‘small group market,’’ and ‘‘large group
market’’ are found in PHS Act section 2791(e) and
section 1304(a) of the Affordable Care Act.
4 See 45 CFR 144.103 for definitions of ‘‘plan
year’’ and ‘‘policy year.’’ These terms are defined
differently from ‘‘plan year’’ and ‘‘benefit year’’ as
defined in 45 CFR 155.20 with respect to QHPs.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13408
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
requiring grandfathered health plans to
be included in a single risk pool.
Section 1003 of the Affordable Care
Act adds a new section 2794 of the PHS
Act, which directs the Secretary, in
conjunction with the states, to establish
a process for the annual review of
‘‘unreasonable increases in premiums
for health insurance coverage.’’ The
statute provides that health insurance
issuers must submit to the Secretary and
the applicable state justifications for
unreasonable premium increases prior
to the implementation of the increases.
Section 2794(b)(2) also specifies that in
plan years beginning in 2014, the
Secretary, in conjunction with the
states, shall monitor premium increases
of health insurance coverage offered
through an Exchange and outside of an
Exchange. Section 2794 of the PHS Act
does not, by its own terms, apply to
grandfathered health insurance coverage
or to self-funded plans. Regulations at
45 CFR 154.101(b) further limit the
scope of review to small group and
individual market coverage.
Section 1563 of the Affordable Care
Act amended the Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act of
1996 (HIPAA) enforcement provision
that previously governed group health
insurance coverage and non-federal
governmental group health plans by
expanding its scope to include
individual health insurance coverage
and by renumbering the provision as
section 2723 of the PHS Act.
The preemption provisions of PHS
Act section 2724(a)(1) apply so that the
requirements of part A of title XXVII of
the PHS Act are not to be ‘‘construed to
supersede any provision of state law
which establishes, implements, or
continues in effect any standard or
requirement solely relating to health
insurance issuers in connection with
individual or group health insurance
coverage except to the extent that such
standard or requirement prevents the
application of a requirement’’ of part A
of title XXVII of the PHS Act. Section
1321(d) of the Affordable Care Act
applies the same preemption principle
to the requirements of title I of the
Affordable Care Act.5
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
B. Structure of the Final Rule
The regulations outlined in this final
rule are codified in 45 CFR parts 144,
5 In addition, section 1252 of the Affordable Care
Act provides that any standard or requirement
adopted by a state pursuant to title I of the
Affordable Care Act (or an amendment made by
title I) must be applied uniformly to all health plans
in each insurance market to which the standard and
requirements apply. Sections 1302(e) and 1312(c) of
the Affordable Care Act and the amendments to
PHS Act sections 2701, 2702, and 2703 are all
found in title I of the Affordable Care Act.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:06 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
147, 150, 154, and 156. Part 144 outlines
standards regarding the basis, scope,
and applicability of 45 CFR parts 144
through 148. Part 147 outlines standards
for health insurance issuers in the group
and individuals markets related to
health insurance reforms. Part 150
outlines standards regarding
enforcement. Part 154 outlines
standards for health insurance issuers in
the small group and individual markets
with respect to rate increase disclosure
and review. Part 156 outlines standards
for issuers of QHPs, including with
respect to participation in an Exchange.
II. Provisions of the Proposed Rule and
Analysis and Responses to Comments
HHS published standards under the
statutory provisions discussed in
section I.A. of the preamble in a
November 26, 2012 Federal Register
proposed rule entitled ‘‘Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act;
Health Insurance Market Rules; Rate
Review’’ (77 FR 70584). HHS received
approximately 500 comment letters in
response to the November 26, 2012
proposed rule. Commenters represented
a wide variety of stakeholders,
including states, tribal organizations,
consumers, health insurance issuers,
health care providers, employers,
members of the public, and others.
Additionally, HHS consulted with the
NAIC through its Health Care Reform
Actuarial (B) Working Group to define
permissible age bands and consulted
with and requested formal, written
comments from tribal leaders and
representatives about the provisions of
this rule that impact tribes.
This section summarizes the
provisions of the November 26, 2012
proposed rule and discusses and
provides responses to the comments.
A. Part 144—Requirements Relating to
Health Insurance Coverage
1. Subpart A—General Provisions
(§ 144.101 and § 144.102)
HHS proposed technical changes in
§ 144.101 and § 144.102 to clarify
enforcement of the health insurance
reform requirements added by the
Affordable Care Act and implemented
in 45 CFR part 147. In § 144.102(c), HHS
also proposed to clarify how to
determine whether insurance coverage
sold through associations is group or
individual coverage under the PHS Act.
Comments received regarding HHS’s
enforcement processes and regarding
bona fide associations are addressed in
other sections of the preamble that we
deemed to be more relevant to the
substance of the comments.
PO 00000
Frm 00004
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Comment: Several commenters
supported the clarifications proposed in
Part 144. In particular, commenters
supported the clarifications concerning
coverage sold through associations,
noting that they would ensure such
coverage complies with the market
reform protections of the Affordable
Care Act.
Response: Based on the comments
received, we are finalizing the proposed
provisions in § 144.101 and § 144.102 of
the proposed rule without modification.
Comment: A few commenters asked
for clarification about how to determine
whether a group policy should be
treated as large group or small group
coverage for purposes of applying the
PHS Act requirements when employer
group size fluctuates between the
definition of large employer and small
employer.
Response: We intend to issue future
guidance on counting employees for
determining market size of a group
health plan.
B. Part 147—Health Insurance Reform
Requirements for the Group and
Individual Health Insurance Markets
1. Fair Health Insurance Premiums
(§ 147.102)
Section 147.102 of this final rule
implements section 2701 the PHS Act,
which specifies that the only rating
factors that may be used to vary
premium rates for health insurance
coverage in the individual and small
group markets are (1) Family size; (2)
geographic rating area; (3) age (within a
ratio of 3:1 for adults); and (4) tobacco
use (within a ratio of 1.5:1).6 7
Comment: We received several
comments requesting flexibility in the
application of section 2701. For
example, some commenters suggested
that we allow states and issuers to phase
in the premium rating rules, specifically
the 3:1 age rating factor. One commenter
recommended issuer flexibility to
transition to the new per-member-rating
methodology in states without
community rating. Further, some
commenters noted that small businesses
in Massachusetts are permitted to form
6 All non-grandfathered health insurance
coverage offered through associations and through
multiple employer welfare arrangements (MEWAs)
is subject to the premium rating rules applicable to
the appropriate market, as defined by PHS Act
section 2791(e)(1), (3), and (5) (definitions of
individual market, large group market, and small
group market, respectively).
7 The age, tobacco use, and geographic rating
factors are multiplicative. For example, the
maximum variation for age and tobacco use is 4.5:1
(3 times 1.5:1). The family rate calculation could be
additive or multiplicative, depending on whether a
per-member- or family-tier-rating methodology is
used, as discussed later in this preamble.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
group health insurance purchasing
cooperatives and receive premium
discounts based on other factors that,
while permitted by state law, were not
explicitly included in the proposed rule.
Response: We do not have the legal
authority to permit any rating factors in
the final rule other than those explicitly
permitted by section 2701 of the PHS
Act. Further, we do not have the legal
authority to provide for a phase-in of
certain rating provisions such as the 3:1
age factor or the per-member-rating
methodology.
a. Family Rating
In § 147.102(c)(1), we proposed that
issuers develop premiums for family
coverage by adding up the rate of each
covered family member.8 Under this
proposal, the rates of no more than the
three oldest family members under age
21 would be taken into account in
computing the family premium. There
would be no cap on the number of
family members age 21 and older whose
per-member rates would be added into
the family premium. We solicited
comment on the number of family
members that should be included in this
rating cap, as well as the appropriate age
limit for the cap.
We noted that rating based on
specified family tiers, and other family
rating practices that fail to apply the age
and tobacco use factors proportionately
to individual family members, would
generally be impermissible pursuant to
PHS Act section 2701(a)(4), which
requires that any rating variation for age
and tobacco use be apportioned to each
family member’s premium. However, in
§ 147.102(c)(2), we proposed flexibility
for community rated states that do not
permit rating based on age or tobacco
use to require issuers to use a standard
family-tier methodology with
corresponding multipliers. We solicited
comment on whether instead of
permitting such flexibility, states with
pure community rating should also use
the per-member approach that would be
used in states that allow rating for age
and tobacco use.
We noted that health insurance
issuers currently have flexibility in
determining how to set rates for family
policies and in defining which family
members may be on the same policy,
subject to federal and state laws
requiring coverage of certain
individuals. We solicited comment on
8 Under this approach, the issuer would charge
the same per-member premium for all family
members of the same age and tobacco use status.
The issuer could not charge different rates for
family members of the same age and tobacco use
status based on their status, for example, as the
policyholder, spouse, or dependent.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
whether to set standards governing the
minimum categories of family members
that issuers must include in setting rates
for family policies or to defer to states
and issuers to make this determination.
We also solicited comment on the types
of individuals who are typically
included under family coverage,
including types of covered individuals
who would not meet the classification
of tax dependents under the Code.
Comment: Many commenters
remarked on the proposed three-person
rating cap for family members under age
21. Several commenters supported the
cap, while some commenters expressed
concern that it would increase rates for
individuals and smaller families. Other
commenters believed the cap would
increase rates for larger families and
requested that no more than two
children under age 21 be rated for
family coverage. Several commenters
recommended clarifying that only the
three oldest ‘‘dependent children’’
under age 21 would be taken into
account in computing the family
premium, so that policyholders and
spousal dependents under age 21 would
not be counted toward the three-person
cap. Other commenters suggested
raising the age limit for the cap to age
26, to better align with the rules
regarding extension of dependent
coverage under section 2714 of the PHS
Act.
Response: The final rule maintains
the cap at three persons, but clarifies
that the cap applies only to the rates of
no more than the three oldest ‘‘covered
children’’ under age 21. This will
mitigate premium increases for larger
families accustomed to family tier rating
structures and allow for more accurate
rating of families with spouses under
the age of 21. We maintain age 21 as the
age limit for the cap given that the
medical risk associated with individuals
between age 21 and 26 is higher than
the risk associated with individuals
under the age of 21. Further, this
approach maintains consistency with
our approach to child and adult rates for
purposes of applying the age rating
factor.
Comment: Many commenters
supported the proposed per-memberrating methodology and the flexibility
for states with community rating to
require health insurance issuers to use
a standard family-tier methodology with
corresponding multipliers. Some
commenters suggested that all states
should have the option to use a familytier structure, while other commenters
supported applying per-member rating
uniformly across all states, including
those with community rating. A few
commenters requested clarification of
PO 00000
Frm 00005
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13409
whether there is a limit on the number
of family-tier categories permitted in
community rated states.
Response: PHS Act section 2701(a)(4)
compels per-member rating because the
age and tobacco use factors must be
attributable to individuals. Thus, only
community rated states, which do not
allow rating based on age or tobacco
use, are able to implement family-tierrating structures consistent with PHS
Act section 2701(a)(4). Those states may
require all health insurance issuers in
the individual and small group markets
to use a standard family-tier
methodology with corresponding
multipliers and will have the discretion
to set the number of tiers in the familytier structure. If a state has community
rating but does not adopt a uniform
family-tier structure (with
corresponding multipliers), per-member
rating will apply in that state.
Comment: Numerous commenters
recommended that the final rule defer to
the states (and to issuers if permitted by
state law) on the categories of family
members that must be included on a
family policy, noting that state law
typically provides the basis for defining
familial status. Other commenters urged
that HHS adopt a broad definition of
family coverage that accounts for all
family compositions, including opposite
sex and same sex domestic partners;
biological, adoptive, step, foster, and
grandchildren (if under the care of a
grandparent); children under
guardianship arrangements; and any
other child who would be considered a
tax dependent under the Code.
Response: The final rule does not
specify the minimum categories of
family members that must be rated
together on a family policy. We
recognize that state laws differ with
respect to marriage, adoption, and
custody and believe that states are best
positioned to make decisions regarding
family coverage practices. Accordingly,
states have the flexibility to require
issuers to include specific types of
individuals on a family policy and
nothing in these final rules precludes
this ability. We note that if an
individual is not eligible for family
coverage, he or she will be able to
purchase individual coverage on a
guaranteed availability basis.
b. Small Group Rating
In § 147.102(c)(3), we proposed that
issuers in the small group market
calculate rates for employee and
dependent coverage on a per-member
basis, and calculate the group premium
by totaling the premiums attributable to
each covered individual. States may
require issuers to base small group
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13410
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
premiums on an average amount for
each employee in the group, provided
that the total group premium equals the
premium that would be derived through
the per-member-rating approach.
Furthermore, employers would retain
flexibility to decide how to allocate
employer contributions to health
coverage.
Comments: Many commenters
supported applying per-member rating
in the small group market, especially in
the Small Business Health Options
Program (SHOP) where an ‘‘employee
choice’’ model would make composite
rating difficult to administer. However,
some commenters recommended
allowing composite rating in the small
group market outside the SHOP, and for
‘‘employer choice’’ coverage inside the
SHOP where permitted, to minimize
disruption in current issuer rating
practices. Other comments raised
concern that moving to per-member
rating may increase premiums for older
workers.
Response: The final rule directs that
issuers use the per-member-rating
methodology in the small group market.
As discussed in the November 26, 2012
proposed rule, per-member rating
assures compliance with the
requirement that age and tobacco rating
only be apportioned to an individual
family member’s premium, enhances
employee choice inside the SHOP, and
promotes the accuracy of the risk
adjustment methodology. Nothing in
these final rules precludes a state from
requiring issuers to offer (or a small
employer from electing to offer)
premiums based on average employee
amounts where every employee in the
group is charged the same premium. We
note that the age bands, as implemented
by the per-member-rating methodology,
are only generally applicable to health
insurance coverage in the individual
and small group markets and are
consistent with the Age Discrimination
in Employment Act of 1967, 29 U.S.C.
621.
c. Geographic Rating
In § 147.102(b), we proposed that each
state establish rating areas, which would
be presumed adequate if they meet one
of the following options: one rating area
for the entire state, or no more than
seven rating areas based on counties,
three-digit zip codes (that is, areas in
which all zip codes share the same first
three digits), or metropolitan statistical
areas (MSAs) and non-MSA geographic
divisions.9 We proposed that states
9 MSAs encompass at least one urban core with
a population of at least 50,000 people, plus adjacent
territory that has a high degree of social and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
would also be permitted to use other
actuarially justified geographic
divisions, or a number of rating areas
greater than seven, with approval from
HHS to ensure adequacy. In the event
that states do not exercise the option to
establish rating areas (or a state’s rating
areas were determined to be
inadequate), we proposed that the
default would be a single rating area for
the entire state or one of the other
proposed geographic standards as
determined by HHS in consultation
with the state, local issuers, and other
interested stakeholders.
The November 26, 2012 proposed rule
requested comment on various aspects
concerning the proposed geographic
rating area standards, namely comments
concerning the use of other geographic
divisions or factors; the maximum
number of rating areas within a state
that would be presumed adequate;
whether states with existing rating areas
would have to make changes to conform
to the proposed standards; whether to
establish minimum geographic size and
population requirements; and the
appropriate schedules and procedures
for states to modify their rating areas in
the future.
Comment: While some commenters
supported the proposed rating area
standards, many expressed concern that
HHS would not extend a presumption of
adequacy if a state established more
than seven rating areas. Commenters
asserted that the threshold of seven
rating areas may not be high enough to
reflect actuarially justified differences in
health care costs and utilization
patterns, particularly in states with large
and diverse health care markets, and
noted that issuers today use more than
seven rating areas in some states. These
commenters recommended that states
have flexibility to establish rating areas
that reflect local market conditions and
that minimize disruption. Others
commenters were concerned about
discrimination against rural,
underserved, or high-cost populations.
Response: Following review of the
comments submitted on this issue, we
have determined that it is appropriate to
modify the standards in § 147.102(b) to
provide states with additional flexibility
to establish rating areas under section
2701 of the PHS Act. The revised
standards recognize that in many cases,
states established rating areas after an
open and transparent dialogue with
stakeholders. Further, the revised
economic integration with the core. MSAs are
always established along county boundaries, but
may include counties from more than one state. The
367 MSAs in the United States include
approximately one-third of the counties and 83
percent of the population of the United States.
PO 00000
Frm 00006
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
standards are intended to provide
sufficient flexibility to states to establish
rating areas that are responsive to local
market conditions, while protecting
consumers from potentially
discriminatory rating practices.
Section 147.102(b)(3) of this final rule
provides that a state’s rating areas must
be based on one the following
geographic divisions: Counties, threedigit zip codes, or MSAs and nonMSAs, and will be presumed adequate
if they meet either of the following
conditions: (1) As of January 1, 2013,
the state had established by law, rule,
regulation, bulletin, or other executive
action uniform geographic rating areas
for the entire state; or (2) After January
1, 2013, the state establishes by law,
rule, regulation, bulletin, or other
executive action for the entire state no
more geographic rating areas than the
number of MSAs in the state plus one.
Under these standards, geographic
rating areas may be noncontiguous, but
the area encompassed by a geographic
rating area must be separate and distinct
from areas encompassed by other
geographic rating areas. As mentioned,
rating areas must be based on counties,
three-digit zip codes, or MSAs/nonMSAs. While we proposed the
possibility that HHS might approve
rating areas based on other existing
geographic divisions, we have
determined that these are the only
geographic boundaries that would be
feasible for purposes of implementing
the premium tax credit under Code
section 36B. We note that if a state had
established geographic rating areas on or
before January 1, 2013 that did not
follow these geographic boundaries, the
state would have an opportunity to
adjust their proposed rating areas before
the default rating area is applied.
We recognize that a greater number of
rating areas than the number of MSAs
in the state plus one may in some cases
be actuarially justified. Therefore, states
have the option pursuant to
§ 147.102(b)(4) of this final rule to seek
approval from HHS of a greater number
of rating areas as long as the areas are
based on counties, three-digit zip codes,
or MSAs and non-MSAs. We will
review such state proposals to ensure
they are actuarially justified and nondiscriminatory as discussed below.
Comment: A few commenters
requested that HHS specify the criteria
it will use to assess the adequacy of
state rating area proposals.
Response: As mentioned above, states
may seek approval from HHS of a
number of geographic rating areas that
is greater than the number of MSAs in
the state plus one, provided they are
based on counties, three-digit zip codes,
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
or MSAs/non-MSAs. HHS will review
the state proposals pursuant to the
criteria described in § 147.102(b)(5) of
this final rule. We will determine that
a state’s rating areas are adequate if
they: (1) Are actuarially justified; (2) are
not unfairly discriminatory; (3) reflect
significant differences in health care
unit costs by rating area; (4) lead to
stability in rates over time; (5) apply
uniformly to all health insurance issuers
in a market; and (6) are based on one of
the geographic boundaries described
above. We believe these are the
appropriate criteria to ensure state
rating areas are adequate and not
designed to isolate high-cost
populations of the state.
Comment: One commenter requested
clarification as to whether PHS Act
section 2701 prevents a state from
setting limits on the permissible
variation in a rating area factor.
Response: Section 2701 of the PHS
Act does not limit the amount by which
rates may vary based on geography.
Therefore, states and issuers may
determine the appropriate variation for
the geographic rating area factor. We
note, however, that a rating area factor
should be actuarially justified to ensure
that individuals and employers are not
charged excessively high premiums that
render meaningless the guaranteed
availability protections of section 2702
of the PHS Act.
Comment: A few commenters
requested clarification of whether states
must apply geographic rating areas
uniformly across the individual and
small group markets in a state. Other
commenters asked whether rating areas
may vary by product, noting that
provider contracting varies
geographically between Preferred
Provider Organization (PPO) and Health
Maintenance Organization (HMO) plans,
and also between broad and narrow
networks.
Response: PHS Act section 2701 does
not prevent a state from establishing
different rating areas for the individual
or small group markets. However, to
preserve the integrity of the single risk
pool requirement, rating areas must
apply uniformly within each market and
may not vary by product. If a state
merges its individual and small group
markets pursuant to section 1312(c) of
the Affordable Care Act, rating areas
will apply uniformly to both the
individual and small group markets in
the state.
Comment: Several commenters
suggested that HHS should not establish
minimum geographic size and
population standards for rating areas.
Commenters noted that geographic
differences in health care costs are
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
based on factors such as price, provider
agreements, utilization patterns, and
access to care and technology—not
based on size or population. By contrast,
a few commenters argued minimum
geographic size and population
requirements were necessary to ensure
that rating areas are not excessive in
small or sparsely populated states.
Response: This final rule does not
establish minimum geographic size or
population requirements. We believe
the geographic standards and criteria set
forth in this final rule provide the
appropriate basis for ensuring that state
rating areas are actuarially justified and
non-discriminatory.
Comment: A few commenters argued
that states should have the flexibility to
align rating areas with service areas to
prevent issuer ‘‘cherry-picking’’ of
service areas. Commenters expressed
concern that if issuers are able to choose
to write business in only the lower cost
areas within geographic rating areas,
there could be reduced competition and
consumer access issues.
Response: While the final rule does
not require that geographic rating areas
be aligned with service areas, we
recommend that states consider aligning
both rating and service areas. As we
noted in the March 27, 2012 Federal
Register final rule entitled ‘‘Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act;
Establishment of Exchange and
Qualified Health Plans; Exchange
Standards for Employers’’ (77 FR
18309), herein referred to as the
Exchange final rule, Exchanges have
flexibility on several elements of the
QHP certification process, including the
contracting model, so that Exchanges
can appropriately adjust to local market
conditions and consumer needs. To the
extent issuers operate within such
uniform service areas or operate
statewide, this policy would facilitate
consumers’ ability to compare health
insurance premiums, promoting
competition within the market.
Furthermore, aligning rating areas with
QHP service areas in the Exchange may
simplify consumer understanding and
Exchange administration of eligibility
determinations for premium tax credits,
which may be complex if QHP service
areas are highly individualized.
Comment: Many commenters
expressed concern that applying a single
statewide rating area as the default
standard would not be appropriate in
many states. Commenters suggested
various alternatives, such as defaulting
to county, three-digit zip code, or MSA
boundaries; defaulting to existing state
or issuer rating areas; or defaulting to
the rating areas of the state’s EHB base
benchmark plan.
PO 00000
Frm 00007
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13411
Response: Although the November 26,
2012 proposed rule suggested flexibility
in applying either a single statewide
rating area or another geographic
standard as the default, in response to
comments, we are modifying
§ 147.102(b)(2) to specify that if a state
does not establish rating areas (or does
not provide information to CMS about
such rating areas in accordance with the
state reporting requirements discussed
in section II.B.2. of the preamble), or a
state’s rating areas are determined to be
inadequate, the default will be one
rating area for each MSA in the state
and one rating area for all other nonMSA portions of the state, as defined by
the Office of Management and Budget
(https://www.census.gov/population/
metro/data/def.html). We believe MSA/
non-MSA designations will sufficiently
reflect actuarially justified differences in
health care unit costs by geography and
ensure rating areas are established
timely, providing certainty to issuers.
We encourage states to establish rating
areas as soon as possible but not later
than 30 days following publication of
this final rule.
Comment: With respect to the process
for updating state-established rating
areas, several commenters suggested
that states have flexibility to
periodically review and modify their
geographic rating areas (including
default rating areas) as necessary or
appropriate. Some commenters
suggested that rating areas be reviewed
on a regular basis, such as annually or
biannually, while other commenters
suggested less frequent reviews, subject
to the discretion of the states. Several
commenters noted that insurance
products and rates are often developed
a year or more in advance and
emphasized that issuers must be given
adequate time to incorporate any
changes to rating areas into their
pricing.
Response: As discussed in section
II.B.2. of the preamble, § 147.103 of this
final rule provides for the Secretary to
issue guidance that will establish a
process and timeline for states to update
their rating areas (including default
rating areas). HHS anticipates this
process will provide sufficient notice to
health insurance issuers in advance of
state rate filing deadlines.
d. Age Rating
In 147.102(a)(1)(iii), we proposed that
the premium rate charged by a health
insurance issuer for non-grandfathered
health insurance coverage in the
individual or small group market may
vary by age, except that such rate may
not vary by more than 3:1 for adults, as
set forth by the statute. We proposed to
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13412
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
define adults as individuals age 21 and
older for purposes of this provision. For
individuals under age 21, we proposed
that rates must be actuarially justified
based on a standard population.
Further, we proposed that an enrollee’s
age for rating purposes be determined at
the time of policy issuance and renewal
and requested comment on whether
other measurement points, such as
birthdays, were appropriate.
After consulting with the NAIC, we
proposed the following standard age
bands for use in all states and markets
subject to section 2701 of the PHS Act:
• Children: A single age band for
children ages 0 through 20.
• Adults: One-year age bands for
adults ages 21 through 63.
• Older adults: A single age band for
adults ages 64 and older.
We solicited comment on the proposed
age bands, including comment on
whether single or multiple age bands for
children were appropriate.
Finally, we proposed that health
insurance issuers in a state and market
use a uniform age rating curve
established by the state, specifying the
relative distribution of rates across all
age bands. We proposed an HHS
standard default age curve that would
apply in both the individual and small
group markets in states that do not
exercise the option to establish their
own age curve. We requested comment
on the default age rating curve,
including comment on the premium
impact of the transition from the child
age curve to the adult age curve.
Comment: Many commenters
supported applying the maximum 3:1
age rating factor to adults defined as
individuals age 21 and older. Some
commenters, however, recommended
defining the adult age as beginning at
age 19 to better align with the definition
of ‘‘pediatric services’’ in the November
26, 2012 Federal Register proposed rule
entitled ‘‘Patient Protection and
Affordable Care Act; Standards Related
to Essential Health Benefits, Actuarial
Value, and Accreditation’’ (77 FR
70644), herein referred to as the EHB/
AV/Accreditation proposed rule. Other
commenters recommended that adult
rating begin at age 26, consistent with
the rules regarding dependent coverage
of children to age 26 under section 2714
of the PHS Act.10 Several commenters
suggested we allow issuers to develop
rates for individuals age 65 and older
outside of the 3:1 age rating factor due
to the higher health care costs
associated with this population.
Response: We are finalizing the
proposed requirement that the
10 45
CFR 147.120.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
maximum 3:1 ratio for age rating applies
to adults age 21 and older. PHS Act
section 2701(a)(1)(A)(iii) provides that
age rating with respect to adults must be
consistent with section 2707(c) relating
to child-only plans available to
individuals up to age 21. Accordingly,
the 3:1 age rating factor applies to all
individuals age 21 and older, including
those who may be eligible for Medicare
based on age. The 3:1 age factor ratio
does not apply to individuals under age
21.
Comment: Nearly all commenters
expressed support for the proposal to
establish single-year age bands for
adults age 21 through 63. However,
some commenters suggested that
multiple age bands for children were
necessary to reflect the fact that claims
costs for children vary by age,
particularly children age 0 to 1, who
have much higher health care costs than
older children.
Response: The final rule maintains a
single age band for children to keep
rates level between ages 0 through 1 and
ages 2 through 20. This will avoid
higher premiums for newborns and
provide for easier price comparisons
between different plans. A single band
for children also simplifies and
promotes efficiency of the risk
adjustment methodology.
Comment: Most commenters
supported determining an enrollee’s age
for rating purposes once a year at the
time of policy issuance or renewal.
Commenters stated that such annual
determination is generally consistent
with current issuer rating practices,
helps enrollees to understand and plan
for rate increases, and promotes
administrative efficiency for issuers. In
instances where a family member is
added to a family policy or an employee
is added to a group health plan outside
of policy issuance or renewal, a few
commenters requested issuer flexibility
to apply an age rating factor based on
the new enrollee’s age at the time of
enrollment.
Response: Based on the comments
received, we are finalizing the provision
that for rating purposes an enrollee’s age
be determined at the time of policy
issuance or renewal. We clarify that for
individuals who are added to the plan
or coverage other than on the date of
policy issuance or renewal, the
enrollee’s age may be determined as of
the date such individuals are added or
enrolled in the coverage.
Comment: A few commenters
requested state flexibility to use
different age-band structures, such as
five-year bands in the small group
market. One commenter specifically
recommended that states operating their
PO 00000
Frm 00008
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
own risk adjustment programs should
have flexibility to establish age bands
and to determine whether they must be
standardized across a market. Other
commenters urged HHS to apply the
same age-band structure to both the
individual and small group markets to
align more closely with per-member
rating, minimize rate disruption when
individuals move between the two
markets, and facilitate states’ ability to
merge the individual and small group
markets into a single risk pool if they
determine it appropriate.
Response: The uniform age bands in
this final rule apply in all states and
markets subject to section 2701 of the
PHS Act: the individual and small
group markets in all states, and the large
group market in states that, beginning in
2017, permit health insurance issuers in
the large group market to offer QHPs in
such market through an Exchange.
Applying age bands consistently
nationwide simplifies identification of
the second lowest cost silver plan for
calculation of the premium tax credit
under Code section 36B. As indicated
below, states are welcome to establish
their own age rating curve provided the
curve incorporates the uniform age
bands. A state may establish separate
age curves for the individual and small
group markets.
Comment: With respect to HHS’s
proposed default standard age curve,
several commenters recommended
smoothing the age curve to avoid a
significant premium differential
between the child age curve at age 20
and the adult age curve at age 21, while
another commenter recommended
smoothing the age curve for older
adults. One commenter suggested that
issuers should have flexibility to set
their own age curves. Another
commenter supported the default age
rating curve as proposed, suggesting that
it will enhance the transparency,
predictability, and accuracy of risk
adjustment. A few commenters urged
that HHS not make frequent changes to
the default age curve and that issuers be
provided sufficient time to respond to
any updates.
Response: As we stated in the
November 26, 2012 proposed rule, the
0.635 age rating factor for children age
0 through 20 is supported by HHS’s
analysis of data available through
HealthCare.gov and an examination of
the large group insurance market.
Although the shift from the child age
curve to the adult age curve could result
in a premium differential that is not
reflected in current issuer rating
practices, we do not believe the
differential will result in a significant
financial burden on consumers, given
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
the low premiums for individuals in
these age groups, as well as the relative
premium stability from ages 21 through
30.
HHS will establish in guidance a
default age rating curve that will apply
in both the individual and small group
markets in states that do not exercise the
option to establish their own age curve
(or that do not provide information to
CMS about their age curve in
accordance with the state reporting
requirements discussed in section II.B.2.
of the preamble). We intend to adopt in
guidance the default age curve as
proposed in the November 26, 2012
proposed rule for states that allow a
maximum 3:1 ratio for age rating. For
states that adopt narrower ratios for age
rating, the default age curve established
by HHS would take into account the
permissible rating variation for age
under state law. We intend to revise the
default age curve periodically, but no
more frequently than annually, to reflect
market patterns in the individual and
small group markets following
implementation of the 2014 market
reforms.
Comment: One commenter requested
clarification of whether issuers may
establish their own, actuarially justified
child age factor based on a standard
population, rather than using the 0.635
child age factor in the HHS default
standard age curve.
Response: Health insurance issuers
within a market and state must use the
uniform age rating curve established by
each state or the HHS default standard
age curve in instances where a state
does not establish a uniform age curve,
specifying the relative distribution of
rates for all age bands, including the
child age band. As discussed in the
November 26, 2012 proposed rule, the
age factor associated with the child age
band must be actuarially justified based
on a standard population.
Comment: A few commenters asked
HHS to clarify how age rating applies to
child-only plans. For example, some
commenters requested clarification that
the child age band and age curve apply
only to dependent children on family
policies, not to children enrolled in
child-only plans.
Response: The child age band and
child age curve apply to child-only
plans in the same manner that they
apply to all other individual and small
group market coverage. Thus, for
example, a 10-year-old child would be
charged the same rate based on age
whether the child was a dependent on
a family policy or enrolled in a childonly plan.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
e. Tobacco Rating
In § 147.102(a)(1)(iv), we proposed
that the premium rate charged by a
health insurance issuer for nongrandfathered health insurance coverage
offered in the individual or small group
market may vary for tobacco use, except
that such rate may not vary by more
than 1.5:1, as set forth by the statute.
States or issuers would have flexibility
within these limits to determine the
appropriate tobacco rating factor for
different age groups (for example,
younger enrollees could be charged a
lower tobacco use factor than older
enrollees provided the tobacco use
factor does not exceed 1.5:1 for any age
group).
Further, we proposed to coordinate
application of the tobacco rating rules of
PHS Act section 2701 with the
nondiscrimination and wellness
program rules of PHS Act section 2705.
Specifically, we proposed that a health
insurance issuer in the small group
market would be required to offer a
tobacco user the opportunity to avoid
paying the full amount of the tobacco
rating factor permitted under PHS Act
section 2701 if he or she participates in
a wellness program meeting the
standards of section 2705 of the PHS
Act and its implementing regulations.11
We solicited comment on this proposal
and on whether and how the same
wellness incentives promoting tobacco
cessation could apply in the individual
market.
We proposed that the definition of
‘‘tobacco use’’ for purposes of section
2701 be consistent with the approach
taken with respect to health-contingent
wellness programs designed to prevent
or reduce tobacco use under section
2705. We noted that a common
definition of ‘‘tobacco use’’ does not
currently exist among the states,
resulting in wide variation in how
health insurance issuers define and
assess tobacco use in insurance
applications. We solicited comment on
how to define ‘‘tobacco use’’ for
purposes of both section 2701 and
section 2705 and suggested several
possible approaches, such as reliance on
11 The Departments of HHS, Labor, and the
Treasury published proposed rules under PHS Act
section 2705 entitled ‘‘Incentives for
Nondiscriminatory Wellness Programs in Group
Health Plans’’ in the November 26, 2012 Federal
Register (77 FR 70620). The rules proposed that the
additional increase in the size of the reward for
wellness programs designed to prevent or reduce
tobacco use would not be limited to the small group
market, to provide consistency across markets and
to provide large group, self-insured, and
grandfathered employment-based plans the same
additional flexibility to promote tobacco-free
workforces as small, insured non-grandfathered
health plans.
PO 00000
Frm 00009
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13413
self-reporting, a defined amount of
tobacco use within a specified look-back
period, regular tobacco use, or tobacco
use of sufficient frequency so as to be
addicted to nicotine. We also solicited
comment on use of the single
streamlined application under 45 CFR
155.405 to collect information on
tobacco use.
Comments: Numerous commenters
supported establishing a clear definition
and standard application questions to
determine tobacco use. Commenters
stated that in defining tobacco use, it
would be important for HHS to specify
the types of tobacco products that
would be included, establish a
minimum frequency of usage, define the
appropriate look-back period, and
clarify permissible assessment methods.
For example, some commenters
recommended a broad definition that
includes any form of tobacco use in the
past 12 months, while other
commenters suggested considering only
the most common types of tobacco
products used within a 30-day lookback period. Additionally, some
commenters recommended relying on
self-reporting, while other commenters
sought flexibility for issuers to use
additional methods to verify accuracy
and prevent fraud, such as cotinine
testing, attestations, health assessments,
and physician affidavits. Several
commenters urged HHS to consult with
experts and use planned consumer
testing of the single streamlined
application to develop precise and
narrow language and questions about
tobacco use. A few commenters
representing tribal organizations
suggested that a uniform definition of
tobacco use include an express
exemption for religious and ceremonial
uses. One commenter suggested that
states have flexibility to determine what
constitutes tobacco use.
Response: The National Health
Interview Survey, administered by the
Centers for Disease Control and
Prevention, asks survey respondents if
they use tobacco products ‘‘every day,
some days, or not at all?’’ 12 In this final
rule, we establish a definition of
‘‘tobacco use’’ that is based on the
National Health Interview Survey, while
setting forth the meaning of ‘‘some
days’’ to ensure clarity for issuers and
consumers. Specifically, for purposes of
this final rule, we define ‘‘tobacco use’’
as use of tobacco on average of four or
more times per week within no longer
than the past six months. Further,
12 Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,
Cigarette Smoking Among Adults—United States,
1992, and Changes in the Definition of Current
Cigarette Smoking, MMWR Weekly 43(19); 342–
346, May 20, 1994.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13414
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
tobacco use must be defined in terms of
when a tobacco product was last used.
Tobacco includes all tobacco products.
However, religious or ceremonial uses
of tobacco (for example, by American
Indians and Alaska Natives) are
specifically exempt under this final
rule. This approach establishes a
minimum standard to assure
consistency in the individual and small
group health insurance markets and
simplifies administration of the tobacco
rating factor. For example, an individual
could be asked the following two
questions about tobacco use: (1) Within
the past six months, have you used
tobacco regularly (four or more times
per week on average excluding religious
or ceremonial uses)? (2) If yes, when
was the last time you used tobacco
regularly? Issuers will have flexibility
within the federal definition and as
permitted by applicable state law to
shorten the applicable period of time
from the last regular use of tobacco.
Because ‘‘four or more’’ as well as ‘‘six
months’’ are federal thresholds, states
have the ability to define both the
frequency of use per week and the lookback period in ways that are more
consumer protective (that is, a
frequency of more than four times per
week and a look-back period of less than
six months). This definition is
transitional. We intend to consult with
experts, use experience with the above
definition, and study the interaction
effects with the permanent risk
adjustment program to develop a more
evidenced-based definition of tobacco
use through future rulemaking or
guidance. We also intend to conduct
consumer testing of language and
questions about tobacco use.
Comment: Several commenters
requested additional consequences for
individuals who fail to disclose tobacco
use during the application process, such
as allowing issuers to collect additional
premiums or other penalties, to rescind
the policy in the case of intentional
misrepresentation or fraud, and to
determine the individual to be ineligible
for certain enrollment periods. In
addition, commenters suggested there
should be clear and prominent warnings
to applicants about the consequences of
failing to answer questions about
tobacco use truthfully.
Response: If an enrollee is found to
have reported false or incorrect
information about their tobacco use, the
issuer may retroactively apply the
appropriate tobacco use rating factor to
the enrollee’s premium as if the correct
information had been accurately
reported from the beginning of the plan
year. However, an issuer must not
rescind the coverage on this basis.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
Tobacco use is not a material fact for
which an issuer may rescind coverage if
there is a misrepresentation because
these regulations already provide the
remedy of recouping the tobacco
premium surcharge that should have
been paid since the beginning of the
plan or policy year. Accordingly, it is
the view of the Department of HHS,
Labor, and the Treasury (which share
interpretative jurisdiction over section
2712 of the PHS Act) that this remedy
of recoupment renders any
misrepresentation with regard to
tobacco use no longer a ‘‘material’’ fact
for purposes of rescission under PHS
Act section 2712 and its implementing
regulations.13 Additionally, under
guaranteed availability of coverage
rules, an issuer may not deny an
enrollee or their covered dependents an
enrollment period described in this final
rule because an enrollee provided false
or incorrect information about their
tobacco use.
Comments: Several commenters
remarked on the proposed rules
concerning tobacco rating and wellness
programs in the small group market.
Some commenters objected to the rules,
arguing that participation in a tobacco
cessation program does not necessarily
result in an actual reduction in the
specific financial risk associated with
tobacco use, and that issuers need to be
able to rate for the higher expected
claims costs of tobacco users. Several
other commenters supported the
proposed link between tobacco rating
and wellness programs, noting that
tobacco cessation programs are more
effective in addressing tobacco use than
a premium surcharge, and suggesting
that the rules should be expanded to
include participation in a broader array
of tobacco cessation programs offered
outside of one’s workplace, including in
the individual market.
Response: We finalize our proposal
that a health insurance issuer in the
small group market may impose the
tobacco rating factor under section 2701
only in connection with a wellness
program meeting the requirements
under section 2705, allowing a tobacco
user the opportunity to avoid paying the
full amount of the tobacco rating factor
by participating in a wellness program
meeting the standards of section 2705(j)
and its implementing regulations. We
note that wellness rules already apply in
the group market. Additionally, the use
of tobacco cessation programs may help
alleviate underreporting of tobacco use.
Pursuant to section 2701(a)(5) of the
PHS Act, these rules will apply to
13 26 CFR 54.9815–2712T, 29 CFR 2590.715–
2712, and 45 CFR 147.128.
PO 00000
Frm 00010
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
coverage offered in the large group
market in a state that, beginning in
2017, allows health insurance issuers to
offer QHPs in such market through an
Exchange.
Comment: Some commenters
supported the proposal allowing issuers
to vary tobacco rating by age. Other
commenters suggested that tobacco
rating should apply only with respect to
individuals age 18 and older, the age at
which people can begin to legally use
tobacco products in most states. Other
commenters expressed concern that
tobacco rating would disproportionally
impact low-income populations and
recommended that HHS prohibit
tobacco rating altogether.
Response: PHS Act section 2701
permits rating for tobacco use within a
ratio of 1.5:1. While we do not have
authority to prohibit the imposition of
the 1.5:1 tobacco rating factor, we agree
that tobacco rating should be limited to
legal use of tobacco products under
federal and state law, which generally is
limited to those 18 years and older. We
clarify our interpretation in the final
rule. Consistent with these rules and
subject to applicable state law, issuers
will have the flexibility to vary tobacco
rating by age, provided the tobacco use
factor does not exceed 1.5:1 for any age
band.
Comment: Several commenters sought
clarification that states may require a
narrower ratio than 1.5:1 for tobacco use
or prohibit tobacco rating altogether.
Response: Pursuant to section
2724(a)(1) of the PHS Act, a state law
with respect to health insurance issuers
is not preempted unless it prevents the
application of a federal requirement.
Section 2701 provides that the premium
rate charged by a health insurance
issuer in the individual or small group
market cannot vary for tobacco use by
more than 1.5:1. Therefore, a state law
that prescribes a narrower ratio (for
example, 1.25:1) or prohibits varying
rates for tobacco use altogether would
not be preempted, since such law would
not prevent the application of section
2701. Because states may generally
impose requirements on health
insurance issuers that are more
consumer protective than those imposed
by federal law, the language in proposed
§ 147.102(a)(1)(iv) providing that states
may use narrower tobacco rating factors
is unnecessary, and we remove it from
the final rule. (We make parallel
revisions in proposed § 147.102(a)(1)(iii)
with respect to state laws that use
narrower age rating factors).
2. State Reporting (§ 147.103)
In various provisions throughout
proposed § 147.102, we proposed that
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
no later than 30 days after publication
of the final rule, states submit certain
rating information to CMS generally to
support the accuracy of the risk
adjustment methodology. This included
information about the following, as
applicable:
• The use of a narrower age rating
ratio than 3:1 for adults age 21 and
older.
• The use of a narrower tobacco
rating ratio than 1.5:1 for individuals
who use tobacco.
• State-established rating areas.
• State-established age rating curves.
• In states with community rating, the
use of uniform family tiers and
corresponding multipliers.
• A requirement that premiums be
based on average enrollee amounts in
the small group market.
In addition, in § 156.80(c), we
proposed that a state inform CMS of its
decision to merge the individual and
small group markets in a state into a
single risk pool.
We received no comments about the
proposed reporting process.
Accordingly, we are finalizing the state
reporting process as proposed. However,
for organization and clarity, we are
consolidating these reporting
requirements in a new § 147.103 of this
final rule. Section 147.103(a) provides
that for the 2014 plan or policy year,
states will submit information no later
than 30 days following publication of
the final rule, in a form and manner
specified by the Secretary. Section
147.103(b) provides for the Secretary to
issue future guidance that would
establish a process and timeline for
states to submit information for plan or
policy years after 2014 (or for updating
a state standard that applies in 2014). As
described in § 156.80(c), states will
follow the same process with respect to
a state decision to merge the individual
and small group markets in a state into
a single risk pool.
3. Guaranteed Availability of Coverage
(§ 147.104)
In § 147.104, we proposed that a
health insurance issuer offering health
insurance coverage in the individual or
group market in a state must offer to any
individual or employer in the state all
of the issuer’s products that are
approved for sale in the applicable
market, and accept any individual or
employer that applies for those
products.14 Consistent with other
14 Other federal laws may restrict the health
insurance coverage products available to certain
individuals. For example, individuals must meet
certain requirements related to residency,
citizenship/immigration status, and nonincarceration in order to buy QHPs through an
Exchange (45 CFR 155.305(a)).
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
consumer protection rules under the
Affordable Care Act, we proposed that
this requirement include nongrandfathered closed blocks of business
and solicited comment on our proposal.
We also proposed that issuers
establish enrollment periods during
which they would allow individuals
and employers to purchase health
insurance coverage. We proposed to
align the initial and annual open
enrollment periods outside the
Exchanges with those inside the
Exchanges. Specifically, we proposed a
continuous open enrollment period in
the group market and a fixed open
enrollment period in the individual
market based on a calendar policy year,
consistent with the Exchange and SHOP
standards outlined in 45 CFR 155.410
and 155.725. Effective dates of coverage
would also follow those in the Exchange
and SHOP. We solicited comment on
how to address the open enrollment
needs of individual market enrollees
whose coverage renews on a noncalendar year basis.
We proposed that issuers in the
individual and group markets establish
special enrollment periods for
individuals and plan participants and
beneficiaries to enroll in coverage
outside of the annual open enrollment
period as a result of qualifying events
triggering eligibility for COBRA
continuation coverage under section 603
of ERISA.15 These special enrollment
periods are in addition to those in
section 2704(f) of the PHS Act and other
federal law.
We proposed that a participant,
beneficiary, or enrollee would have 30
calendar days from the date of a
qualifying event (generally consistent
with the HIPAA standard) to request
special enrollment, but invited
comment on whether to establish a
longer election period, such as 60
calendar days (generally consistent with
the Exchange standard). We proposed
special enrollment period effective dates
that followed the effective dates of
coverage for QHP special enrollment
periods in § 155.420(b). We noted that a
15 For employees, COBRA events include a loss of
coverage due to voluntary or involuntary
termination of employment for reasons other than
gross misconduct and reduction in the number of
hours of employment. For spouses of covered
employees, these events include a loss of coverage
due to reasons that would make the employee
eligible for COBRA, the employee’s becoming
entitled to Medicare, divorce or legal separation of
the covered employee, and death of the covered
employee. For children of covered employees, these
events include a loss of coverage due to reasons that
would make the employee eligible for COBRA, the
employee’s becoming entitled to Medicare, divorce
or legal separation of the covered employee, death
of the covered employee, and loss of dependent
child status under plan rules.
PO 00000
Frm 00011
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13415
notice of special enrollment rights is
currently required to be provided to
group health plan participants and
beneficiaries under HIPAA and solicited
comment on whether issuers in the
individual market should provide a
similar notice to individual market
enrollees.
Additionally, we proposed rules
governing the circumstances under
which issuers are permitted to deny
coverage to individuals and employers.
These rules would allow issuers to deny
coverage to an employer whose eligible
individuals do not live, work, or reside
in the service area of a network plan (or
to an individual who does not live or
reside in the service area of a network
plan) and in certain situations involving
limited network capacity and limited
financial capacity.
We also proposed that issuers in the
small group market would be permitted
to require small employers to satisfy
minimum contribution or group
participation requirements, to the extent
allowed by state law or, in the case of
a QHP offered in the SHOP, as
permitted by § 156.285(c), and to
decline to offer coverage if these
standards were not met. This policy was
intended to prevent adverse selection.
Specifically, we were concerned that a
small employer could take advantage of
the continuous open enrollment
opportunity under the proposed rule to
wait to purchase a group policy.
We also addressed the issue of
whether there could be an exception
from the guaranteed availability
requirements allowing coverage sold
through bona fide associations to be
limited to members of the association.
We contrasted the existing provisions in
section 2703(b) (which retained a
guaranteed renewability exception
permitting coverage to be limited to
members of a bona fide association)
with the provisions in section 2702
(where the exception had not been
included in the statute), and proposed
that there was no basis for an exception
from the guaranteed availability
requirement for coverage sold through
bona fide associations. We invited
comment, however, on whether and
how a transition or exception process
for bona fide association coverage could
be structured to minimize disruption.
To ensure consistency in the
marketing of health plans inside and
outside of the Exchange and to
minimize adverse selection, we
proposed to extend to the entire health
insurance market the Exchange
marketing standard applicable to QHPs
under § 156.225. This standard requires
that an issuer comply with state
marking standards and not employ
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13416
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
marketing practices or benefit designs
that will have the effect of discouraging
the enrollment of individuals with
significant health needs in health
insurance coverage.
Finally, we solicited comment about
how to prevent potential gaming of
guaranteed availability rights and about
strategies to minimize the risk of
adverse selection.
Comment: Several commenters asked
that the term ‘‘offer’’ in section 2702 be
interpreted to mean ‘‘actively
marketed,’’ so that issuers would not be
required to reopen closed blocks of
business. Commenters expressed
concern about having to develop
enrollment materials for closed
products. In addition, some commenters
were concerned that this requirement
would make it difficult for issuers to
bring existing products into compliance
with the Affordable Care Act in a
manner that minimizes consumer
confusion, and ultimately prompt some
issuers to terminate closed products.
Some commenters argued that the
requirement is not necessary because
starting in 2014, individuals will have
choices beyond closed blocks,
alleviating many of the concerns about
closed blocks in today’s market. Other
commenters requested flexibility for
states to determine the best policy for
addressing closed blocks.
Response: Section 2702 provides that
each health insurance issuer that offers
health insurance coverage in the group
or individual market in a state must
accept every employer or individual in
the state that applies for such coverage.
We have interpreted the term ‘‘offer’’ as
used throughout the title XXVII
requirements of the PHS Act as added
by the Affordable Care Act (which apply
to ‘‘a health insurance issuer offering
health insurance coverage’’) to refer to
an issuer offering both new as well as
existing coverage. Accordingly, this
final rule does not interpret the term
‘‘offer’’ in section 2702 to mean
‘‘actively marketing.’’ We note that
while this provision requires an issuer
to accept any individual or employer
that applies for coverage, it does not
require closed blocks to be actively
marketed. Furthermore, we clarify that
only non-grandfathered plans are
subject to guaranteed availability.
Comment: Several commenters
remarked on the application of the
guaranteed availability requirements to
coverage sold through bona fide
associations.
Response: We refer readers to section
II.F.2. of the preamble for discussion of
this issue.
Comment: We received a few
comments about the proposal that
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
issuers would be allowed to decline to
offer coverage to small employers for
failure to satisfy minimum contribution
or group participation requirements
under state law or the SHOP standards.
Several commenters expressed support
for the policy and recommended
extending it to the large group market.
One commenter emphasized that
minimum participation and
contribution standards must be
reasonable and not burdensome to the
point that small employers are
discouraged from offering coverage.
Response: Upon further consideration
of this issue, we have determined that
small employers cannot be denied
guaranteed availability of coverage for
failure to satisfy minimum participation
or contribution requirements. As in the
case of the bona fide association
exception discussed above, while
Congress left in place an exception for
failure to meet contribution or
participation requirements under the
guaranteed renewability requirement in
section 2703(b), it provided no such
exception from the guaranteed
availability requirement in section 2702.
To the contrary, language in the
guaranteed availability provision for
group health plans that was in place
before the Affordable Care Act was not
included in section 2702. Accordingly,
the proposed approach would conflict
with the guaranteed availability
provisions in section 2702 of the PHS
Act. Moreover, permitting issuers to
deny coverage altogether to a small
employer with between 50 and 100
employees based on a failure to meet
minimum participation or contribution
requirements could subject such
employer to a shared responsibility
payment under section 4980H of the
Code for a failure to offer coverage to its
employees.
While section 2702 contains no
exception to guaranteed availability
based on a failure to meet contribution
or minimum participation requirements,
section 2702(b)(1) permits an issuer to
limit enrollment in coverage to open
and special enrollment periods. Under
our authority in section 2702(b)(3) to
define ‘‘open enrollment periods,’’ we
are providing in this final rule that, in
the case of a small employer that fails
to meet contribution or minimum
participation requirements, an issuer
may limit its offering of coverage to an
annual open enrollment period, which
we set forth in this final rule as the
period beginning November 15 and
extending through December 15 of each
year. As such, the group market will
have continuous open enrollment,
except for small employers that fail to
meet contribution or minimum
PO 00000
Frm 00012
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
participation requirements, for which
the enrollment period may be limited to
the annual enrollment period described
above, from November 15 through
December 15. This approach addresses
concerns about adverse selection in a
manner that is consistent with the
statutory provisions. We do not extend
this provision to the large group market
because large employers generally do
not present the same adverse selection
risk as small employers.
Comment: Several commenters voiced
concerns about the potential for
individuals with histories of nonpayment to game guaranteed
availability. Some commenters
suggested that we take action to both
prevent individuals with histories of
non-payment from taking advantage of
guaranteed availability and to prevent
individuals from dropping in and out of
coverage based on medical need. Other
commenters, including the NAIC,
recommended that states have the
flexibility to develop an environment
that will discourage adverse selection
and suggested that there are a number
of tools available to states to limit
adverse selection. Some of the tools
identified by commenters included: (1)
Allowing issuers to require pre-payment
of premiums each month; (2) allowing
issuers to require payment of all
outstanding premiums before enrollees
can re-enroll in coverage after
termination due to non-payment of
premiums; (3) allowing late enrollment
penalties or surcharges (similar to those
in Medicare Parts B and D); (4) allowing
issuers to establish waiting periods or
delayed effective dates of coverage; (5)
allowing issuers to offset claims
payments by the amount of any owed
premiums; (6) allowing issuers to
prohibit individuals who have canceled
coverage or failed to renew from
enrolling until the second open
enrollment period after their coverage
ceased (unless they replace coverage
with other creditable coverage); (7)
restricting product availability (for
example, to a catastrophic, bronze, or
silver level plan) outside of enrollment
periods to prevent high-risk individuals
from enrolling in more generous
coverage when medical needs arise; and
(8) allowing individuals to move up one
metal level each year through the
Exchange shopping portal.
Response: We appreciate the various
strategies suggested by commenters and
agree that states have flexibility to
implement policies to address adverse
selection. We encourage states to
consider approaches to discourage
adverse selection while ensuring
consumers’ guaranteed availability
rights are protected since state policies
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
that limit guaranteed availability are
preempted by this law. We intend to
address permissible strategies to limit
adverse selection in future guidance.
Comment: Several commenters
suggested that the language in proposed
§ 147.104(e), which prohibits marketing
practices or benefit designs that will
have the effect of discouraging the
enrollment of individuals with
significant health needs in health
insurance coverage, be broadened to
apply to all forms of discrimination
prohibited by the March 27, 2012
Exchange final rule and section 1557 of
the Affordable Care Act, such as
discrimination based on age, disability,
race, ethnicity, gender, and sexual
orientation, not just discrimination
against individuals with significant or
high cost health care needs. One
commenter urged HHS to provide
guidance about marketing practices and
benefit designs that would be
considered discriminatory under this
standard. Another commenter asked
HHS to remind states of their
responsibility to monitor issuer
marketing practices.
Response: As noted in the November
26, 2012 proposed rule, discriminatory
marketing practices or benefit designs
represent a failure by issuers to comply
with the guaranteed availability
requirements. In response to comments,
we revise § 147.104(e) of this final rule
to make clear that a health insurance
issuer and its officials, employees,
agents and representatives must not
employ marketing practices or benefit
designs that will have the effect of
discouraging the enrollment of
individuals in health insurance
coverage based on these factors. This
standard will ensure consistency with
the prohibition on discrimination with
respect to EHB in § 156.125, the nondiscrimination standards applicable to
QHPs under § 156.200(e), and the
marketing standards in § 156.225.
Comment: Numerous commenters
expressed support for aligning open
enrollment periods inside and outside
of the Exchange to promote consistency
between markets and minimize the
potential for adverse selection.
However, some commenters were
concerned that establishing open
enrollment periods and effective dates
of coverage in the individual market
based on a calendar policy year would
not align with many individual policies,
which are currently offered on a noncalendar-year basis. Commenters
suggested various approaches to
resolving the transition, such as
providing to individuals whose
coverage renews mid-2014 a one-time
special enrollment period to purchase
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
coverage that complies with 2014
market reform provisions; requiring
individuals whose coverage begins on a
date other than January 1 to re-enroll
during the next open enrollment period;
and allowing a rating adjustment for
individual health insurance policies
covering less than a full year to reflect
that fact that enrollees will have less
than 12 months to reach the annual
deductible. Other commenters
recommended that states have flexibility
to set their open enrollment periods and
effective dates.
Response: We maintain the proposed
open enrollment periods in
§ 147.104(b)(1) of this final rule. We
believe that consistent open enrollment
periods will help minimize adverse
selection between the Exchanges and
the outside market, reduce consumer
confusion, and allow issuer marketing
to be focused on a single enrollment
campaign. Rolling open enrollment
periods with individual-specific dates,
by contrast, would add complexity for
families and increase risk selection. We
agree with commenters that a one-time
open enrollment period will allow
individuals with non-calendar year
plans to transition to a calendar-year
plan upon their renewal date in 2014
and provide for such enrollment
opportunity as discussed below. States
may wish to consider other strategies to
ease the transition, such as directing
issuers to pro-rate premiums for policies
covering less than a full year, among
other transitional measures.
Comment: One commenter noted that
his state currently allows individuals to
purchase individual health insurance
coverage on a guarantee-issue basis at
any time during the year and requested
clarification as to whether state
standards would be preempted by the
federal standards. Another commenter
urged HHS to ensure that issuers apply
consistent rules when offering coverage
outside of open enrollment. The
commenter expressed concern that some
issuers would attempt to employ
selective marketing practices designed
to attract low-risk individuals (for
example, for enrollment in catastrophic
plans).
Response: Section 2724(a)(1) of the
PHS Act provides that nothing in part
A or part C of title XXVII of the PHS Act
should be construed to preempt any
state law that does not prevent the
application of a federal requirement.
Therefore, these final rules do not
preclude the application of stronger
consumer protections provided by state
law including, for example, open
enrollment periods that allow
individuals to purchase coverage more
frequently than the federal standards.
PO 00000
Frm 00013
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13417
We note that if a health insurance issuer
in the individual market allows for
enrollment outside of an open or special
enrollment period, the issuer must still
comply with all of the individual
market provisions of the PHS Act,
including the prohibition against preexisting condition exclusions and the
prohibition against discrimination based
on health status. An issuer cannot
selectively offer enrollment in a plan to
individuals outside of open or special
enrollment periods in a manner that
discriminates among individuals based
on a pre-existing medical condition or
health status.
Comment: A number of commenters
recommended providing additional
special enrollment periods to those
described in proposed § 147.104(b)(2),
which incorporated the special
enrollment periods for COBRA
qualifying events under section 603 of
ERISA. Specifically, several commenters
recommended adding the guaranteed
renewability exceptions in § 147.106(b)
through (d), for which an enrollee
experiences a loss in coverage through
no fault of their own, as explicit triggers
permitting special enrollment. A few
commenters recommended including
special enrollment periods for
pregnancy. One commenter suggested
providing a special enrollment period
when individuals permanently move
into the issuer’s service area, consistent
with the Exchange standard.
Response: We agree that it is
appropriate to provide additional
enrollment opportunities for individuals
experiencing certain significant life
changes, including several of those
suggested by commenters. To provide
consistency across the individual
market, we believe these events should
follow the special enrollment periods
for individuals seeking coverage
through the Exchanges, as described in
the March 27, 2012 Exchange final rule.
Because PHS Act section 2702 provides
for ‘‘special’’ enrollment periods for
‘‘qualifying events’’ under ERISA, we
are providing for additional ‘‘limited’’
open enrollment periods in the
individual market under our authority
in PHS Act section 2702(b)(3) to
promulgate regulations with respect to
open enrollment periods. These limited
open enrollment periods are equivalent
to special enrollment periods in terms of
the limited scope and nature of their
applicability, and coverage obtained
during such limited open enrollment
period will become effective consistent
with the dates described in § 155.420(b).
Accordingly, in § 147.104(b)(2) of this
final rule, we cross-reference the
enrollment periods in § 155.420(d) of
the March 27, 2012 Exchange finale rule
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13418
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
(except as discussed below). Thus,
under § 147.104(b)(2), limited open
enrollment periods are triggered in the
individual market by the following
events:
• An individual and any dependents
losing minimum essential coverage.
• An individual gaining or becoming
a dependent through marriage, birth,
adoption, or placement for adoption.
• An individual experiencing an error
in enrollment.
• An individual adequately
demonstrating that the plan or issuer
substantially violated a material
provision of the contract in which he or
she is enrolled.
• An individual becoming newly
eligible or newly ineligible for advance
payments of the premium tax credit or
experiencing a change in eligibility for
cost-sharing reductions.
• New coverage becoming available to
an individual or enrollee as a result of
a permanent move.
Additionally, the final rule provides
that an individual enrolled in a noncalendar year plan is entitled to a
limited open enrollment period
beginning 30 calendar days prior to the
individual’s policy renewal date outside
the open enrollment period for 2014.
This one-time limited open enrollment
period will allow individuals with noncalendar year policies in the individual
market to transition to a calendar year
policy that complies with 2014 market
reform requirements of the Affordable
Care Act.
We clarify that loss of minimum
essential coverage triggering a limited
open enrollment period does not
include failure to pay premiums on a
timely basis, including COBRA
premiums prior to expiration of COBRA
coverage, or situations allowing for a
rescission as specified in 45 CFR
147.128.
We also note that these limited open
enrollment periods do not include the
events described in paragraphs (d)(3),
(d)(8), or (d)(9) of § 155.420 of the March
27, 2012 Exchange final rule
(concerning citizenship status, Indians,
and exceptional circumstances). The
enrollment periods for events described
in paragraphs (d)(3) and (d)(8) are
related to specific Exchange eligibility
criteria and therefore are not
appropriate for the broader market. The
enrollment periods in paragraph (d)(9)
arising from exceptional circumstances
are not similar enough to those
discussed in the November 26, 2012
proposed rule for HHS to include in the
final rule. We would initiate future
rulemaking if we were to establish a
limited open enrollment period based
on the triggering event in paragraph
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
(d)(9) of § 155.420. With the exception
of these triggering events, limited open
enrollment periods are the same inside
and outside the Exchange in the
individual and the small group market.
We note that states may create special
enrollment periods or limited open
enrollment periods in addition to those
established by this final rule.
Comment: Many commenters
supported establishing 60-day special
enrollment periods, consistent with
those in the Exchange, to reduce
consumer confusion, facilitate orderly
enrollment, and ease the administrative
burden on states and issuers. One
commenter recommended 30-day
special enrollment periods, consistent
with the HIPAA standard. A few
commenters recommended a 63-day
election period. Other commenters
recommended that individuals be
permitted to begin the special
enrollment process 30 days prior to a
known qualifying event.
Response: We agree that 60-day
enrollment periods will promote
consistency with the Exchanges and
will give consumers the time they need
to explore coverage options following a
change in life circumstances. Therefore,
we provide a 60-day election period for
the special and limited open enrollment
periods in the individual market.
However, to avoid inconsistency with
the statutory requirement in PHS Act
section 2704(f)(1) that individuals losing
group health coverage must request
special enrollment not later than 30
days after the loss of coverage, we
maintain 30-day special enrollment
periods for the group market. We note
that the March 27, 2012 Exchange final
rule (§ 155.725(a)(3)) currently provides
for 60-day special enrollment periods
with respect to the SHOP. We intend to
revise the SHOP special enrollment
periods to be consistent with the
election period in group market under
PHS Act section 2704(f)(1) and this final
rule. We also note that we will monitor
the effects the 60-day election period
has on the individual market and
whether or not is necessary to move to
a 30-day election period to be consistent
with the group market.
Comment: In response to our request
for comment, many commenters
supported a requirement that issuers in
the individual market provide a notice
of special enrollment rights to
individual market enrollees, similar to
what is provided to group health plan
participants and beneficiaries under
HIPAA.
Response: Following review of the
comments submitted on this issue and
further consideration of the additional
burden that would be imposed on QHP
PO 00000
Frm 00014
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
issuers, we do not in this final rule
require a notice of special enrollment in
the individual market. QHP issuers are
already subject to various notice
requirements through the Exchange
which will allow enrollees to make
timely and informed coverage decisions.
Furthermore, to ensure consistency with
Exchanges and to avoid confusion, we
do not extend a notice requirement to
the broader individual market.
Comment: One commenter
recommended that special enrollment
periods not apply to individual family
members who do not otherwise qualify
for special enrollment. The commenter
stated, for example, that an individual
who loses minimum essential coverage
should be allowed to obtain new
coverage, but should not be allowed to
obtain coverage for other dependents
that were not covered on the previous
policy.
Response: If an individual
experiences an event that triggers a
limited open or special enrollment right
pursuant to § 147.104(b)(2) or (b)(3) of
this final rule, the individual has the
option to choose any family coverage
offered in the individual market to cover
members of his or her family. Pursuant
to existing HIPAA regulations at
§ 146.117, this right already exists in the
group market.
Comment: Some commenters
recommended that issuers offering
individual health insurance coverage be
required to offer family coverage, while
one commenter recommended clarifying
that offering family coverage is not
required under the guaranteed
availability provisions.
Response: The final rule does not
require an issuer to offer family
coverage. While issuers are required to
offer all products that are approved for
sale in a market, an issuer is not
required to offer a family coverage
option with every policy form.
4. Guaranteed Renewability of Coverage
(§ 147.106)
In § 147.106, we proposed to
implement the guaranteed renewability
provisions of section 2703 of the PHS
Act. We proposed that an issuer offering
health insurance coverage in the group
or individual market must renew or
continue in force such coverage at the
option of the plan sponsor or
individual. The exceptions to this
requirement include: (1) Nonpayment of
premiums; (2) fraud; (3) violation of
minimum employer participation or
contribution rules, as permitted under
applicable state law; (4) termination of
a particular type of product or all
coverage in a market; (5) enrollees’
movement outside the service area of a
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
network plan; and (6) for coverage
provided through a bona fide
association, an employer’s loss of
membership in the association.16 We
noted that under the March 27, 2012
Exchange final rule at § 155.430, QHP
issuers are permitted to terminate
coverage in additional circumstances
(for example, decertification of the QHP
in the Exchange) and requested
comment on whether issuers in such
circumstances should be required to
renew coverage on a non-QHP basis
outside the Exchange.
We also proposed standards
governing the discontinuance of a
particular product or all health
insurance coverage in the group or
individual market, consistent with the
statute.
Finally, we proposed that issuers in
the group market may uniformly modify
coverage at the time of coverage renewal
and noted that parallel provisions in
section 2742 of the PHS Act allow for
the uniform modification of coverage in
the individual market. We stated that
the uniform modification of coverage
provisions would allow issuers to make
cost-sharing adjustments and benefit
design changes to come into compliance
with the requirements of the Affordable
Care Act that become effective in 2014
and requested comment on whether
such interpretation should be
incorporated explicitly into regulation
text.
Comment: Many commenters
supported allowing enrollees in a QHP
that terminates or is decertified in the
Exchange to elect to renew coverage on
a non-QHP basis outside the Exchange.
Some commenters supported applying
such standard with respect to all QHP
termination events. Other commenters
suggested enrollees should be notified
in such instances that continuing
coverage outside of the Exchange will
affect their eligibility for advance
payments of the premium tax credit and
cost-sharing reductions. One commenter
asserted that renewing coverage on a
non-QHP basis may be unnecessary,
since an enrollee’s loss of coverage in a
QHP will in most instances trigger a
special enrollment right, and argued
that decisions about coverage renewal
are best left to the states.
Response: As discussed above, if an
individual loses minimum essential
coverage because, for example, a QHP is
decertified, individuals enrolled in the
QHP will have a limited open
enrollment right for any policy in the
16 Section 2742(b)(5) of the PHS Act provides an
exception to guaranteed renewability for an
individual market enrollee’s loss of membership in
a bona fide association.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
individual market, including any
product being offered by the same issuer
that offered the QHP.
Comment: A few commenters
recommended clarifying that coverage
may be non-renewed for loss of
eligibility. For example, commenters
suggested that for consistency with
§ 156.155 regarding catastrophic plans, a
non-renewal provision would apply at
the end of the policy year in which the
person was no longer eligible for
coverage.
Response: Individuals may only
qualify for enrollment in some plans (for
example, catastrophic plans or QHPs in
the Exchange) if they meet certain
eligibility criteria. While we do not
include this clarification explicitly in
§ 147.106 of the final rule, we note that
issuers are not required to renew
coverage if an individual is not
otherwise eligible for such coverage.
Comment: One commenter
recommended that issuers be permitted
to non-renew coverage when an enrollee
becomes covered by other minimum
essential coverage to prevent
individuals from over-insuring.
Response: Consistent with PHS Act
section 2703, the final rule does not
include enrollment in other coverage as
an exception for guaranteed
renewability. We note that state
coordination of benefit laws may apply
in instances where individuals are
enrolled in more than one type of
coverage.
Comment: With respect to the
discontinuation of coverage provisions
in § 147.106(d)(1), one commenter
suggested that HHS recognize the large
group and small group segments of the
group market so that an issuer is not
required to exit both segments of the
group market when exercising the
option to discontinue all coverage in a
market.
Response: PHS Act section
2703(c)(2)(A) permits an issuer to nonrenew or discontinue coverage if the
issuer discontinues offering all health
insurance coverage in the ‘‘group
market.’’ Thus, the issuer must
withdraw from the entire group market
in order to satisfy this exception to
guaranteed renewability. The final rule
implements the statute without
modification.
Comment: Several commenters noted
that the guaranteed renewability laws in
some states would prevent issuers from
making plan design changes and costsharing adjustments necessary to bring
existing, non-grandfathered coverage
into compliance with the requirements
of the Affordable Care Act that become
effective in 2014. Commenters urged
HHS to incorporate language into
PO 00000
Frm 00015
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13419
regulation text explicitly permitting
issuers to discontinue or uniformly
modify coverage at renewal, even if
such discontinuance or modification is
not permitted under applicable state
law.
Response: State laws that prevent
issuers from uniformly modifying
coverage, as permitted by sections 2703
and 2742 of the PHS Act, to comply
with federal standards in title XXVII of
the PHS Act would, in effect, prevent
the application of such standards and,
therefore, be preempted under section
2724(a)(1) of the PHS Act.
C. Part 150—CMS Enforcement in
Group and Individual Insurance Market
We proposed technical changes in 45
CFR part 150 to reflect that the HIPAA
enforcement standard, as originally
codified in PHS Act section 2722 and
redesignated as section 2723 by the
Affordable Care Act, applies to the
market reform provisions of the PHS Act
created by the Affordable Care Act.
Pursuant to section 2723, states have the
primary enforcement authority with
respect to health insurance issuers in
the group and individual markets. HHS
has secondary enforcement authority
and will enforce a provision in a state
only if the state advises us that it does
not have authority to enforce the
provision or if the state fails to
substantially enforce a provision.
Comment: Several commenters
requested a safe harbor from
enforcement, at least for the first year of
implementation, as long as issuers are
making good faith efforts to comply and
implement the new requirements.
Special concern was raised in the
instance where state law conflicts with
federal law.
Response: As stated in previous
Affordable Care Act guidance, our
approach to implementation is marked
by an emphasis on assisting (rather than
imposing penalties on) issuers and
others that are working diligently and in
good faith to understand and comply
with the law.17 While the final rule does
not provide an enforcement safe harbor
for the market reform provisions, HHS
will continue to work closely with
issuers and states in the implementation
of these provisions.
Comment: One commenter questioned
HHS’s authority to extend this
enforcement standard to the provisions
of the Affordable Care Act including the
market reform provisions.
Response: Title I of the Affordable
Care Act amends title XXVII of the PHS
17 See, for example, Affordable Care Act
Implementation FAQs—Set 1 Q1, available at
https://cciio.cms.gov/resources/factsheets/
aca_implementation_faqs.html.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13420
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
Act. Specifically, the market reform
provisions are enumerated in sections
2701, 2702, and 2703 of title XXVII of
the PHS Act, which are subject to the
enforcement provisions of PHS Act
section 2723.
Comment: One commenter requested
clarification regarding the process HHS
uses to determine that a state is not
substantially enforcing a provision of
title XXVII of the PHS Act.
Response: We refer readers to 45 CFR
150.203, et. seq. for regulations
describing HHS’s enforcement
processes.
D. Part 154—Health Insurance Issuer
Rate Increases: Disclosure and Review
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
1. Subpart B—Disclosure and Review
Provisions
a. State-specific Thresholds (§ 154.200)
In § 154.200(a)(2) and (b), we
proposed that states seeking statespecific thresholds submit proposals to
CMS by August 1 of each year. The
Secretary would publish a Federal
Register notice not later than September
1 of each year concerning whether a
state-specific threshold applies in a
state. If approved, a state-specific
threshold would become effective on
January 1 of the year following the
Secretary’s notice.
Comment: A few commenters were
concerned that proposed timeline
would not give issuers sufficient time to
file rates before January 1.
Response: We are finalizing the
revised timeline in § 154.200(a)(2) and
(b) as proposed because the new dates
increase consistency inside and outside
of the Exchange. We are working to
align the market with the QHP
submission schedule and with the 2014
market reforms. Since QHP filings are
due April 30 of each year, moving the
state-specific threshold application date
to August 1 will give states the
appropriate amount of time to analyze
the QHP information they receive and to
request a state-specific threshold if they
believe one is necessary. We will be
moving the state-specific threshold
determination deadline from June 1 to
September 1, with any potential statespecific threshold going into effect
January 1 of the following year. Under
the May 23, 2011 rate review final rule
(76 FR 29964), the Secretary was to
publish a notice about state-specific
thresholds by June 1, and the effective
date of any state-specific threshold was
September 1 of the same year. Under
this final rule, issuers will still have
three months to prepare to file rates
under any potential state-specific
threshold. Therefore, we are shifting the
entire timeline forward three months to
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
enable states to have enough
information to assess their markets
appropriately. We note that the January
1 effective date for state-specific
thresholds only means that rate filings
submitted on or after January 1 will be
subject to any potential state-specific
threshold and not necessarily rate
increases that are effective January 1.
b. Submission of Rate Filing
Justification (§ 154.215)
Section 2794(b)(2(A) of the PHS Act
directs that beginning in 2014, the
Secretary, in conjunction with the
states, shall monitor premium increases
of health insurance coverage offered
through an Exchange and outside an
Exchange. To enable the Secretary to
carry out this new monitoring function
and to streamline data collection for
programs beginning in 2014, we
proposed revisions in § 154.215 that
would direct health insurance issuers to
submit data and documentation
regarding rate increases on a
standardized form determined by the
Secretary. We also proposed that the
rate review standards be modified by
extending the requirement that health
insurance issuers report information
about rate increases to all rate increases,
not just those above the review
threshold. States would continue to
have the authority to collect additional
information above this baseline to
conduct more thorough reviews or rate
monitoring. Furthermore, the review
threshold in § 154.200 would continue
to be used to determine which rates
must be reviewed rather than just
reported.
Under the Paperwork Reduction Act
of 1995 (PRA) process (44 U.S.C.
chapter 35), we proposed a ‘‘unified rate
review’’ template for health insurance
issuers to use for submitting data for
rate increases. In this final rule, we have
revised the text of § 154.215 to reflect
the ‘‘unified rate review’’ terminology.
We also have added language explicitly
reflecting the fact that the premium
rates subject to rate review reporting are
shaped by the premium rating standards
implemented under the single risk pool
requirement and the applicability of the
guaranteed availability and renewability
requirements. We clarify that states are
not specifically required to use the
unified rate review template in order to
have an effective rate review program.
Comment: Several commenters
remarked on the proposal to expand
reporting of all rate increases using the
unified rate review template. Some
commenters supported the expanded
reporting requirement, while other
commenters were concerned about the
administrative burden on issuers. One
PO 00000
Frm 00016
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
commenter suggested that the proposal
would allow both CMS and states to
monitor rate trends and identify
patterns that could indicate market
disruption.
Response: Section 2794(b)(2)(A) of the
PHS Act, as added by the Affordable
Care Act, requires the Secretary to
monitor premium increases of health
insurance coverage offered both inside
and outside an Exchange, for plan years
beginning in 2014. Accordingly, we
proposed that issuers offering health
insurance coverage in the small group or
individual markets report information
about all rate increases. We believe that
standardizing the reporting process will
reduce administrative burden and
duplication over time and enable both
states and CMS to evaluate information
about the single risk pool, actuarial
value, essential health benefits, and
other market reforms beginning in 2014.
This reporting will also assist states and
CMS in monitoring the market inside
and outside the Exchange for adverse
selection. Therefore, we are finalizing
the requirement to report all rate
increases in § 154.215 as proposed. We
note that when new business is
included in the unified rate review
template, the issuer must demonstrate
all premium and claims projections for
the new products and plans as provided
in guidance. Historical experience is
only required for existing product/plan
combinations represented on the unified
rate review template. We also note that,
in response to comments received
through the PRA process, we have made
changes to the uniform rate review
template to both remove data elements
and to make some optional in the first
two years of applicability. As discussed
in more detail in section V. of the
preamble, we estimate that these
changes reduce the number of required
data elements by approximately 45
percent.
Comment: Several commenters
remarked on the content of the proposed
unified rate review template.
Response: We address these
comments in section V. of the preamble
regarding collection of information
requirements. As mentioned above, we
have made changes to the template in
response to comments to ensure
streamlined and efficient data
collection.
2. Subpart C—Effective Rate Review
Programs
a. Determination of Effective Rate
Review Programs (§ 154.301)
To account for the market reform
changes in 2014, we proposed to modify
the standards in § 154.301(a)(3) for
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
states to have an effective rate review
program with respect to rate filings
subject to review. Specifically, we
proposed that a state with an effective
rate review program review the
following additional elements as part of
its rate review process: (1) the
reasonableness of assumptions used by
an issuer to estimate the rate impact of
the reinsurance and risk adjustment
programs; and (2) issuer data related to
implementation and ongoing utilization
of a market-wide single risk pool,
essential health benefits, actuarial
values, and other market reform
provisions of the Affordable Care Act.
We did not propose to modify the 10
percent subject to review threshold as
finalized in § 154.200.
We also proposed to revise
§ 154.301(a)(4) by adding additional
factors that states would take into
consideration when conducting their
examinations, including (1) in
reviewing the impact of cost-sharing
changes, the impact on the actuarial
value of the health plan in light of the
requirement under section 1302(d) of
the Affordable Care Act that a plan meet
one of the AV levels; and (2) in
reviewing benefit changes to a plan, the
impact of the changes on the plan’s
essential health benefits and nonessential health benefits.
Additionally, we proposed that states
take into account, to the extent possible,
the following additional factors when
conducting an examination of a rate
review filing:
• Other standardized ratio tests (in
addition to the medical loss ratio)
recommended or required by statute,
regulation, or best practices;
• The impact of geographic factors
and variations;
• The impact of changes within a
single risk pool to all products or plans
within the risk pool; and
• The impact of reinsurance and risk
adjustment payments and charges.
Finally, we proposed revisions in
§ 154.301(b) to ensure that a state with
an effective rate review program make
available on its Web site, at a minimum,
the same amount of information in Parts
I, II, and III of each Rate Filing
Justification that CMS makes available
on its Web site. We proposed that a state
may, instead of providing access to the
information contained in Parts I, II, and
III or each Rate Filing Justification,
provide a link to CMS’s Web site where
consumers can find such information.
Comment: Several commenters
remarked on the proposed additional
criteria for states to have an effective
rate review program. Some commenters
supported the additional criteria, while
others suggested that states with
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
effective rate review programs should
have flexibility to use either the unified
rate review template or their own
templates and formats for collecting
information from issuers. One
commenter suggested that CMS should
accept state regulators’ attestations that
they are reviewing the required
information, but not necessarily require
that states incorporate the unified rate
review template into their review
process.
Response: We finalize the proposed
amendments in § 154.301 except that, in
order to limit additional factors to only
those that reflect the 2014 market
reforms, we do not require states to
consider ‘‘other standardized ratio tests
recommended or required by statute,
regulation, or best practices’’ to have an
effective rate review program. Although
states will likely consider these ratio
tests as part of their review processes,
we intend to minimize the criteria and
factors for states to have an effective rate
review program in order to give states
the maximum flexibility to conduct
reviews. Further, this final rule does not
require states to incorporate the unified
rate review template into their review
process. States will retain the flexibility
to use other collection tools, provided
they collect the information necessary to
conduct effective reviews. States cannot
rely on issuer attestation alone in
conducting these reviews. Issuers in all
states, including those with effective
rate review programs, must still under
this final rule submit information to
CMS using the unified rate review
template. We note that states and issuers
will have an incentive to use the
collection tools provided by CMS to
ensure streamlined and efficient data
collection.
This approach strikes the appropriate
balance between maintaining state
flexibility and allowing CMS to carry
out functions related to: (1) The
monitoring of premium increases of
health insurance coverage offered
through an Exchange and outside an
Exchange as required by section
2794(b)(2)(A) of the PHS Act; (2)
Exchanges such as QHP certification
and premium tax credit and cost-sharing
reduction verification; and (3) the risk
adjustment and reinsurance programs.
We note that even without the
administrative efficiencies associated
with using the information collected
through rate review authority for the
second and third functions listed above,
the same data would be needed and
collected to carry out the first function
by itself. We also clarify that we will use
the information collected only for these
specified purposes and will initiate
PO 00000
Frm 00017
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13421
future rulemaking if we intend to use
the data for any other purpose.
Comment: Some commenters
expressed concern about the public
release of information. Commenters
recommended disclosing only a
minimal amount of information and that
such disclosure not include confidential
or proprietary information.
Response: As mentioned in the
preamble of the November 26, 2012
proposed rule, we will release only
information collected that is determined
not to include trade secrets and is
approved for release under the Freedom
of Information Act (FOIA). In general,
all information collected by HHS is
subject to FOIA. In accordance with the
HHS’s FOIA implementing regulations
at 45 CFR 5.65(c), health insurance
issuers may designate part or all of the
information submitted as exempt from
disclosure under Exemption 4 of the
FOIA if the issuer believes the
information is commercial or financial
information that is confidential or
privileged. If there is a FOIA request, we
will follow the pre-disclosure
notification procedures found at 45 CFR
5.65(d) through (e) to seek issuer input
on the applicability of Exemption 4
before disclosure is made. If the
information has previously been
published or made generally available to
the public, it will not be considered
confidential or privileged for purposes
of Exemption 4. In addition, as
discussed in section II.E.1.a. of the
preamble, issuers will set their index
rates and plan-specific pricing once per
year upon filing their rates with state
insurance departments, and information
would only be released after the QHP
submission process is concluded.
Accordingly, we believe that public
disclosure of certain rate review
information will not undermine
competitive market dynamics.
b. Rate Filing Justification (§ 154.225
and § 154.330)
We proposed to amend § 154.225 and
§ 154.330 by replacing the term
‘‘Preliminary Justification’’ with the
term ‘‘Rate Filing Justification,’’ to
reflect more appropriately the rate filing
information that would be reported. We
received no comments regarding this
proposed change. Accordingly, we are
finalizing proposed § 154.225 and
§ 154.330 without modification.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13422
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
E. Part 156—Health Insurance Issuer
Standards Under the Affordable Care
Act, Including Standards Related to
Exchanges
1. Subpart A—General Provisions
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
a. Single Risk Pool (§ 156.80)
In § 156.80, we proposed standards to
implement the requirement in section
1312(c) of the Affordable Care Act that
an issuer use a single risk pool for a
market (the individual market, small
group market, or merged market) when
developing rates and premiums for
coverage effective beginning in 2014.
We proposed that an issuer develop a
market-wide index rate (average rate)
based on the total combined EHB claims
experience of all enrollees in all nongrandfathered plans in the risk pool.
After setting the index rate, the issuer
would make a market-wide adjustment
based on the expected aggregated
payments and charges under the risk
adjustment and reinsurance programs in
a state. The premium rate for any given
plan could not vary from the resulting
adjusted market-wide index rate, except
for the following factors: The actuarial
value and cost-sharing structure of the
plan; the plan’s provider network,
delivery system characteristics, and
utilization management practices; plan
benefits in addition to EHB; and with
respect to catastrophic plans, the
expected impact of specific eligibility
categories for those plans. The index
rate, the market-wide adjustment to the
index rate, and the plan-specific
adjustments would have to be
actuarially justified and implemented
transparently, consistent with federal
and state rate review processes.
We invited comment on the set of
allowable plan-specific adjustments and
whether to allow flexibility in product
pricing in 2016 after issuers had gained
sufficient experience with the reformed
market. Additionally, in the ‘‘HHS
Notice of Benefit and Payment
Parameters for 2014’’ proposed rule (77
FR 73118), we solicited comment on
whether Exchange user fees or other
administrative costs should be spread
across all plans in a market as a marketwide adjustment to the index rate.
Comment: Several commenters
suggested that issuers should be allowed
to reflect distribution costs and other
administrative costs associated with
different products in their premiums to
promote administrative efficiency. One
commenter recommended allowing a
market-wide adjustment to the index
rate for Exchange user fees, as well as
distribution costs, agent and broker
commissions, and all administrative
costs, to spread these costs evenly
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
across the market and protect against
adverse selection. Other commenters
urged that any flexibility in product
pricing not result in de facto experience
rating based on health status. A few
commenters opposed our proposal to
pool Exchange user fees across all plans
in a market within a state because they
believed that this would unfairly
increase costs for members that are not
enrolled in the Exchange. Other
commenters supported the proposal to
pool Exchange user fees across all of an
issuer’s plans in a relevant market
within a state.
Response: We agree with commenters
urging the pooling of Exchange user fees
across the market as these costs are not
related to the unique efficiencies or
designs of a particular plan.
Accordingly, the final rule directs
issuers to make a market-wide
adjustment to the index rate for
Exchange user fees. This will ensure
that Exchange user fees are spread
evenly across the market, creating a
level playing field inside and outside
the Exchange, and further protecting
against adverse selection. Further, this
policy is consistent with the treatment
of Exchange user fees for medical loss
ratio (MLR) and rebate calculations
under 45 CFR 158.161(a).18
As for distribution costs and other
administrative costs (other than
Exchange user fees), we believe that
issuers should be allowed to make
actuarially justified adjustments to the
market-wide index rate at the individual
plan level for those costs. This will
allow pricing to vary among individual
plans by administrative costs reasonably
allocable to those plans, ensuring that
administrative efficiencies are priced
accurately and promoting market
competition. The final rule therefore
includes administrative costs (other
than Exchange user fees) as an
additional factor that issuers may use to
modify the market-wide index rate at
the individual plan level.
Comment: Several commenters
requested issuer flexibility in product
pricing to adequately adjust for the risk
of their enrollees. Commenters opposed
any restriction to making actuarially
justified adjustments to the index rate
for new and renewing businesses during
the course of the year. Other
commenters suggested issuers adjust the
index rate on a consistent, annual basis.
Response: Issuers in the individual or
combined markets (in states that have
merged the individual and small group
18 CCIIO Technical Guidance (CCIIO 2012–002):
Questions and Answers Regarding the Medical Loss
Ratio Regulation, Q&A #34 (Apr. 20, 2012),
available at https://cciio.cms.gov/resources/files/mlrqna-04202012.pdf.
PO 00000
Frm 00018
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
markets) should set their index rates
and plan-specific pricing once per year,
upon filing their rates with the state’s
department of insurance. Permitting
changes in these markets to the index
rate throughout the year could
effectively lead to premium pricing in
violation of the rules described above.
We believe that these rates should apply
to new and renewing enrollees during
the course of the year.
Comment: Several commenters
requested clarification on whether
adjustments to the index rate could
reflect differences in health status. Some
commenters also requested that issuers
be permitted to make an adjustment to
the index rate to account for induced
utilization. Other commenters requested
that HHS enforce the single risk pool
requirement so that the index rate and
plan-specific rates set by issuers do not
reflect differences in enrollee health
status.
Response: As indicated in the
preamble of the November 26, 2012
proposed rule, we believe that the
purpose of the single risk pool is to
prevent issuers from segregating
enrollees into separate rating pools
based on health status. In this final rule,
we confirm that plan-specific
adjustments to the market-wide index
rate must not reflect differences in
health status or risk selection. In
addition, we exclude induced demand
from the index rate adjustments because
of the actuarial difficulty of measuring
whether differences in total plan
expenditures are due to risk selection or
induced demand.
Comment: Several commenters
requested clarification on whether the
term ‘‘actuarial value’’ for the purpose
of the individual plan adjustment to the
index rate has the same meaning as the
term ‘‘actuarial value’’ in the Actuarial
Value (AV) calculator in the November
26, 2012 EHB/AV/Accreditation
proposed rule. Several commenters also
requested clarification on the method
for applying plan-specific premium
factors, particularly whether issuers
may adjust the index rate for anticipated
difference in utilization, risk adjustment
payments and reinsurance payments
through plan design, and the allowable
adjustment for catastrophic plans.
Response: The calculation of the
actuarial value through the AV
calculator is based on data sets provided
by HHS reflecting a standard
population, utilization, and unit prices.
For the purpose of developing an
adjustment to the market-wide index
rate for individual plans, we would
expect health insurance issuers to
utilize pooled allowable claims data as
a basis for calculating the plan-specific
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
actuarial value. By using the claims data
of their pooled population, issuers can
develop more accurate adjustments to
the index rate for individual plans. In
the absence of data, issuers of new plans
would have the option of calculating
pooled allowable claims using
actuarially reasonable projections.
Additionally, we would expect
issuers to proportionally allocate
anticipated reinsurance and risk
adjustment payments and charges based
on plan premium by applying the risk
adjustment/reinsurance adjustment
factor as a constant multiplicative factor
across plans. We believe that this
modification would prevent issuers
from differentially allocating risk
adjustment and reinsurance payments
and charges across plans in a manner
that would reintroduce risk selection
differences into plan premiums.
Finally, with respect to catastrophic
plans, we clarify that issuers may make
a plan-specific adjustment to the
market-wide index rate that accounts for
differences between catastrophic and
non-catastrophic plans in expected
average enrollee gross spending and
expected average risk adjustment
payment transfers. This plan-specific
adjustment would be uniform across all
of an issuer’s catastrophic plans (that is,
risk across all catastrophic plans must
be pooled). This adjustment for
catastrophic plans should not include
plan liability differences due to
actuarial value, because actuarial value
differences should be accounted for in
the actuarial value adjustment.
Comment: A few commenters
requested flexibility in the claims data
that could be used to determine the
index rate for the initial years of
Exchange operation. One commenter
specifically recommended that issuers
be permitted to use the claims
experience from grandfathered books of
business when developing initial rates.
Response: We recognize that lack of
robust EHB claims experience may
create challenges for issuers in setting
rates in the initial years of
implementation. We clarify that in the
absence of applicable claims data, an
issuer may use any reasonable source of
claims data, including claims
experience from grandfathered books of
business or claims data from actuarial
rate manuals (to the extent available), to
establish its index rate, as long as those
data are used to actuarially estimate the
portion of claims data associated with
providing coverage for EHB as required
to establish the index rate.
Comment: A few commenters
expressed concern that merging the
individual and small group markets
could cause market disruption and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
affect the rating methodology. Other
commenters requested clarification
about how the single risk pool would
apply if a state elected to merge its
individual and small group markets.
Response: If a state exercises the
option to merge its individual and small
group markets, an issuer must, in
accordance with § 156.80(d) of this final
rule, calculate the market-wide index
rate and plan-specific adjustments based
on the merged market. As only nongrandfathered individual market plans
are eligible for payments under the
transitional reinsurance program, in a
merged market, the pooled reinsurance
adjustment should be based only on the
portion of the issuer’s individual market
business eligible for reinsurance
payments.
Comment: Numerous commenters
requested clarification of whether the
single risk pool is to be maintained at
the holding company level or at the
individual licensee level.
Response: Section 1312(c) of the
Affordable Care Act requires a health
insurance issuer to maintain a single
risk pool in the individual market and
a single risk pool in the small group
market (unless a state requires both
pools to be merged). Section 1301(b)(2)
of the Affordable Care Act provides that
the term ‘‘health insurance issuer’’ has
the meaning given the term in section
2791(b) of the PHS Act, which defines
a health insurance issuer as an entity
that is licensed to conduct the business
of insurance in a state. Accordingly, the
single risk pool is to be maintained at
the licensed entity level.
2. Subpart B—Standards for Essential
Health Benefits, Actuarial Value, and
Cost Sharing
a. Enrollment in Catastrophic Plans
(§ 156.155)
In § 156.155, we proposed standards
for catastrophic plans offered in the
individual market, consistent with
section 1302(e) of the Affordable Care
Act. Specifically, we proposed that a
health plan is a catastrophic plan if it:
(1) Meets all applicable requirements for
health insurance coverage in the
individual market; (2) does not offer
coverage at the bronze, silver, gold, or
platinum levels of coverage described in
section 1302(d) of the Affordable Care
Act; (3) does not provide coverage of
essential health benefits until the
enrolled individual reaches the annual
limitation in cost sharing in section
1302(c)(1) of the Affordable Care Act;
and (4) covers at least three primary care
visits per year before reaching the
deductible. Further, we proposed that a
catastrophic plan may not impose any
PO 00000
Frm 00019
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13423
cost-sharing requirements for preventive
services identified in section 2713 of the
PHS Act.
We also proposed to codify the
statutory criteria identified in section
1302(e)(2) of the Affordable Care Act
listing the two categories of individuals
eligible to enroll in a catastrophic plan.
The first category includes individuals
who are younger than age 30 before the
beginning of the plan year. The second
category includes individuals who have
been certified as exempt from the
individual responsibility payment
because they cannot afford minimum
essential coverage or because they are
eligible for a hardship exemption.
Finally, we proposed that if a
catastrophic plan covers more than one
person (such as a catastrophic family
plan), each individual enrolled must
satisfy at least one of these two
eligibility criteria.
Comment: A few commenters
requested clarification as to whether the
provisions regarding catastrophic plans
apply only to coverage offered through
an Exchange.
Response: Section 1301(a)(1)(B) of the
Affordable Care Act directs a QHP to
provide the EHB package described in
section 1302(a) that, subject to section
1302(e), meets the actuarial value (AV)
levels described in section 1302(d)
(bronze, silver, gold, or platinum levels
of coverage). Section 1302(e) describes
an exception to the AV requirements for
catastrophic plans. These provisions are
incorporated by reference in section
2707(a) of the PHS Act, which extends
coverage of the EHB package required
under section 1302(a) to health
insurance issuers offering nongrandfathered coverage in the
individual and small group markets.
Accordingly, the provisions regarding
catastrophic plans apply to coverage
offered both inside and outside of an
Exchange.
Comment: One commenter
recommended clarifying that
individuals are eligible for enrollment
in a catastrophic plan (offered through
or outside the Exchange) if they have
obtained from the Exchange a hardship
exemption based on inability to afford
or obtain coverage.
Response: As discussed in the
February 1, 2013 Federal Register
proposed rule entitled ‘‘Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act;
Exchange Functions: Eligibility for
Exemptions; Miscellaneous Minimum
Essential Coverage Provisions’’ (78 FR
7348), herein referred to as the
Minimum Essential Coverage proposed
rule, only the Exchange may issue
certificates of exemption based on
hardship. Under the Minimum Essential
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13424
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
Coverage proposed rule, there are
several situations where an Exchange
would grant a certificate of exemption
for hardship based on an inability to
afford or obtain coverage. One category
of the hardship exemption is based on
the Exchange determining that an
applicant, or another individual in the
applicant’s family, is unable to afford
coverage for a calendar year based on
the applicant’s projected household
income. This specific category would
allow individuals to receive a hardship
exemption in lieu of the statutory
unaffordability exemption based on the
individual’s actual household income.
We agree that, consistent with the above
discussion of section 2707(a) of the PHS
Act, individuals granted a certificate of
exemption from the Exchange based on
hardship may use such exemption
determination to establish eligibility to
purchase a catastrophic plan outside of
the Exchange.
Comment: One commenter stated that
with respect to a catastrophic family
plan, only one member of a family
should have to meet the eligibility
criteria rather than all family members.
Response: Section 1302(e)(1)(A) of the
Affordable Care Act provides that the
only individuals who are eligible to
enroll in a catastrophic plan are those
individuals who meet specific eligibility
criteria described in section 1302(e)(2).
Therefore, we do not accept the
commenter’s suggestion that all
members of a family may enroll in a
catastrophic plan if only one family
member is eligible to enroll.
Comment: We received several
comments about the requirement that
catastrophic plans must provide
coverage for at least three primary care
visits before reaching the annual
deductible. Some commenters
recommended clarifying that issuers
must cover at least three primary care
visits in addition to the preventive
services required to be covered without
cost sharing under section 2713 of the
PHS Act, and that issuers may not
impose any cost-sharing requirements
for these visits. Other commenters
recommended clarifying that primary
care visits include visits to obstetrical or
gynecological providers.
Response: Health insurance issuers
providing catastrophic coverage must
fully comply with PHS Act section 2713
and its implementing regulations in
addition to providing coverage for at
least three primary care visits. The
classification of who is a primary care
provider for the purpose of the primary
care visits is determined by the terms of
the health plan or by state law.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
F. Applicability to Special Plan Types
1. Student Health Insurance Coverage
(§ 147.145)
Section 1560(c) of the Affordable Care
Act provides that nothing in title I of the
Affordable Care Act, or an amendment
made by title I, ‘‘shall be construed to
prohibit an institution of higher
education (as such term is defined for
purposes of the Higher Education Act of
1965) from offering a student health
insurance plan, to the extent that such
requirement is otherwise permitted
under applicable federal, state, or local
law.’’ HHS has interpreted section
1560(c) to mean that if particular
requirements of the Affordable Care Act
would have, as a practical matter, the
effect of prohibiting an institution of
higher education from offering a student
health plan otherwise permitted under
federal, state, or local law, these
requirements would be inapplicable
pursuant to section 1560(c).
HHS published a final rule in the
March 21, 2012 Federal Register
entitled ‘‘Student Health Insurance
Coverage’’ (77 FR 16453), which
clarified that for purposes of federal
law, student health insurance coverage
is defined as a type of individual health
insurance coverage and therefore
generally subject to the individual
market requirements of title XXVII of
the PHS Act and title I of the Affordable
Care Act. However, pursuant to section
1560(c) of the Affordable Care Act, the
March 21, 2012 final rule exempted
student health insurance coverage from
the guaranteed availability and
guaranteed renewability requirements of
PHS Act sections 2741(e)(1) and
2742(b)(5) added by HIPAA.
Consistent with that policy, the
November 26, 2012 proposed rule
outlined similar exemptions for student
health insurance coverage from the
guaranteed availability and guaranteed
renewability requirements of PHS Act
sections 2702 and 2703 added by the
Affordable Care Act to ensure that
enrollment in student health insurance
plans may be limited only to students
and their dependents. Further, we
solicited comment on whether issuers
should be permitted to maintain a
separate risk pool for student health
insurance coverage and whether
different premium rating rules should
apply.
Comment: While some commenters
recommended including student health
insurance coverage in the general
individual market risk pool, many
commenters urged HHS to recognize the
unique characteristics of student health
insurance plans by allowing separate
risk pooling of such coverage.
PO 00000
Frm 00020
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Commenters expressed concern that
pooling the risk of student enrollees
with other individual market enrollees
could increase student health insurance
premiums and potentially discourage
some universities from offering student
health insurance plans. Commenters
also noted that student health insurance
issuers typically do not underwrite
students on an individual basis, but
rather offer coverage to institutions of
higher education at a group community
rate. These commenters requested
flexibility with respect to the premium
rating rules of PHS Act section 2701 so
that issuers may continue to consider
characteristics such as the educational
institution’s claims experience,
enrollment method, demographics, and
availability of on-campus services when
developing rates and premiums for
student health insurance coverage.
Response: We recognize that student
health insurance coverage generally is
rated and administered differently than
other forms of individual health
insurance coverage. Issuers of student
health insurance coverage typically
contract with a college or university to
issue a ‘‘blanket’’ health insurance
policy, from which students can buy
coverage, and the policy is generally
rated on a group basis based on the total
expected claims experience of the
college’s or university’s students
enrolled in the plan. Accordingly, under
HHS’s authority in section 1560(c) of
the Affordable Care Act to ensure that
the law’s requirements would not
effectively prohibit the offering of a
student health insurance plan otherwise
permitted under federal, state, or local
law, and to minimize market disruption
in the initial transition to the reformed
market, this final rule provides that nongrandfathered student health insurance
coverage is not subject to the single risk
pool requirement of section 1312(c) of
the Affordable Care Act.
Student health insurance is subject
under these final rules to the premium
rating requirements of section 2701 of
the PHS Act. We note, however, that
given the exemption from single risk
pool requirement, the premium rate
charged by an issuer offering student
health insurance coverage may be based
on a school-specific group community
rate if, consistent with section 2701, the
issuer offers the coverage without rating
for age or tobacco use. This provides
flexibility to student health insurance
issuers with respect to the per-memberrating provisions of PHS Act section
2701(a)(4) and § 147.102(c)(1), while
ensuring that student enrollees and their
dependents are not charge more based
on their health status or gender.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
The treatment of student health
insurance coverage under these final
rules will serve as a transitional policy.
We intend to monitor student health
insurance coverage as the insurance
market transitions to the 2014 market
reforms and revisit this policy in the
future.
Comment: Several commenters
supported the proposal to exempt
student health insurance coverage from
the guaranteed availability and
renewability requirements of the
Affordable Care Act. One commenter
specifically recommended with respect
to the guaranteed availability provisions
of the November 26, 2012 proposed rule
that open enrollment periods for student
health insurance plans be permitted to
coincide with college and university
enrollment periods.
Response: In this final rule, we
finalize our proposal to exempt student
health insurance coverage from the
guaranteed availability requirements
under PHS Act section 2702 and the
guaranteed renewability requirements
under PHS Act section 2703. Therefore,
the special and open enrollment periods
under section 2702 do not apply to
issuers of student health insurance
coverage. Student health insurance
issuers may work with colleges and
universities to determine appropriate
enrollment periods for student enrollees
and their dependents.
2. Bona Fide Association Coverage
As mentioned above, we proposed,
consistent with PHS Act section 2702,
that non-grandfathered health insurance
coverage made available in the
individual or group market through a
bona fide association must be
guaranteed available to all individuals
or employers in a state and market.
These proposed rules represented a
change from existing law permitting
coverage sold through bona fide
associations to be limited only to
association members; therefore, we
invited comment on whether and how
a transition or exception process for
bona fide association coverage could be
structured to minimize disruption.
Comment: Several commenters noted
that the Affordable Care Act preserved
an exception for coverage sold through
bona fide associations from the
guaranteed renewability provisions of
sections 2703 and 2742 of the PHS Act
and urged HHS to recognize a similar
exception for bona fide associations
from the guaranteed availability
provisions of section 2702. Some
commenters recommended providing a
transition period during which issuers
could close association coverage to new
enrollment, while other commenters
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
cautioned that as long as issuers offering
coverage through bona fide associations
are able to limit coverage to association
members, they effectively will be able to
select healthy applicants and refuse
applicants with high health care costs.
Response: Section 1563 of the
Affordable Care Act deleted the
exception contained in section 2711(f)
of the PHS Act that existed prior to the
amendments made by the Affordable
Act, which exempted small group
coverage sold through bona fide
associations from having to guarantee
issue policies to anyone other than
members of the association. Therefore,
the final rule implements the Affordable
Care Act, which does not recognize an
exception from guaranteed availability
for bona fide association coverage. We
note that while starting in 2014, health
insurance issuers may not limit
coverage sold through associations only
to association members, nothing
prevents an issuer from renewing
existing association coverage.
Furthermore, as discussed in the
November 26, 2012 proposed rule, the
exception for limited network capacity
could provide a basis for limiting
enrollment in certain products to bona
fide association members.
3. Expatriate Plans
Comment: A few commenters urged
HHS to exempt expatriate coverage from
the market reform provisions of the
Affordable Care Act, including the
guaranteed availability, guaranteed
renewability, premium rating, and rate
review provisions, arguing that
expatriate plans face special
circumstances and considerations in
complying with these provisions of
federal law. For example, commenters
stated that expatriate policies are
designed to meet the unique coverage
needs of employees while working
outside of the United States (and their
dependents). Commenters also noted
that the rates for expatriate policies
must accommodate the regulatory
requirements and health care costs of
other countries; reflect benefits that are
particularly important to expatriates
(such as medical evacuation coverage,
war risk coverage, and currency
fluctuation); and maintain global
competitiveness with non-U.S. issuers
offering expatriate coverage.
Accordingly, commenters recommended
that enrollment in expatriate policies be
limited to expatriate employees and
their dependents, and that the rules
reflect the unique rating requirements
faced by expatriate plans.
Response: We plan to issue future
guidance on the applicability of the
market reform provisions of the
PO 00000
Frm 00021
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13425
Affordable Care Act, including these
final rules, to expatriate policies.
4. State High Risk Pools
Comment: We received several
comments as to whether states may
continue their high risk pools beyond
2014. Many commenters supported state
flexibility to transition high risk pools
as a means of minimizing premium
disruption and promoting continuity of
care. A few commenters noted that high
risk pool enrollees will have a right to
guaranteed availability and stated such
individuals must not be prohibited from
enrolling in other coverage offered in
the individual market, particularly
through the Exchange. Some
commenters suggested that enrollees
who maintain high risk pool coverage
should be eligible for premium tax
credits and cost-sharing reductions and
notified about new coverage options.
Other commenters requested
clarification about whether state high
risk pools are subject to the market
reform provisions of the Affordable Care
Act.
Response: Many states currently have
high risk insurance pools as their state
alternative mechanism to provide
insurance coverage for individuals who
meet enrollment criteria and who do not
otherwise have access to group or
individual health insurance coverage.
Since state high risk pool coverage is
not provided through insurance and is
not group health plan coverage, state
high risk pool coverage is not subject to
title XXVII of the PHS Act. However,
some states, as their state alternative
mechanism, require issuers (or certain
issuers of last resort) to guarantee the
availability of a product or specific
benefit design. If the state alternative
mechanism is individual market
insurance coverage, it is subject to title
XXVII of the PHS Act. Individuals
enrolled in state high risk pools will
have the same rights as others to
guaranteed availability for any products
offered inside and outside of the state
Exchange, and states may not prevent
individuals from moving to other
products or to a state’s Exchange. States
will continue to have the discretion to
determine whether each state continues
to have a high risk pool in order to ease
the transition of enrollees to other
products, consistent with the February
1, 2013 Minimum Essential Coverage
proposed rule, which proposed to
designate state high risk pools as
minimum essential coverage for a
period of time to be determined by the
Secretary.19
19 78
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
FR 7348.
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13426
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
III. Modification of Effective Date for
Certain Provisions
The Congressional Review Act, 5
U.S.C. 801(a)(3), ordinarily requires that
the effective date of a ‘‘major rule’’ such
as this final rule be at least 60 days from
the date of publication. However, 5
U.S.C. 808(2) permits the federal agency
promulgating the rule to determine an
effective date, notwithstanding this
otherwise applicable 60-day
requirement, when an agency ‘‘for good
cause finds (and incorporates the
finding and a brief statement of reasons
therefore in the rule issued) that notice
and public procedure thereon are
impracticable, unnecessary, or contrary
to the public interest.’’ While this final
rule is generally effective 60 days from
the date of publication, we have
determined for 45 CFR 147.103, which
specifies the timing for state reporting of
rating factors, and the amendments to
45 CFR part 154 governing rate review,
an effective date 30 days from the date
of publication of this rule.
Section 147.103 directs states to
report to HHS within 30 days after
publication of this rule certain rating
factors required by § 147.102, including
but not limited to: the age rating ratio
if a state adopts a ratio narrower than
3:1 for adults; the tobacco rating ratio if
a state adopts a ratio narrower than 1.5
to 1; a uniform age rating curve if a state
adopts any; and geographical rating
areas if the state establishes any. It is
imperative that HHS receive these data
from the states within 30 days of
publication of this final rule in order to
implement timely the risk adjustment
methodology set forth in section 1343 of
the Affordable Care Act and its
implementing regulations. Should these
data not be received within 30 days of
publication of this final rule, HHS’s risk
adjustment scores for use on January 1,
2014 would have to be calculated using
assumed rating factors based on the
limitations set forth in this final rule,
which could result in inaccurate risk
adjustment payments to health
insurance issuers in states that have
developed different rating factors. This
may in turn lead to imbalance in the
insurance markets in those states with
different rating factors. Furthermore,
health insurance issuers are required to
submit their applications by April 30,
2013 to the Exchanges to be certified as
QHPs in 2014. In order to submit
accurate information on their
applications, the issuers will need to
know what rating factors in a state will
be effective starting January 1, 2014.
The amendments to 45 CFR part 154
revise the timeline for states to propose
state-specific thresholds for review and
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
approval by HHS. The amendments also
direct health insurance issuers to submit
data relating to proposed rate increases
in a standardized format specified by
the Secretary of HHS, and modify
criteria and factors for states to have an
effective rate review program. These
changes are necessary to reflect the new
market reform provisions and to fulfill
the statutory requirement beginning in
2014 that the Secretary, in conjunction
with the states, monitor premium
increases of health insurance coverage
offered through an Exchange and
outside of an Exchange. The provisions
are also designed to streamline data
collection for issuers, states, Exchanges,
and HHS. Since health insurance issuers
will be submitting their 2014 rate filings
in states starting April 1, 2013, these
amendments must be effective at that
point for consumers to experience the
full benefits in 2014 of the rate review
process both inside and outside the
Exchanges.
Furthermore, HHS and the states must
have the ability to collect, beginning
April 1, 2013, rate data from health
insurance issuers relating to the 2014
market reforms to ensure effective
implementation of the market reforms
starting January 1, 2014. For example, if
the data submission requirement for all
rate increases is not in place by April 1,
2013, states and HHS will have very
little ability to gauge whether issuers
have combined all of their products into
a single risk pool in either the
individual or small group markets.
Issuers could, therefore, implement
different index rates and allowable
modifiers without fear of being observed
by a regulator for some time, which
would have the potential effect of
issuers continuing to rate for health
status in 2014.
Accordingly, for the reasons stated
above, 45 CFR 147.103 of this final rule
and the amendments to 45 CFR part 154
are effective 30 days after publication of
this final rule.
IV. Provisions of the Final Regulations
For the most part, this final rule
incorporates the provisions of the
proposed rule. Those provisions of this
final rule that differ from the proposed
rule are as follows:
Changes to § 147.102 (Fair health
insurance premiums)
• Clarifies that tobacco use means use
of tobacco on average four or more times
per week within no longer than the past
six months, including all tobacco
products but excluding religious and
ceremonial uses of tobacco. Further,
tobacco use must be defined in terms of
when a tobacco product was last used.
PO 00000
Frm 00022
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
Additionally, clarifies that issuers may
vary rates for tobacco use only with
respect to individuals who may legally
use tobacco under federal and state law.
• Gives states additional flexibility to
establish geographic rating areas that
would be presumed adequate.
• Modifies the default rating area
standard such that there would be one
rating area for each metropolitan
statistical area and one rating area
comprising all non-metropolitan
statistical areas in the state.
• Clarifies the criteria that HHS will
use to determine whether proposed state
rating areas are adequate.
• Clarifies that the cap on the number
of individuals under age 21 taken into
account when computing the family
premium applies to the three oldest
‘‘covered children’’ under age 21.
• Deletes language in paragraphs
(a)(1)(iii) and (a)(1)(iv) providing that
states may use narrower age and tobacco
use factors to avoid confusion.
• Consolidates state reporting
requirements in a new § 147.103.
Changes to § 147.104 (Guaranteed
availability of coverage)
• Adds events triggering limited open
enrollment periods in the individual
market, consistent with Exchange
special enrollment periods, as well as a
one-time limited open enrollment
period for the 2014 calendar year for
individuals with non-calendar year
individual policies.
• Establishes 60-day special and
limited open enrollment periods in the
individual market; maintains 30-day
special enrollment periods in the group
market.
• Ensures consistency of the
prohibition against employing
discriminatory marketing practices and
benefit designs with the prohibition on
discrimination with respect to EHB in
§ 156.125 and the non-discrimination
standards applicable to QHPs under
§ 156.200(e).
Changes to § 147.145 (Student health
insurance coverage)
• Exempts student health insurance
coverage from the single risk pool
requirements of Affordable Care Act
section 1312(c).
Changes to § 154.215 (Submission of
Rate Filing Justification)
• Clarifies that if any product is
subject to a rate increase, an issuer must
submit a Rate Filing Justification for all
products in the single risk pool,
including new or discontinuing
products.
• Replaces the term ‘‘standardized
data template’’ with ‘‘unified rate
review template’’ each place it appears.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
Changes to § 156.80 (Single risk pool)
• Clarifies that the index rate for the
single risk pool must be adjusted on a
market-wide basis for Exchange user
fees and may be adjusted at the planlevel for distribution costs and other
administrative costs.
Changes to § 156.155 (Enrollment in
catastrophic plans)
• Makes a technical correction in
paragraph (c) of this section that each
enrolled individual in the case of a
catastrophic plan covering multiple
individuals must meet the eligibility
criteria outlined in paragraph ‘‘(a)(5)’’ of
this section.
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
V. Collection of Information
Requirements
In the November 26, 2012 proposed
rule (77 FR 70584), we solicited public
comments on each of the sections
identified as containing information
collection requirements (ICRs). In this
final rule, we are restating our summary
of the information collection
requirements and providing summaries
of the comments received and our
responses to those comments. Regarding
wage data, we generally used data from
the Bureau of Labor Statistics to derive
average labor costs (including fringe
benefits) for estimating the burden
associated with the ICRs.
A. ICRs Regarding State Disclosures
(§ 147.102(b), § 147.102(e), § 147.103,
§ 156.80(c))
The final rule directs states to submit
to CMS certain information as
applicable about their rating and risk
pooling requirements. A state will
inform CMS if it adopts a narrower age
rating ratio than 3:1 or adopts a
narrower rating ratio for tobacco use
than 1.5:1. A state will also submit
information to CMS regarding stateestablished geographic rating areas and
state-established uniform age rating
curves. A state with pure community
rating will submit information to CMS
about its uniform family tiers and
corresponding multipliers, if any. A
state will also inform CMS if it requires
premiums to be based on average
enrollee amounts in the small group
market (§ 147.103). Finally, a state will
inform CMS if it elects to merge its
individual and small group market risk
pools (§ 156.80(c)). Because we do not
know how many states will choose to
establish their own geographical rating
areas, age rating curves, and family tier
structures; adopt narrower age or
tobacco rating factors; require premiums
to be based on average enrollee amounts
in the small group market; or merge
their individual and small group market
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
risk pools, we have estimated the
burden for one state.
The burden associated with this
requirement is the time involved for
states to provide to CMS information on
the rating factors and requirements
applicable to their small group and
individual markets. If a state adopts
narrower rating ratios for age or tobacco
use, or chooses to merge their
individual and small group market risk
pools, the state will inform CMS. We
estimate that it will take 20 minutes for
a state to prepare and submit a report to
CMS for each of these disclosures, for a
total burden of one hour and a cost of
approximately $31 for all three reports
combined.
This final rule provides that a state’s
rating areas must be based on the
geographic divisions of counties, threedigit zip codes, or MSAs and non-MSAs
and will be presumed adequate if either
of the following conditions are met: (1)
As of January 1, 2013, the state had
established by law, rule, regulation,
bulletin, or other executive action
uniform geographic rating areas for the
entire state; or (2) After January 1, 2013,
the state establishes by law, rule,
regulation, bulletin, or other executive
action for the entire state no more
geographic rating areas than the number
of MSAs in the state plus one. We
anticipate that states that currently have
geographical rating areas will retain
them. For states that establish rating
areas, we estimate that it will take one
hour for a state to prepare and submit
a report to CMS on its geographical
rating areas, for a burden of one hour
and a cost of approximately $31.
If a state develops an age rating curve,
the state will report the state’s age rating
curve to CMS. We anticipate that HHS’s
default standard age rating curve will
apply in most states. Only one state
commented that it would establish its
own age rating curve. For states that
designate their own curve, we estimate
that it will take three hours for each
state to prepare and submit a report on
its age rating curve, for a burden of three
hours and a cost of $93.
If a state is community rated and
designates a uniform family tier
structure with corresponding
multipliers, the state will report family
tier structure information to CMS. We
estimate that very few states will
designate family tier structures and that
it will take one hour to prepare and
submit a report to CMS. The burden for
reporting family tier structure
information is estimated to be one hour,
and a cost of approximately $31.
If a state requires premiums in the
small group market to be based on
average enrollee amounts, it will submit
PO 00000
Frm 00023
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13427
that information to CMS. We estimate
that it will take one hour for a state to
prepare and submit the report on small
group market premiums to CMS, for a
burden of one hour and a cost of
approximately $31.
We assume that each report will be
prepared by clerical staff (at a cost of
approximately $31 per hour) and will be
reviewed by a senior manager (using 1
hour of labor at approximately $65 per
hour) prior to submission to CMS. The
total burden for all disclosures is eight
hours (seven by clerical staff and one by
a senior manager) and approximately
$279 per state, if a state needs to prepare
and submit a report in all of these areas.
We expect that states that already
have established a narrower age or
tobacco rating ratio, family tier structure
and requirements for small group
market premiums to be based on average
enrollee amounts, will retain them and
simply incur the burden of reporting
them. Based on our interactions with
state officials and review of publicly
available studies prepared by actuarial
firms on the impact of the Affordable
Care Act on the health insurance market
in various states, we believe that many
states have already studied the issue of
merging their individual and small
group market risk pools and would only
incur the burden of reporting. We
anticipate that few states will choose to
establish their own age rating curve or
establish new geographical rating areas
and incur related administrative costs. If
a state chooses to establish its own age
rating curve (§ 147.102(e)), it is likely to
engage an actuarial consultant. We
estimate that it will require
approximately 100 hours of effort by an
actuary (at a cost of $225 per hour) and
23 hours of combined labor by state
actuaries (10 hours at a cost of
approximately $50 per hour) and senior
management (13 hours at a cost of
approximately $65 an hour) to establish
an age curve. The total burden will be
123 hours and approximately $24,000. If
a state chooses to establish geographical
rating areas (§ 147.102(b)), if they
haven’t already done so, staff actuaries
are likely to conduct an analysis and
prepare a report for management (30
hours at a cost of approximately $50 per
hour) and senior management will
review the reports and make a decision
(2 hours at a cost of approximately $65
an hour). The total burden would be 32
hours and approximately $1,600.
B. ICRs Regarding Rate Increase
Disclosure and Review (§ 154.215,
§ 154.301)
This final rule directs that health
insurance issuers use a unified rate
review template, as specified by the
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13428
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
Secretary, to report information about a
proposed rate increase to CMS. States
with effective rate review programs have
the option to incorporate this template
into their rate review process. The
existing information collection
requirement (OMB Control Number
0938–1141) includes a standardized
template that is currently used by
issuers seeking rate increases to submit
data to CMS. CMS published an
updated rate review template for public
comment, in accordance with the
Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (44
U.S.C. chapter 35).
Health insurance issuers seeking rate
increases will submit data using the
unified rate review template and will
incur administrative costs to prepare
and submit the data. Based on CMS’s
experience with the 2011 MLR reporting
year, there are 2,010 health insurance
issuers (company/state combinations,
including territories) offering coverage
in the individual market in all states
and 1,050 issuers offering coverage in
the small group market in all states,
while there are 2,294 unique issuers
offering products in one or both
markets. Most issuers already have to
provide this information to their
respective states. We anticipate a total of
7,650 submissions for rate review
increases annually in both markets.
Based on past experience, we anticipate
that approximately 1,200 of these
submissions will be for rate increases at
or above the subject to review threshold
and the remaining 6,450 submissions
will be for rate increases below the
review threshold. We assume that each
submission will require 11 hours of
work by an actuary (at a cost of $225 per
hour), including minimal time required
for recordkeeping. The total cost for all
submissions will be approximately $19
million. Therefore, the increase in
administrative costs for all issuers
seeking rate increases below the review
threshold will be approximately $16
million, with an average of $7,000 per
issuer. It should be noted that there are
administrative efficiencies gained by
helping issuers to avoid significant
duplication of effort for filings subject to
review by using the same standardized
template for all issuers offering health
insurance coverage in the small group or
individual markets across all states, and
because the vast majority of states
currently require all rate increases to be
filed. These efficiencies are not
quantified in this rule.
A few commenters remarked that the
costs related to rate review template
submission have been underestimated.
An industry group also provided
estimates of the number of submissions
and related costs. According to industry
feedback received by CMS, the current
rate review template being used requires
only one to four hours of actuarial labor
to complete. The unified rate review
template includes more data and we
estimate that it would take an actuary 11
hours, on average, to complete. Issuers
will have to submit only one
consolidated report for all their
products in a market, unlike the current
template in use which requires a
separate submission for each product.
Additionally, issuers seeking rate
increases may need to adjust their
systems to provide the data required in
the unified rate review template and
incur one-time costs. One commenter
provided a range of anticipated costs
obtained from an industry survey.
However, we do not expect many
issuers to undertake major systems
changes to prepare the rate review
submissions. Most of the data elements
specified in the new template are
currently captured by issuers and most
of the changes will involve categorizing
the data into new categories and
aggregating the information to the
market level. We estimate that an issuer
would need, on average, 40 hours of
work by a programmer (at a cost of
approximately $50 per hour) to develop
a program that will extract the necessary
data from its systems. The total one-time
cost to all issuers for developing a
program to extract the necessary data
will be approximately $4.6 million, with
an average cost of approximately $2,000
per issuer.
For filings subject to review, states
with effective rate review programs may
use the data submissions in their
reviews; however, this is not expected
to increase review costs.
Based on comments received and
discussions with issuers and states, we
have made changes to the proposed
template to address concerns that have
been raised. We have both removed data
elements from the uniform rate review
template and identified information that
will be optional in the first two years of
applicability. We estimate that through
these changes we have reduced the
number of required data elements by
approximately 45 percent. States may
collect additional information above
this baseline. We expect that the unified
rate review template will not
significantly increase the burden on
states or industry; rather, the data
requested in the template will assist
states and industry in complying with
the market rules.
In addition, the final rule gives states
with effective rate review programs the
discretion to choose whether to
incorporate the unified rate review
template in their rate review processes
or whether to use their own rate review
templates. Issuers in states with
effective rate review programs that do
not require the federal template will still
be required to submit information about
all rate increases to CMS on the
template.
TABLE V.1—ANNUAL REPORTING, RECORDKEEPING AND DISCLOSURE BURDEN*
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Regulation
Section(s)
Age Ratio, Tobacco Ratio,
Rating areas,
Family Tier,
Small Group
Market Premium, Age rating curve:
§ 147.103; Risk
Pool Merger:
§ 156.80 (c) .......
Age curve
(§ 147.102(e)) ...
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Total
annual
burden
(hours)
Hourly labor
cost of
reporting
($)
Total labor
cost of
reporting
($)
Total capital/
maintenance
costs
($)
Responses
Burden per
response
(hours)
1
8
1
8
35
279
0
279
1
1
123
123
194
24,000
0
24,000
Number of
respondents
Jkt 229001
PO 00000
Frm 00024
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Total cost
($)
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
13429
TABLE V.1—ANNUAL REPORTING, RECORDKEEPING AND DISCLOSURE BURDEN*—Continued
Regulation
Section(s)
Responses
Number of
respondents
Burden per
response
(hours)
Total
annual
burden
(hours)
Hourly labor
cost of
reporting
($)
Total labor
cost of
reporting
($)
Total capital/
maintenance
costs
($)
Total cost
($)
Geographical Rating Area
(§ 147.102(b)) ...
Rate Increase Disclosure and Review (§ 154.215,
§ 154.301) ** .....
1
1
32
32
51
1,600
0
1,600
2,294
7,650
11
84,150
225
19,000,000
0
19,000,000
Total ..............
........................
....................
....................
84,313
....................
19,025,879
........................
19,025,879
* Not included in this table is a 4.6 million upfront burden related to rate increase disclosures.
** Of the $19 million labor cost of reporting, only $16.3 million is attributable to this rule.
We have submitted an information
collection request to OMB for review
and approval of the ICRs contained in
this final rule. The requirements are not
effective until approved by OMB and
assigned a valid OMB control number.
VI. Regulatory Impact Analysis
In accordance with the provisions of
Executive Order 12866, this final rule
was reviewed by the Office of
Management and Budget.
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
A. Summary
As stated earlier in this preamble, this
final rule implements the Affordable
Care Act’s requirements on health
insurance coverage related to fair health
insurance premiums, guaranteed
availability, guaranteed renewability,
single risk pools, and catastrophic
plans. These provisions are generally
effective for plan or policy years
beginning on or after January 1, 2014. In
addition, this final rule amends the
standards for health insurance issuers
and states regarding reporting,
utilization, and collection of data under
the rate review program.
CMS has crafted this final rule to
implement the protections intended by
Congress in an economically efficient
manner. We have examined the effects
of this final rule as required by
Executive Order 13563 (76 FR 3821,
January 21, 2011), Executive Order
12866 (58 FR 51735, September 1993,
Regulatory Planning and Review), the
Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA)
(September 19, 1980, Pub. L. 96–354),
the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act of
1995 (Pub. L. 104–4), Executive Order
13132 on Federalism, and the
Congressional Review Act (5 U.S.C.
804(2)). In accordance with OMB
Circular A–4, CMS has quantified the
benefits, costs, and transfers where
possible, and has also provided a
qualitative discussion of the benefits,
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
costs, and transfers that may stem from
this final rule.
B. Executive Orders 13563 and 12866
Executive Order 12866 (58 FR 51735)
directs agencies to assess all costs and
benefits of available regulatory
alternatives and, if regulation is
necessary, to select regulatory
approaches that maximize net benefits
(including potential economic,
environmental, public health and safety
effects; distributive impacts; and
equity). Executive Order 13563 (76 FR
3821, January 21, 2011) is supplemental
to and reaffirms the principles,
structures, and definitions governing
regulatory review as established in
Executive Order 12866.
Section 3(f) of Executive Order 12866
defines a ‘‘significant regulatory action’’
as an action that is likely to result in a
final rule—(1) Having an annual effect
on the economy of $100 million or more
in any one year, or adversely and
materially affecting a sector of the
economy, productivity, competition,
jobs, the environment, public health or
safety, or state, local or tribal
governments or communities (also
referred to as ‘‘economically
significant’’); (2) creating a serious
inconsistency or otherwise interfering
with an action taken or planned by
another agency; (3) materially altering
the budgetary impacts of entitlement
grants, user fees, or loan programs or the
rights and obligations of recipients
thereof; or (4) raising novel legal or
policy issues arising out of legal
mandates, the President’s priorities, or
the principles set forth in the Executive
Order.
A regulatory impact analysis (RIA)
must be prepared for rules with
economically significant effects (for
example, $100 million or more in any 1
year), and a ‘‘significant’’ regulatory
action is subject to review by the OMB.
OMB has designated this final rule as a
PO 00000
Frm 00025
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
‘‘significant regulatory action.’’ Even
though it is uncertain whether it is
likely to have economic impacts of $100
million or more in any one year, CMS
has provided an assessment of the
potential costs, benefits, and transfers
associated with this final regulation.
1. Need for Regulatory Action
Sections 1302(e) and 1312(c) of the
Patient Protection and Affordable Care
Act (Affordable Care Act), and sections
2701, 2702, and 2703 of the Public
Health Service Act (PHS Act), as added
and amended by the Affordable Care
Act, create certain standards related to
fair health insurance premiums,
guaranteed availability, guaranteed
renewability, risk pools, and
catastrophic plans applicable to nongrandfathered health insurance coverage
starting in 2014. These final regulations
provide the necessary guidance to
implement these important consumer
protections. The current individual and
small group health insurance markets
generally are viewed as dysfunctional,
placing consumers at a disadvantage
due to the high cost of health insurance
coverage, resulting from factors such as
lack of competition, adverse selection,
and limited transparency. In addition to
affordability concerns, many people
have difficulty finding and enrolling in
coverage options. If employer-based
coverage is not available, a person may
find that affordable individual market
coverage is not available due to medical
underwriting. The provisions of this
final rule, combined with other
provisions in the Affordable Care Act,
will improve the functioning of both the
individual and the small group markets
and make insurance affordable and
accessible to millions of Americans who
currently do not have affordable options
available to them. In addition, this final
rule would amend the existing rate
review standards to reflect the new
market conditions in 2014.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13430
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
2. Summary of Impacts
In accordance with OMB Circular A–
4, Table VI.1 below depicts an
accounting statement summarizing
CMS’s assessment of the benefits, costs,
and transfers associated with this
regulatory action. The period covered by
the RIA is 2013–2017.
CMS anticipates that the provisions of
these final regulations would ensure
increased access and improve
affordability of health insurance
coverage in the individual and small
group markets. Individuals who are
currently unable to obtain affordable
coverage because of their medical
history, health status, gender, or age will
be able to obtain such coverage under
these final rules, along with other
provisions of the Affordable Care Act,
leading to an increase in the number of
people with health insurance. Newly
insured individuals and individuals
with expanded coverage will have
increased access to health care,
improving utilization of preventive care
and health outcomes and protection
from the risk of catastrophic medical
expenditures, leading to financial
security. In addition, an issuer seeking
a rate increase will submit data and
documentation about the rate increase
using a unified rate review template,
which will provide CMS the data
necessary for monitoring rate increases.
In accordance with Executive Order
12866, CMS expects that the benefits of
this final regulatory action justify the
costs.
TABLE VI.1—ACCOUNTING TABLE
Qualitative:
Benefits:
* Increase in enrollment in the individual and small group market leading to improved access to health care for the previously uninsured, especially individuals with medical conditions, which will result in improved health and protection from the risk of catastrophic medical expenditures
* A common marketing standard covering the entire insurance market, reducing adverse selection, improving market oversight and competition
and reducing search costs for consumers.
* Decrease in administrative costs for issuers due to elimination of medical underwriting and coverage exclusions.
* Prevent duplication of effort for rate review filings subject to review by setting forth a unified rate review template for all issuers offering health
insurance coverage in the small group or individual markets.
* Provide state departments of insurance with more capacity to conduct meaningful rate review and approval of products sold inside and outside
an Exchange by using a unified rate review template.
* Extend the availability and affordability of student health coverage as a transitional policy.
Costs ........................................................
Estimate ...................................................
Year dollar
Discount rate
Period covered
Annualized Monetized ($/year) ..............
$ 17.3 million ............................................
$17.3 million .............................................
2012
2012
7%
3%
2013–2017
2013–2017
Administrative costs related to submission of data by issuers seeking rate increases below the rate review threshold, one-time fixed costs to
issuers related to rate review data extraction, disclosure of state rating requirements and costs incurred by states choosing to establish rating
areas and age rating curves.
Qualitative:
* Additional costs incurred by issuers to comply with provisions in the final rule.
* Costs related to possible increases in utilization of health care for the newly insured.
* Costs incurred by states for disclosure of rate increases, if applicable.
Transfers:
Qualitative:
* Lower rates for individuals in the individual and small group market who are older and/or in relatively poor health, and women; and potentially
higher rates for some young men which will be mitigated by provisions such as premium tax credits, risk stabilization programs, access to
catastrophic plans, and the minimum essential coverage provision.
* Reduction in uncompensated care for providers who treat the uninsured and increase in payments from issuers.
* Decrease in out-of-pocket expenditures by the newly insured and increase in health care spending by issuers, which may be more than offset
by an increase in premium revenue.
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
3. Anticipated Benefits, Costs and
Transfers
In developing this final rule, CMS
carefully considered its potential effects
including both costs and benefits. One
commenter suggested providing
additional quantitative estimates of
benefits, costs and transfers. Because of
data limitations, CMS did not attempt to
quantify all of the benefits, costs, and
transfers resulting from this final rule.
Nonetheless, CMS was able to identify
several potential impacts which are
discussed qualitatively below.
There are diverse state laws and
industry practices currently in place
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:06 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
that result in wide variation in premium
rates (henceforth referred to as ‘‘rates’’)
and coverage for individual and group
health insurance markets. Regarding the
individual market, only five states have
both guaranteed availability for at least
some products and modified or pure
community rating requirements, while
in other states, issuers can deny health
insurance coverage or charge higher
premiums to people with medical
conditions.20 Currently, 11 states and
20 GAO, Private Health Insurance: Estimates of
Individuals with Preexisting Conditions Range from
36 Million to 122 Million, GAO–12–439, March
2012.
PO 00000
Frm 00026
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
the District of Columbia have rate
bands, which allow issuers to vary rates
only within a certain range of the
average rate, two states prohibit rating
based on age, and five states prohibit
rating based on tobacco use in the
individual market.21 In the small group
market, 36 states and the District of
Columbia have rate bands, 12 states
have community rating requirements,
two states do not allow rating based on
age and 16 do not allow rating based on
tobacco use. In many states, women are
21 Kaiser Family Foundation, Focus on Health
Reform: Health Insurance Market Reforms: Rate
Restrictions, June 2012.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
charged higher premiums than men:
Only 14 states prohibit gender rating in
the individual market while 15 states do
not allow gender rating in the small
group market. Of the states that prohibit
gender rating in the individual market,
only three of those states require
maternity coverage in all policies,
meaning that women in the other states
can be charged additional premiums for
maternity coverage.
Currently, only five states have
guaranteed availability in the individual
market. Studies show that 48 states
require guaranteed renewability in the
small group market while all 50 states
provide some level of guaranteed
renewability in the individual market.
In addition, HIPAA already provides
guaranteed renewability of coverage to
individuals and employers, irrespective
of state law. Therefore, this provision is
not expected to have any significant
effect in that regard.
Starting in 2014, issuers in the
individual and small group markets will
only be allowed to vary rates based on
age and tobacco use within specified
ranges, family size, and geography (the
fair health insurance premium
requirement). Issuers generally will
accept every individual and employer
that applies for health insurance
coverage (the guaranteed availability
requirement), and, subject to certain
exceptions, must also renew or continue
health insurance coverage at the option
of the plan sponsor or individual (the
guaranteed renewability requirement).
In addition, issuers must have single
risk pools for each of the individual and
small group markets, or a single merged
risk pool, if a state so elects, which will
include all individuals enrolled in nongrandfathered plans in the applicable
market (the single risk pool
requirement).
The provisions of the final rule will
affect the characteristics of enrollees,
enrollment, and premium rates in the
individual and small group markets. In
addition, several other related
provisions of the Affordable Care Act
that will be effective in 2014, such as
establishment of the Exchanges,
premium tax credits, and the minimum
essential coverage provision, will
improve access to and affordability of
health insurance coverage. The
Congressional Budget Office (CBO)
estimates that, by 2017, the number of
uninsured will be reduced by 27
million.22 Therefore, it is appropriate to
take into consideration the effect of all
these provisions in this analysis, even
22 ‘‘CBO’s February 2013 Estimate of the Effects
of the Affordable Care Act on Health Insurance,’’
Congressional Budget Office, February 2013.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
though not all of them are the focus of
this final rule. It should be noted that
the impact of these provisions may vary
between states, because of the
differences in current regulatory
frameworks.
A few commenters referred to
actuarial studies that include estimates
of premium changes in different states
and markets.23 Actuarial studies that
conclude that premiums will increase
for certain markets or age groups
generally do not take into account all
the provisions of the Affordable Care
Act and factors that would affect
premiums and also assume that the risk
pool will worsen as a result of these
provisions. However, we, along with
CBO, anticipate that the risk pool will
improve. Different provisions of the
Affordable Care Act can have opposing
effects on premiums. Some of the other
provisions, in addition to the ones
mentioned above, that will also affect
premiums are essential health benefits,
medical loss ratio requirements, risk
adjustment, temporary risk corridors
and the transitional reinsurance
programs. There are also factors such as
benefit improvements; competition
among issuers in the Exchanges to be
the second lowest cost silver plan;
migration of current membership to
more efficient, lower premium plans
due to increased transparency; new plan
design offerings such as Accountable
Care Organizations and issuers recontracting with providers to obtain
lower unit prices due to reduction in
uncompensated or charity care. In
addition, studies that focus on
premiums do not take into account the
decrease in out-of-pocket costs for
consumers. According to a study, in
2010, 49 million working-age adults
spent at least 10 percent of their income
on health insurance premiums and outof-pocket costs and 20 million workingage adults’ out-of-pocket costs were so
high compared to their income that they
were effectively underinsured.24
Increased access will lead to a decrease
in out-of-pocket costs for these
individuals.
This final rule directs that health
insurance issuers use a unified rate
review template, as specified by the
Secretary, to report information about a
23 For example, studies on the Alaska Individual
Market by Lewis & Ellis, Indiana Individual Market
by Milliman, Maine Small Group Market by
Jonathan Gruber & Gorman Actuarial, LLC and
Wisconsin Small Group Market by Jonathan Gruber
& Gorman Actuarial, LLC.
24 Sara R. Collins, Invited Testimony: Premium
Tax Credits Under The Affordable Care Act: How
They Will Help Millions Of Uninsured And
Underinsured Americans Gain Affordable,
Comprehensive Health Insurance, The
Commonwealth Fund, October 27, 2011.
PO 00000
Frm 00027
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13431
proposed rate increase to CMS. States
will continue to have the authority to
collect additional information above
this baseline to conduct more thorough
reviews or rate monitoring.
a. Benefits
In 2011, 48.6 million people in the
United States were uninsured.25 In
addition, an estimated 29 million adults
were underinsured in 2010.26 Studies
have shown that people without health
insurance have reduced access to health
care, higher out-of-pocket costs, higher
mortality rates and receive less
preventive care.27 Uninsured and
underinsured people are also more
likely to be unable to pay their medical
bills, have medical debt, and experience
financial difficulties.
The provisions of this final rule and
other changes implemented by the
Affordable Care Act will increase
enrollment in the individual and small
group markets. According to CBO, there
will be approximately 26 million
enrollees in Exchange coverage by 2017.
CBO estimates that, by 2017, the
number of uninsured will be reduced by
27 million.28 Access to catastrophic
plans is likely to further increase the
number of insured. The provisions of
this final rule will also preserve
affordability and availability of student
health insurance coverage. Newly
insured individuals and individuals
with expanded coverage will have
25 Source: U.S. Census Bureau, Current
Population Survey, 2012 Annual Social and
Economic Supplement, Table HI01. Health
Insurance Coverage Status and Type of Coverage by
Selected Characteristics: 2011.
26 Cathy Schoen, Michelle M. Doty, Ruth H.
Robertson and Sara R. Collins, Affordable Care Act
Reforms Could Reduce The Number Of
Underinsured US Adults by 70 Percent, Health
Affairs, 30, no.9 (2011):1762–1771.
27 The Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation, The
Uninsured: A Primer, Key Facts About Americans
Without Health Insurance, Washington, DC, 2011,
citing a number of studies on the effects of being
uninsured; ASPE, The Value of Health Insurance:
Few of the Uninsured Have Adequate Resources to
Pay Potential Hospital Bills, 2011 (https://
aspe.hhs.gov/health/reports/2011/
valueofinsurance/rb.shtml); Sara R. Collins, Ruth
Robertson, Tracy Garber, and Michelle M. Doty, The
Income Divide in Health Care: How the Affordable
Care Act Will Help Restore Fairness to the U.S.
Health System, The Commonwealth Fund, February
2012 ; J. Doyle, Health Insurance, Treatment and
Outcomes: Using Auto Accidents as Health Shocks,
Review of Economics and Statistics, 87(2): 256–270,
2005 ; S. Dorn, Uninsured and Dying Because of It:
Updating the Institute of Medicine Analysis on the
Impact of Uninsurance on Mortality, Urban
Institute, 2008; Cathy Schoen, Michelle M. Doty,
Ruth H. Robertson and Sara R. Collins, Affordable
Care Act Reforms Could Reduce The Number Of
Underinsured US Adults by 70 Percent, Health
Affairs, 30, no.9 (2011):1762–1771.
28 ‘‘CBO’s February 2013 Estimate of the Effects
of the Affordable Care Act on Health Insurance
Coverage,’’ Congressional Budget Office, February
2013.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13432
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
access to better health care and
experience a reduction in out-of-pocket
costs. Ample research demonstrates that
access to insurance coverage improves
utilization of preventive care, improves
health outcomes, and creates less
financial debt, which would lead to
better financial security.29 The State of
Massachusetts passed similar health
reforms in 2006, and now has the lowest
uninsured rate in the country. In 2011,
only 3.4 percent of Massachusetts
residents were uninsured.30 This has
resulted in increased access to health
care, including preventive care and
fewer individuals with high out-ofpocket spending.31
Research shows that individuals in
relatively poor health experience
difficulty obtaining health insurance
coverage. This results in lack of
adequate access to health care and
higher out-of-pocket expenses for these
individuals. According to a recent study
by U.S. Government Accountability
Office (GAO), between 36 million and
122 million adults age 19 to 64 years old
(or between 20 and 66 percent of the
adult population) have medical
conditions that could result in issuers
denying them coverage or charging
higher premiums.32 Of these, an
estimated 88 to 89 percent live in states
that do not have insurance protections
provided by the fair health insurance
29 T. Gross and Notowidigdo, Health Insurance
and the Consumer Bankruptcy Decision: Evidence
from Expansions of Medicaid, Journal of Public
Economics, 95(7–8):767–778, 2011; J. Doyle, Health
Insurance, Treatment and Outcomes: Using Auto
Accidents as Health Shocks, Review of Economics
and Statistics, 87(2): 256–270, 2005; Amy
Finkelstein, et al., The Oregon Health Insurance
Experiment: Evidence from the First Year, National
Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No.
17190, July 2011; Institute of Medicine, Care
without coverage: Too little, too late, National
Academies Press, 2002; J. Ayanian et al., Unmet
Health Needs of Uninsured Adults in the United
States, JAMA 284(16):2061–9, 2000; Andrew P.
Wilper, et al., Health Insurance and Mortality in US
Adults. American Journal of Public Health, 99(12)
2289–2295, 2009; S. Dorn, Uninsured and Dying
Because of It: Updating the Institute of Medicine
Analysis on the Impact of Uninsurance on
Mortality, Urban Institute, 2008; Jack Hadley,
Insurance Coverage, Medical Care Use, and Shortterm Health Changes Following an Unintentional
Injury or the Onset of a Chronic Condition, JAMA.
2007;297(10):1073–1084. doi: 10.1001/
jama.297.10.1073; K. Cook et al., Does major illness
cause financial catastrophe?, Health Services
Research 45, no. 2, 2010.
30 Source: U.S. Census Bureau, Current
Population Survey, 2012 Annual Social and
Economic Supplement, Table HI06. Health
Insurance Coverage Status by State for All People:
2011.
31 Kaiser Family Foundation, Focus on Health
Reform: Massachusetts Health Care Reform: Six
Years Later, June 2012.
32 GAO, Private Health Insurance: Estimates of
Individuals with Preexisting Conditions Range from
36 Million to 122 Million, GAO–12–439, March
2012.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
premium and guaranteed availability
provisions of the Affordable Care Act.
The GAO study estimated that health
care expenditures for adults with
medical conditions are, on average,
between $1,504 and $4,844 more per
year than for other adults. Similarly, a
study by HHS found that there are
between 50 million and 129 million
non-elderly individuals with a medical
condition, including between 4 and 17
million children under age 18, and up
to 25 million of these adults and
children are uninsured.33 A study found
that, in 2010, 35 percent of nonelderly
adults who shopped for health
insurance coverage in the individual
market were denied coverage or
received coverage exclusions for
medical conditions.34 The Affordable
Care Act’s provision on guaranteed
availability will prohibit issuers from
denying coverage to individuals based
on their health status or any other
factor, and the provision on fair
insurance premiums will prevent
issuers from charging a higher premium
to individuals based on health status.
The final rule will ensure that
individuals who would have been
denied coverage or charged excessively
high premium rates, for reasons such as
medical conditions or high expected
medical costs, will now be able to
obtain health insurance at an affordable
cost. In addition, young adults and
people for whom coverage would
otherwise be unaffordable will have
access to a catastrophic plan that will
have a lower premium, protect against
high out-of-pocket costs, and cover
recommended preventive services
without cost sharing.
The provisions of this final rule and
other changes implemented by the
Affordable Care Act will increase
enrollment in the individual market. An
analysis by CBO and the staff of the
Joint Committee on Taxation (JCT) 35
estimated that the characteristics of
enrollees in the individual market will
be significantly different, especially due
to the addition of people who would
have been uninsured in the absence of
the Affordable Care Act. CBO and JCT
33 ASPE, At Risk: Preexisting Conditions Could
Affect 1 in 2 Americans: 129 Million People Could
Be Denied Affordable Coverage Without Health
Reform, November 2011.
34 Sara R. Collins, Invited Testimony: Premium
Tax Credits Under The Affordable Care Act: How
They Will Help Millions Of Uninsured And
Underinsured Americans Gain Affordable,
Comprehensive Health Insurance, The
Commonwealth Fund, October 27, 2011.
35 Congressional Budget Office, Letter to
Honorable Evan Bayh, providing an Analysis of
Health Insurance Premiums Under the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act, November 30,
2009.
PO 00000
Frm 00028
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
estimated that relatively more new
enrollees in the individual market
would be younger and healthier and
likely to use less medical care, and the
addition of new enrollees would result
in average premium rates in the market
being 7 to 10 percent lower in 2016
compared to what they would have been
in the absence of the Affordable Care
Act, all else held constant. According to
CBO and JCT, the characteristics of
people in the small group market would
change slightly, and projected premium
rate changes could decrease up to 1
percent.
Currently, health insurance issuers
may maintain several blocks of
business, or ‘‘pools,’’ for their
individual and small group market
business. Most states place some
restrictions on the number of small
group blocks of business. However, the
individual market generally has not
been subject to similar restrictions. In
the past, some issuers used separate
pools to segment risks, resulting in large
rate increases for less-healthy enrollees.
A single risk pool will tend to lower
rates for relatively unhealthy
participants in the individual market by
including younger, healthier individuals
in the pool and ensuring that newer and
more long-term policyholders are
pooled together. In the small group
market, a single risk pool will stabilize
rates.
The guaranteed availability provision
may result in some adverse selection—
individuals with poor health who
would have been denied coverage before
in some states will now be able to obtain
health insurance. However, according to
CBO and JCT,36 adverse selection will
be mitigated principally by the
minimum essential coverage provision
and the availability of premium tax
credits, which will make insurance
affordable for millions of Americans for
whom it is currently unaffordable. Other
factors such as fixed open enrollment
periods will also help to mitigate
adverse selection. The Affordable Care
Act also establishes a transitional
reinsurance program, a temporary risk
corridor program, and a permanent risk
adjustment program, which will provide
payments to issuers providing coverage
to high-risk individuals, to mitigate the
potential effects of adverse selection.
These programs will provide payment
stability to issuers and reduce
uncertainty in insurance risk in the
individual market and in the small
36 Congressional Budget Office, Letter to
Honorable Evan Bayh providing An Analysis of
Health Insurance Premiums Under the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act, November 30,
2009.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
group market, in the case of the
permanent risk adjustment program.
Administrative costs for issuers will
be lowered because of the elimination of
medical underwriting and the ban on
coverage exclusions. Costs should
decrease for processing new
applications for coverage and
implementing the coverage exclusions
in the individual and small group
markets. This, in turn, could contribute
to lower premium rates.
The final rule also requires all health
insurance issuers marketing group or
individual health insurance coverage to
comply with the same marketing
standards as issuers offering QHPs
within the Exchanges. This minimizes
the potential for the adverse selection
that could result if plans sold through
Exchanges were subject to different
marketing standards from plans sold
outside of the Exchanges. A common
standard covering the entire insurance
market will also ensure consistency in
market oversight, increase competition,
and reduce search costs for
consumers.37
The amendments to the rate review
standards will help avoid significant
issuer duplication of effort for filings
subject to review by using the same
standardized template for all issuers
offering health insurance coverage in
the small group or individual markets.
Additionally, the use of the unified rate
review template will provide the
necessary information to conduct the
review and approval of products sold
inside and outside an Exchange,
monitor rates to detect patterns that
could signal market disruption, and
oversee the market-wide rules.
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
b. Costs
Under the final rule, issuers will
likely incur some one-time, fixed costs
in order to comply with the provisions
of this final rule, including
administrative expenditures for systems
and software updates and changes in
marketing. In addition, states may incur
costs in order to establish geographic
rating areas and uniform age rating
curves. We do not anticipate that many
states will establish their own age curve:
Only one state has indicated that it
would establish its own age rating
curve. As discussed in section V. of the
preamble, we estimate that a state
would incur approximately $24,000 in
costs to establish its own age curve. The
final rule provides that a state’s rating
areas must be based on the geographic
37 R. Cebul et al., Unhealthy Insurance Markets:
Search Frictions and the Cost and Quality of Health
Insurance, American Economic Review 101(5):
1842–1847, 2011.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:06 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
divisions of counties, three-digit zip
codes, or MSAs and non-MSAs and will
be presumed adequate if either of the
following conditions are met: (1) As of
January 1, 2013, the state had
established by law, rule, regulation,
bulletin, or other executive action
uniform geographic rating areas for the
entire state; or (2) After January 1, 2013,
the state establishes by law, rule,
regulation, bulletin, or other executive
action for the entire state no more
geographic rating areas than the number
of MSAs in the state plus one. States
have the option to seek approval from
CMS of a greater number of rating areas
as long as the areas are based on
counties, three-digit zip codes, or MSAs
and non-MSAs. We anticipate that few
states will incur costs related to
establishing rating areas and estimate
that related costs will be approximately
$1,600 each for those that do.
In addition to these administrative
costs, insurance coverage can lead to
increased utilization of health services
for individuals who become newly
insured. While a portion of this
increased utilization may be
economically inefficient, studies that
estimated the effects of Medicare found
that the cost of this inefficiency is likely
more than offset by the benefit of risk
reduction.38 39
The final rule also directs states to
provide information to CMS about their
rating and risk pooling practices in
several key areas, as applicable. They
include: Age and tobacco rating factors,
age rating curves, family tier structure,
composite rating in the small group
market, geographical rating areas, and
combined individual and small group
market risk pools. As discussed in
section V. of the preamble, we estimate
a total burden of approximately $279 for
a state to submit information in all
seven areas. This estimate does not
include the costs of establishing age
curves and geographical rating areas,
which are discussed above.
Health insurance issuers seeking rate
increases below the subject to review
threshold will submit data using the
unified rate review template and incur
administrative costs to prepare and
submit the data. As discussed in section
V. of the preamble, we estimate that the
increase in administrative costs for all
issuers seeking rate increases below the
review threshold will be approximately
38 Finkelstein, A, McKnight R: ‘‘What Did
Medicare Do? The Initial Impact of Medicare on
Mortality and Out Of Pocket Medical Spending ’’
Journal of Public Economics 2008, 92:1644–1668.
39 Finkelstein, A., ‘‘The Aggregate Effects of
Health Insurance: Evidence from the Introduction of
Medicare,’’ National Bureau of Economic Research.
Working Paper No. 11619, Sept, 2005.
PO 00000
Frm 00029
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13433
$16 million, with an average of $7,000
per issuer. It should be noted that the
vast majority of states currently require
all rate increases to be filed and that
administrative efficiencies can be
gained by avoiding significant issuer
duplication of effort for filings subject to
review by using the same standardized
template for all issuers offering health
insurance coverage in the small group or
individual markets across all states, and
because the vast majority of states
currently require all rate increases to be
filed. These efficiencies are not
quantified in this rule.
Additionally, issuers seeking rate
increases may need to adjust their
systems to provide the data required in
the standardized template format. The
total one-time cost to all issuers for
developing a program to extract the
necessary data from their systems is
estimated at approximately $4.6 million,
with an average cost of approximately
$2,000 per issuer.
For filings subject to review, states
with effective rate review programs may
use the data submissions in their
reviews; however, it is not expected to
increase review costs.
c. Transfers
As discussed elsewhere in the
preamble, most aspects of rating
methodologies today are left to the
discretion of health insurance issuers,
subject to oversight by the states. In
most states, issuers may vary premium
rates based on a number of factors such
as age, health status, and gender. In
2010, 60 percent of non-elderly adults
who shopped for insurance coverage in
the individual market had difficulty
finding affordable coverage.40 Also, as a
result of current gender rating, premium
rates for women are significantly higher
than those for men. According to a
study by the National Women’s Law
Center, 92 percent of best-selling plans
currently practice gender rating.41 The
provision of fair premiums will allow
issuers to vary rates based on only a
limited number of factors and within
specified ranges. Since rating based on
gender and health will no longer be
40 Sara R. Collins, Invited Testimony: Premium
Tax Credits Under The Affordable Care Act: How
They Will Help Millions Of Uninsured And
Underinsured Americans Gain Affordable,
Comprehensive Health Insurance, The
Commonwealth Fund, October 27, 2011.
41 National Women’s Law Center, Turning to
Fairness: Insurance discrimination against women
today and the Affordable Care Act, Washington, DC,
March 2012.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13434
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
allowed, rates for some older, less
healthy adults and women may
decrease. While these rules could
increase rates for younger, healthier
adults and for some men, other factors
will mitigate the effects of reformed
rating practices, such as choices of and
competition among plans on Exchanges,
greater pooling of risks through the
Exchanges, premium tax credits, the risk
stabilization programs, access to
catastrophic plans, and the minimum
essential coverage provision.
As people who were previously
uninsured obtain coverage, their out-ofpocket expenses are expected to
decrease while the issuers’ spending
will increase, which is expected to be
mitigated by an increase in premium
collections. Expansion in health
insurance coverage will also reduce the
amount of uncompensated care for
providers that treat the uninsured.
Millions of people without health
insurance now use health care services
for which they do not fully pay, shifting
the uncompensated cost of their care to
health care providers, people who do
have insurance (in the form of higher
premiums), and state and local
governments.42 Providers of
uncompensated care try to recover the
money by increasing the amounts
charged to insurance companies, which
results in higher premiums for
individuals with private insurance. The
cost of uncompensated care for the
previously uninsured will be transferred
from the providers (for example,
hospitals and physicians), governmental
programs and charitable organizations
to the individuals and issuers of their
health insurance coverage. Reduction in
the number of uninsured would reduce
the amount of uncompensated care and
could lead, all else held equal, to a
decrease in private health insurance
rates.
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
C. Regulatory Alternatives
Under Executive Order 12866, CMS is
required to consider alternatives to
issuing rules and alternative regulatory
approaches.
Under the final rule, all issuers in a
state and market will use a uniform age
rating curve. CMS considered the
alternative of allowing issuers to set
their own rating curve. Under the
alternative, issuers would have more
flexibility and might incur lower
upfront, fixed costs (for example,
systems and software updates) to
comply with the final rule. A uniform
42 Families USA, Hidden Health Tax: Americans
Pay a Premium (Washington, DC: Families USA,
2009) (https://familiesusa2.org/assets/pdfs/hiddenhealth-tax.pdf).
VerDate Mar<15>2010
18:06 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
age rating curve, however, improves the
accuracy of risk adjustment, provides
for easier price comparisons between
different plans, and simplifies
identification of the second lowest cost
silver plan for purposes of determining
premium tax credits.
CMS also considered the alternatives
of including a tobacco component for
the rating curve and keeping the rating
factor for tobacco use separate from the
wellness program rules. These
alternatives would reduce flexibility for
the issuers with respect to rating for
tobacco use and would provide no
alternative to the tobacco surcharge
which could discourage disclosure of
tobacco use. Under the final rule, a
health insurance issuer in the small
group market may implement the
tobacco use surcharge only in
connection with a wellness program
that effectively allows tobacco users to
reduce their premiums to the level of
non-tobacco users by participating in a
tobacco cessation program or satisfying
another reasonable alternative. This
provision will help to alleviate
underreporting of tobacco use and
promote tobacco cessation strategies
that improve health and reduce health
care costs.
CMS believes that the provisions of
this final rule strike the best balance of
extending protections of the Affordable
Care Act to consumers while preserving
the availability of such coverage and
minimizing market disruptions to the
extent possible.
D. Regulatory Flexibility Act
The Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA)
requires agencies that issue a rule to
analyze options for regulatory relief of
small businesses if a rule has a
significant impact on a substantial
number of small entities. The RFA
generally defines a ‘‘small entity’’ as—
(1) A proprietary firm meeting the size
standards of the Small Business
Administration (SBA), (2) a nonprofit
organization that is not dominant in its
field, or (3) a small government
jurisdiction with a population of less
than 50,000 (states and individuals are
not included in the definition of ‘‘small
entity’’). CMS uses as its measure of
significant economic impact on a
substantial number of small entities a
change in revenues of more than 3 to 5
percent.
As discussed in the Web Portal final
rule published on May 5, 2010 (75 FR
24481), CMS examined the health
insurance industry in depth in the
Regulatory Impact Analysis we prepared
for the final rule on establishment of the
Medicare Advantage program (69 FR
46866, August 3, 2004). In that analysis
PO 00000
Frm 00030
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
it was determined that there were few,
if any, insurance firms underwriting
comprehensive health insurance
policies (in contrast, for example, to
travel insurance policies or dental
discount policies) that fell below the
size thresholds for ‘‘small’’ business
established by the SBA (currently $7
million in annual receipts for health
issuers).43
In addition, CMS used the data from
Medical Loss Ratio (MLR) annual report
submissions for the 2011 MLR reporting
year to develop an estimate of the
number of small entities that offer
comprehensive major medical coverage.
These estimates may overstate the actual
number of small health insurance
issuers that would be affected, since
they do not include receipts from these
companies’ other lines of business. It is
estimated that there are 22 small entities
each with less than $7 million in earned
premiums that offer individual or group
health insurance coverage and would
therefore be subject to the requirements
of this final regulation. These small
entities account for less than five
percent of the estimated 466 companies
offering health insurance coverage in
the individual or group markets in
different states that would be affected by
the provisions of this rule. Thirty six
percent of these small entities belong to
holding groups, and many if not all of
these small entities are likely to have
other lines of business that would result
in their revenues exceeding $7 million.
For these reasons, CMS expects that this
final rule will not affect small issuers.
The requirements in this final rule
may affect health insurance premiums
in the small group market. We expect
that many employers that purchase
health insurance coverage in the small
group market would meet the SBA
standard for small entities. As
mentioned earlier in the impact
analysis, the impact on premiums is
likely to be small and may even lead to
lower rates in the small group market.
CMS will monitor premium changes in
the small group market through the rate
review program.
E. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
Section 202 of the Unfunded
Mandates Reform Act (UMRA) of 1995
requires that agencies assess anticipated
costs and benefits before issuing any
final rule that includes a federal
mandate that could result in any
expenditure in any one year by state,
local or tribal governments, in the
43 Table of Small Business Size Standards
Matched to North American Industry Classification
System Codes, effective March 26, 2012, U.S. Small
Business Administration, available at www.sba.gov.
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
aggregate, or by the private sector, of
$100 million in 1995 dollars, updated
annually for inflation. In early 2013,
that threshold level is approximately
$139 million.
UMRA does not address the total cost
of a final rule. Rather, it focuses on
certain categories of cost, mainly those
‘‘federal mandate’’ costs resulting
from—(1) imposing enforceable duties
on state, local, or tribal governments, or
on the private sector; or (2) increasing
the stringency of conditions in, or
decreasing the funding of, state, local, or
tribal governments under entitlement
programs.
This final rule gives state
governments the option to establish
rating areas within the state and
uniform age rating curves. There are no
mandates on local or tribal
governments. State governments may
incur administrative cost related to the
option of establishing rating areas and
uniform age rating curves. However, if
the state government does not act, CMS
will establish the rating areas and
uniform age rating curve in that state.
State governments will also incur
administrative costs related to
disclosure of rating and pooling
requirements to CMS, which are
estimated to be $279 per state. The
private sector (for example, health
insurance issuers) will incur
administrative costs related to the
implementation of the provisions in this
final rule. This final rule does not
impose an unfunded mandate on local
or tribal governments. However,
consistent with policy embodied in
UMRA, this final rule has been designed
to be low-burden alternative for state,
local and tribal governments, and the
private sector while achieving the
objectives of the Affordable Care Act.
F. Federalism
Executive Order 13132 establishes
certain requirements that an agency
must meet when it promulgates a final
rule that imposes substantial direct
requirement costs on state and local
governments, preempts state law, or
otherwise has Federalism implications.
As discussed earlier in the preamble,
states are the primary regulators of
health insurance coverage. States will
continue to apply state laws regarding
health insurance coverage. However, if
any state law or requirement prevents
the application of a federal standard,
then that particular state law or
requirement would be preempted. If
CMS determines that a state does not
meet the criteria for an effective rate
review program, then CMS will review
a rate increase subject to review to
determine whether it is unreasonable. If
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
a state does meet the criteria, then CMS
will adopt that state’s determination of
whether a rate increase is unreasonable.
States will continue to apply state law
requirements regarding rate and policy
filings. State requirements that are more
stringent than the federal requirements
would be not be preempted by this final
rule. Accordingly, states have
significant latitude to impose
requirements with respect to health
insurance coverage that are more
restrictive than the federal law.
In compliance with the requirement
of Executive Order 13132 that agencies
examine closely any policies that may
have Federalism implications or limit
the policymaking discretion of the
states, CMS has engaged in efforts to
consult with and work cooperatively
with affected states, including
consulting with National Association of
Insurance Commissioners.
Throughout the process of developing
this final rule, CMS has attempted to
balance the states’ interests in regulating
health insurance issuers and Congress’s
intent to provide uniform protections to
consumers in every state. By doing so,
it is CMS’s view that it has complied
with the requirements of Executive
Order 13132. Under the requirements
set forth in section 8(a) of Executive
Order 13132, and by the signatures
affixed to this rule, HHS certifies that
the CMS Center for Consumer
Information and Insurance Oversight
has complied with the requirements of
Executive Order 13132 for the attached
final rule in a meaningful and timely
manner.
G. Congressional Review Act
This final rule is subject to the
Congressional Review Act provisions of
the Small Business Regulatory
Enforcement Fairness Act of 1996 (5
U.S.C. 801, et seq.), which specifies that
before a rule can take effect, the federal
agency promulgating the rule shall
submit to each House of the Congress
and to the Comptroller General a report
containing a copy of the rule along with
other specified information, and has
been transmitted to Congress and the
Comptroller General for review.
List of Subjects
45 CFR Part 144
Health care, Health insurance,
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
45 CFR Part 147
Health care, Health insurance,
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements, and State regulation of
health insurance.
PO 00000
Frm 00031
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13435
45 CFR Part 150
Administrative practice and
procedure, Health care, Health
insurance, Penalties, Reporting and
recordkeeping requirements.
45 CFR Part 154
Administrative practice and
procedure, Claims, Health care, Health
insurance, Health plans, Penalties,
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
45 CFR Part 156
Administrative practice and
procedure, Advertising, Advisory
committees, Brokers, Conflict of
interest, Consumer protection, Grant
programs-health, Grants administration,
Health care, Health insurance, Health
maintenance organization (HMO),
Health records, Hospitals, Indians,
Individuals with disabilities, Loan
programs-health, Organization and
functions (Government agencies),
Medicaid, Public assistance programs,
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements, Safety, State and local
governments, Sunshine Act, Technical
Assistance, Women, and Youth.
For the reasons set forth in the
preamble, the Department of Health and
Human Services amends 45 CFR parts
144, 147, 150, 154, and 156 as set forth
below:
PART 144—REQUIREMENTS
RELATING TO HEALTH INSURANCE
COVERAGE
1. The authority citation for part 144
continues to read as follows:
■
Authority: Secs. 2701 through 2763, 2791,
and 2792 of the Public Health Service Act (42
U.S.C. 300gg through 300gg–63, 300gg–91,
and 300gg–92).
2. Amend § 144.101 by revising
paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) to read as
follows:
■
§ 144.101
Basis and Purpose.
*
*
*
*
*
(d) * * *
(1) States that fail to substantially
enforce one or more provisions of part
146 concerning group health insurance,
one or more provisions of part 147
concerning group or individual health
insurance, or the requirements of part
148 of this subchapter concerning
individual health insurance.
(2) Insurance issuers in States
described in paragraph (d)(1) of this
section.
*
*
*
*
*
■
3. Revise § 144.102 to read as follows:
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13436
§ 144.102
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
Scope and applicability.
(a) For purposes of 45 CFR parts 144
through 148, all health insurance
coverage is generally divided into two
markets—the group market and the
individual market. The group market is
further divided into the large group
market and the small group market.
(b) The protections afforded under 45
CFR parts 144 through 148 to
individuals and employers (and other
sponsors of health insurance offered in
connection with a group health plan)
are determined by whether the coverage
involved is obtained in the small group
market, the large group market, or the
individual market.
(c) Coverage that is provided to
associations, but not related to
employment, and sold to individuals is
not considered group coverage under 45
CFR parts 144 through 148. If the
coverage is offered to an association
member other than in connection with
a group health plan, or is offered to an
association’s employer-member that is
maintaining a group health plan that has
fewer than two participants who are
current employees on the first day of the
plan year, the coverage is considered
individual health insurance coverage for
purposes of 45 CFR parts 144 through
148. The coverage is considered
coverage in the individual market,
regardless of whether it is considered
group coverage under state law. If the
health insurance coverage is offered in
connection with a group health plan as
defined at 45 CFR 144.103, it is
considered group health insurance
coverage for purposes of 45 CFR parts
144 through 148.
(d) Provisions relating to CMS
enforcement of parts 146, 147, and 148
are contained in part 150 of this
subchapter.
PART 147—HEALTH INSURANCE
REFORM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE
GROUP AND INDIVIDUAL HEALTH
INSURANCE MARKETS
4. The authority citation for part 147
continues to read as follows:
■
Authority: Secs. 2701 through 2763, 2791,
and 2792 of the Public Health Service Act (42
U.S.C. 300gg through 300gg–63, 300gg–91,
and 300gg–92), as amended.
5. A new § 147.102 is added to part
147 to read as follows:
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
■
§ 147.102
Fair health insurance premiums.
(a) In general. With respect to the
premium rate charged by a health
insurance issuer for health insurance
coverage offered in the individual or
small group market—
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
(1) The rate may vary with respect to
the particular plan or coverage involved
only by determining the following:
(i) Whether the plan or coverage
covers an individual or family.
(ii) Rating area, as established in
accordance with paragraph (b) of this
section.
(iii) Age, except that the rate may not
vary by more than 3:1 for like
individuals of different age who are age
21 and older and that the variation in
rate must be actuarially justified for
individuals under age 21, consistent
with the uniform age rating curve under
paragraph (e) of this section. For
purposes of identifying the appropriate
age adjustment under this paragraph
and the age band under paragraph (d) of
this section applicable to a specific
enrollee, the enrollee’s age as of the date
of policy issuance or renewal must be
used.
(iv) Subject to section 2705 of the
Public Health Service Act and its
implementing regulations (related to
prohibiting discrimination based on
health status and programs of health
promotion or disease prevention) as
applicable, tobacco use, except that
such rate may not vary by more than
1.5:1 and may only be applied with
respect to individuals who may legally
use tobacco under federal and state law.
For purposes of this section, tobacco use
means use of tobacco on average four or
more times per week within no longer
than the past 6 months. This includes
all tobacco products, except that tobacco
use does not include religious or
ceremonial use of tobacco. Further,
tobacco use must be defined in terms of
when a tobacco product was last used.
(2) The rate must not vary with
respect to the particular plan or
coverage involved by any other factor
not described in paragraph (a)(1) of this
section.
(b) Rating area. (1) A state may
establish one or more rating areas
within that state, as provided in
paragraphs (b)(3) and (b)(4) of this
section, for purposes of applying this
section and the requirements of title
XXVII the Public Health Service Act and
title I of the Patient Protection and
Affordable Care Act.
(2) If a state does not establish rating
areas as provided in paragraphs (b)(3)
and (b)(4) of this section or provide
information on such rating areas in
accordance with § 147.103, or CMS
determines in accordance with
paragraph (b)(5) of this section that a
state’s rating areas under paragraph
(b)(4) of this section are not adequate,
the default will be one rating area for
each metropolitan statistical area in the
state and one rating area comprising all
PO 00000
Frm 00032
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
non-metropolitan statistical areas in the
state, as defined by the Office of
Management and Budget.
(3) A state’s rating areas must be
based on the following geographic
boundaries: Counties, three-digit zip
codes, or metropolitan statistical areas
and non-metropolitan statistical areas,
as defined by the Office of Management
and Budget, and will be presumed
adequate if either of the following
conditions are satisfied:
(i) The state established by law, rule,
regulation, bulletin, or other executive
action uniform rating areas for the entire
state as of January 1, 2013.
(ii) The state establishes by law, rule,
regulation, bulletin, or other executive
action after January 1, 2013 uniform
rating areas for the entire state that are
no greater in number than the number
of metropolitan statistical areas in the
state plus one.
(4) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(3)
of this section, a state may propose to
CMS for approval a number of rating
areas that is greater than the number
described in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this
section, provided such rating areas are
based on the geographic boundaries
specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this
section.
(5) In determining whether the rating
areas established by each state under
paragraph (b)(4) of this section are
adequate, CMS will consider whether
the state’s rating areas are actuarially
justified, are not unfairly
discriminatory, reflect significant
differences in health care unit costs,
lead to stability in rates over time, apply
uniformly to all issuers in a market, and
are based on the geographic boundaries
of counties, three-digit zip codes, or
metropolitan statistical areas and nonmetropolitan statistical areas.
(c) Application of variations based on
age or tobacco use. With respect to
family coverage under health insurance
coverage, the rating variations permitted
under paragraphs (a)(1)(iii) and (a)(1)(iv)
of this section must be applied based on
the portion of the premium attributable
to each family member covered under
the coverage.
(1) Per-member rating. The total
premium for family coverage must be
determined by summing the premiums
for each individual family member.
With respect to family members under
the age of 21, the premiums for no more
than the three oldest covered children
must be taken into account in
determining the total family premium.
(2) Family tiers under community
rating. If a state does not permit any
rating variation for the factors described
in paragraphs (a)(1)(iii) and (a)(1)(iv) of
this section, the state may require that
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
premiums for family coverage be
determined by using uniform family
tiers and the corresponding multipliers
established by the state. If a state does
not establish uniform family tiers and
the corresponding multipliers, the permember-rating methodology under
paragraph (c)(1) of this section will
apply in that state.
(3) Application to small group market.
In the case of the small group market,
the total premium charged to the group
is determined by summing the
premiums of covered participants and
beneficiaries in accordance with
paragraph (c)(1) or (c)(2) of this section,
as applicable. Nothing in this section
precludes a state from requiring issuers
to offer, or an issuer from voluntarily
offering, to a group premiums that are
based on average enrollee amounts,
provided that the total group premium
is the same total amount derived in
accordance with paragraph (c)(1) or
(c)(2) of this section, as applicable.
(d) Uniform age bands. The following
uniform age bands apply for rating
purposes under paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of
this section:
(1) Child age bands. A single age band
for individuals age 0 through 20.
(2) Adult age bands. One-year age
bands for individuals age 21 through 63.
(3) Older adult age bands. A single
age band for individuals age 64 and
older.
(e) Uniform age rating curves. Each
state may establish a uniform age rating
curve in the individual or small group
market, or both markets, for rating
purposes under paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of
this section. If a state does not establish
a uniform age rating curve or provide
information on such age curve in
accordance with § 147.103, a default
uniform age rating curve specified in
guidance by the Secretary will apply in
that state which takes into account the
rating variation permitted for age under
state law.
(f) Special rule for large group market.
If a state permits health insurance
issuers that offer coverage in the large
group market in the state to offer such
coverage through an Exchange starting
in 2017, the provisions of this section
applicable to coverage in the small
group market apply to all coverage
offered in the large group market in the
state.
(g) Applicability date. The provisions
of this section apply for plan years (in
the individual market, policy years)
beginning on or after January 1, 2014.
(h) Grandfathered health plans. This
section does not apply to grandfathered
health plans in accordance with
§ 147.140.
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
6. A new § 147.103 is added to part
147 to read as follows:
■
§ 147.103
State reporting.
(a) 2014. If a state has adopted or
intends to adopt for the 2014 plan or
policy year a standard or requirement
described in this paragraph, the state
must submit to CMS information about
such standard or requirement in a form
and manner specified in guidance by
the Secretary no later than March 29,
2013. A state standard or requirement is
described in this paragraph if it includes
any of the following:
(1) A ratio narrower than 3:1 in
connection with establishing rates for
individuals who are age 21 and older,
pursuant to § 147.102(a)(1)(iii).
(2) A ratio narrower than 1.5:1 in
connection with establishing rates for
individuals who use tobacco legally,
pursuant to § 147.102(a)(1)(iv).
(3) Geographic rating areas, pursuant
to § 147.102(b).
(4) In states that do not permit rating
based on age or tobacco use, uniform
family tiers and corresponding
multipliers, pursuant to § 147.102(c)(2).
(5) A requirement that that issuers in
the small group market offer to a group
premiums that are based on average
enrollee amounts, pursuant to paragraph
§ 147.102(c)(3).
(6) A uniform age rating curve,
pursuant to § 147.102(e).
(b) Updates. If a state adopts a
standard or requirement described in
paragraph (a) of this section for any plan
or policy year beginning after the 2014
plan or policy year (or updates a
standard or requirement that applies for
the 2014 plan or policy year), the state
must submit to CMS information about
such standard in a form and manner
specified in guidance by the Secretary.
(c) Applicability date. The provisions
of this section apply on March 29, 2013.
■ 7. A new § 147.104 is added to part
147 to read as follows:
§ 147.104 Guaranteed availability of
coverage.
(a) Guaranteed availability of
coverage in the individual and group
market. Subject to paragraphs (b)
through (d) of this section, a health
insurance issuer that offers health
insurance coverage in the individual or
group market in a state must offer to any
individual or employer in the state all
products that are approved for sale in
the applicable market, and must accept
any individual or employer that applies
for any of those products.
(b) Enrollment periods. A health
insurance issuer may restrict enrollment
in health insurance coverage to open or
special enrollment periods.
PO 00000
Frm 00033
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13437
(1) Open enrollment periods—(i)
Group market. A health insurance issuer
in the group market must allow an
employer to purchase health insurance
coverage for a group health plan at any
point during the year. In the case of
health insurance coverage offered in the
small group market, a health insurance
issuer may limit the availability of
coverage to an annual enrollment period
that begins November 15 and extends
through December 15 of each year in the
case of a plan sponsor that is unable to
comply with a material plan provision
relating to employer contribution or
group participation rules as defined in
§ 147.106(b)(3), pursuant to applicable
state law and, in the case of a QHP
offered in the SHOP, as permitted by
§ 156.285(c) of this subchapter. With
respect to coverage in the small group
market, and in the large group market if
such coverage is offered in a Small
Business Health Options Program
(SHOP) in a state, coverage must
become effective consistent with the
dates described in § 155.725(h) of this
subchapter.
(ii) Individual market. A health
insurance issuer in the individual
market must allow an individual to
purchase health insurance coverage
during the initial and annual open
enrollment periods described in
§ 155.410(b) and (e) of this subchapter.
Coverage must become effective
consistent with the dates described in
§ 155.410(c) and (f) of this subchapter.
(2) Limited open enrollment periods.
A health insurance issuer in the
individual market must provide a
limited open enrollment period for the
events described in § 155.420(d) of this
subchapter, excluding paragraphs (d)(3)
(concerning citizenship status), (d)(8)
(concerning Indians), and (d)(9)
(concerning exceptional circumstances).
In addition, a health insurance issuer in
the individual market must provide,
with respect to individuals enrolled in
non-calendar year individual health
insurance policies, a limited open
enrollment period beginning on the date
that is 30 calendar days prior to the date
the policy year ends in 2014.
(3) Special enrollment periods. A
health insurance issuer in the group and
individual market must establish special
enrollment periods for qualifying events
as defined under section 603 of the
Employee Retirement Income Security
Act of 1974, as amended. These special
enrollment periods are in addition to
any other special enrollment periods
that are required under federal and state
law.
(4) Length of enrollment periods. With
respect to the group market, enrollees
must be provided 30 calendar days after
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13438
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
the date of the qualifying event
described in paragraph (b)(3) of this
section to elect coverage. With respect
to the individual market, enrollees must
be provided 60 calendar days after the
date of an event described in paragraph
(b)(2) and (b)(3) of this section to elect
coverage.
(5) Effective date of coverage for
limited open and special enrollment
periods. With respect to an election
made under paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of
this section, coverage must become
effective consistent with the dates
described in § 155.420(b) of this
subchapter.
(c) Special rules for network plans. (1)
In the case of a health insurance issuer
that offers health insurance coverage in
the group and individual market
through a network plan, the issuer may
do the following:
(i) Limit the employers that may
apply for the coverage to those with
eligible individuals in the group market
who live, work, or reside in the service
area for the network plan, and limit the
individuals who may apply for the
coverage in the individual market to
those who live or reside in the service
area for the network plan.
(ii) Within the service area of the
plan, deny coverage to employers and
individuals if the issuer has
demonstrated to the applicable state
authority (if required by the state
authority) the following:
(A) It will not have the capacity to
deliver services adequately to enrollees
of any additional groups or any
additional individuals because of its
obligations to existing group contract
holders and enrollees.
(B) It is applying paragraph (c)(1) of
this section uniformly to all employers
and individuals without regard to the
claims experience of those individuals,
employers and their employees (and
their dependents) or any health statusrelated factor relating to such
individuals, employees, and
dependents.
(2) An issuer that denies health
insurance coverage to an individual or
an employer in any service area, in
accordance with paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of
this section, may not offer coverage in
the individual or group market, as
applicable, within the service area to
any individual or employer, as
applicable, for a period of 180 calendar
days after the date the coverage is
denied. This paragraph (c)(2) does not
limit the issuer’s ability to renew
coverage already in force or relieve the
issuer of the responsibility to renew that
coverage.
(3) Coverage offered within a service
area after the 180-day period specified
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
in paragraph (c)(2) of this section is
subject to the requirements of this
section.
(d) Application of financial capacity
limits. (1) A health insurance issuer may
deny health insurance coverage in the
group or individual market if the issuer
has demonstrated to the applicable state
authority (if required by the state
authority) the following:
(i) It does not have the financial
reserves necessary to offer additional
coverage.
(ii) It is applying this paragraph (d)(1)
uniformly to all employers or
individuals in the group or individual
market, as applicable, in the state
consistent with applicable state law and
without regard to the claims experience
of those individuals, employers and
their employees (and their dependents)
or any health status-related factor
relating to such individuals, employees,
and dependents.
(2) An issuer that denies health
insurance coverage to any employer or
individual in a state under paragraph
(d)(1) of this section may not offer
coverage in the group or individual
market, as applicable, in the state before
the later of either of the following dates:
(i) The 181st day after the date the
issuer denies coverage.
(ii) The date the issuer demonstrates
to the applicable state authority, if
required under applicable state law, that
the issuer has sufficient financial
reserves to underwrite additional
coverage.
(3) Paragraph (d)(2) of this section
does not limit the issuer’s ability to
renew coverage already in force or
relieve the issuer of the responsibility to
renew that coverage.
(4) Coverage offered after the 180-day
period specified in paragraph (d)(2) of
this section is subject to the
requirements of this section.
(5) An applicable state authority may
provide for the application of this
paragraph (d) on a service-area-specific
basis.
(e) Marketing. A health insurance
issuer and its officials, employees,
agents and representatives must comply
with any applicable state laws and
regulations regarding marketing by
health insurance issuers and cannot
employ marketing practices or benefit
designs that will have the effect of
discouraging the enrollment of
individuals with significant health
needs in health insurance coverage or
discriminate based on an individual’s
race, color, national origin, present or
predicted disability, age, sex, gender
identity, sexual orientation, expected
length of life, degree of medical
PO 00000
Frm 00034
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
dependency, quality of life, or other
health conditions.
(f) Applicability date. The provisions
of this section apply for plan years (in
the individual market, policy years)
beginning on or after January 1, 2014.
(g) Grandfathered health plans. This
section does not apply to grandfathered
health plans in accordance with
§ 147.140.
■ 8. A new § 147.106 is added to part
147 to read as follows:
§ 147.106 Guaranteed renewability of
coverage.
(a) General rule. Subject to paragraphs
(b) through (d) of this section, a health
insurance issuer offering health
insurance coverage in the individual or
group market is required to renew or
continue in force the coverage at the
option of the plan sponsor or the
individual, as applicable.
(b) Exceptions. An issuer may
nonrenew or discontinue health
insurance coverage offered in the group
or individual market based only on one
or more of the following:
(1) Nonpayment of premiums. The
plan sponsor or individual, as
applicable, has failed to pay premiums
or contributions in accordance with the
terms of the health insurance coverage,
including any timeliness requirements.
(2) Fraud. The plan sponsor or
individual, as applicable, has performed
an act or practice that constitutes fraud
or made an intentional
misrepresentation of material fact in
connection with the coverage.
(3) Violation of participation or
contribution rules. In the case of group
health insurance coverage, the plan
sponsor has failed to comply with a
material plan provision relating to
employer contribution or group
participation rules, pursuant to
applicable state law. For purposes of
this paragraph the following apply:
(i) The term ‘‘employer contribution
rule’’ means a requirement relating to
the minimum level or amount of
employer contribution toward the
premium for enrollment of participants
and beneficiaries.
(ii) The term ‘‘group participation
rule’’ means a requirement relating to
the minimum number of participants or
beneficiaries that must be enrolled in
relation to a specified percentage or
number of eligible individuals or
employees of an employer.
(4) Termination of plan. The issuer is
ceasing to offer coverage in the market
in accordance with paragraph (c) or (d)
of this section and applicable state law.
(5) Enrollees’ movement outside
service area. For network plans, there is
no longer any enrollee under the plan
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
who lives, resides, or works in the
service area of the issuer (or in the area
for which the issuer is authorized to do
business); and in the case of the small
group market, the issuer applies the
same criteria it would apply in denying
enrollment in the plan under
§ 147.104(c)(1)(i).
(6) Association membership ceases.
For coverage made available in the
small or large group market only
through one or more bona fide
associations, if the employer’s
membership in the bona fide association
ceases, but only if the coverage is
terminated uniformly without regard to
any health status-related factor relating
to any covered individual.
(c) Discontinuing a particular
product. In any case in which an issuer
decides to discontinue offering a
particular product offered in the group
or individual market, that product may
be discontinued by the issuer in
accordance with applicable state law in
the applicable market only if the
following occurs:
(1) The issuer provides notice in
writing to each plan sponsor or
individual, as applicable, provided that
particular product in that market (and to
all participants and beneficiaries
covered under such coverage) of the
discontinuation at least 90 calendar
days before the date the coverage will be
discontinued.
(2) The issuer offers to each plan
sponsor or individual, as applicable,
provided that particular product the
option, on a guaranteed availability
basis, to purchase all (or, in the case of
the large group market, any) other
health insurance coverage currently
being offered by the issuer to a group
health plan or individual health
insurance coverage in that market.
(3) In exercising the option to
discontinue that product and in offering
the option of coverage under paragraph
(c)(2) of this section, the issuer acts
uniformly without regard to the claims
experience of those sponsors or
individuals, as applicable, or any health
status-related factor relating to any
participants or beneficiaries covered or
new participants or beneficiaries who
may become eligible for such coverage.
(d) Discontinuing all coverage. (1) An
issuer may elect to discontinue offering
all health insurance coverage in the
individual or group market, or all
markets, in a state in accordance with
applicable state law only if—
(i) The issuer provides notice in
writing to the applicable state authority
and to each plan sponsor or individual,
as applicable, (and all participants and
beneficiaries covered under the
coverage) of the discontinuation at least
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
180 calendar days prior to the date the
coverage will be discontinued; and
(ii) All health insurance policies
issued or delivered for issuance in the
state in the applicable market (or
markets) are discontinued and not
renewed.
(2) An issuer that elects to
discontinue offering all health insurance
coverage in a market (or markets) in a
state as described in this paragraph (d)
may not issue coverage in the applicable
market (or markets) and state involved
during the 5-year period beginning on
the date of discontinuation of the last
coverage not renewed.
(e) Exception for uniform
modification of coverage. Only at the
time of coverage renewal may issuers
modify the health insurance coverage
for a product offered to a group health
plan in the following:
(1) Large group market.
(2) Small group market if, for coverage
available in this market (other than only
through one or more bona fide
associations), the modification is
consistent with state law and is effective
uniformly among group health plans
with that product.
(f) Application to coverage offered
only through associations. In the case of
health insurance coverage that is made
available by a health insurance issuer in
the small or large group market to
employers only through one or more
associations, the reference to ‘‘plan
sponsor’’ is deemed, with respect to
coverage provided to an employer
member of the association, to include a
reference to the employer.
(g) Applicability date. The provisions
of this section apply for plan years (in
the individual market, policy years)
beginning on or after January 1, 2014.
(h) Grandfathered health plans. This
section does not apply to grandfathered
health plans in accordance with
§ 147.140.
■ 9. Amend § 147.145 by revising
paragraph (b)(1) and adding paragraph
(b)(3) to read as follows:
§ 147.145 Student health insurance
coverage.
*
*
*
*
*
(b) Exemptions from the Public Health
Service Act and the Affordable Care Act
—(1) Guaranteed availability and
guaranteed renewability—(i) For
purposes of sections 2741(e)(1) and
2742(b)(5) of the Public Health Service
Act, student health insurance coverage
is deemed to be available only through
a bona fide association.
(ii) For purposes of section 2702(a) of
the Public Health Service Act, a health
insurance issuer that offers student
health insurance coverage is not
PO 00000
Frm 00035
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13439
required to accept individuals who are
not students or dependents of students
in such coverage.
(iii) For purposes of section 2703(a) of
the Public Health Service Act, a health
insurance issuer that offers student
health insurance coverage is not
required to renew or continue in force
coverage for individuals who are no
longer students or dependents of
students.
*
*
*
*
*
(3) Single risk pool. Student health
insurance coverage is not subject to the
requirements of section 1312(c) of the
Affordable Care Act.
*
*
*
*
*
PART 150—CMS ENFORCEMENT IN
GROUP AND INDIVIDUAL INSURANCE
MARKETS
10. The authority citation for part 150
continues to read as follows:
■
Authority: Secs. 2701 through 2763, 2791,
and 2792 of the Public Health Service Act (42
U.S.C. 300gg through 300gg–63, 300gg–91,
and 300gg–92), as amended.
11. Amend § 150.101 by revising
paragraphs (a) and (b)(2) to read as
follows:
■
§ 150.101
Basis and scope.
(a) Basis. CMS’s enforcement
authority under sections 2723 and 2761
of the PHS Act and its rulemaking
authority under section 2792 of the PHS
Act provide the basis for issuing
regulations under this part 150.
(b) * * *
(2) Enforcement with respect to health
insurance issuers. The states have
primary enforcement authority with
respect to the requirements of title
XXVII of the PHS Act that apply to
health insurance issuers offering
coverage in the group or individual
health insurance market. If CMS
determines under subpart B of this part
that a state is not substantially enforcing
title XXVII of the PHS Act, including
the implementing regulations in parts
146, 147, and 148 of this subchapter,
CMS enforces them under subpart C of
this part.
■ 12. Amend § 150.103 as follows:
■ a. Remove the definition of ‘‘HIPAA
requirements;’’
■ b. Revise the definition of ‘‘Individual
health insurance policy or individual
policy;’’ and
■ c. Add the definition of ‘‘PHS Act
requirements’’ in alphabetical order.
The revision and addition read as
follows:
§ 150.103
Definitions.
*
*
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
*
27FER2
*
*
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
13440
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
Individual health insurance policy or
individual policy means the legal
document or contract issued by the
issuer to an individual that contains the
conditions and terms of the insurance.
Any association or trust arrangement
that is not a group health plan as
defined in § 144.103 of this subchapter
or does not provide coverage in
connection with one or more group
health plans is individual coverage
subject to the requirements of parts 147
and 148 of this subchapter. The term
‘‘individual health insurance policy’’
includes a policy that is—
(1) Issued to an association that makes
coverage available to individuals other
than in connection with one or more
group health plans; or
(2) Administered, or placed in a trust,
and is not sold in connection with a
group health plan subject to the
provisions of parts 146 and 147 of this
subchapter.
PHS Act requirements means the
requirements of title XXVII of the PHS
Act and its implementing regulations in
parts 146, 147, and 148 of this
subchapter.
*
*
*
*
*
■ 13. In part 150, remove the words
‘‘HIPAA requirement’’ or ‘‘HIPAA
requirements,’’ and add in their place
‘‘PHS Act requirement’’ or ‘‘PHS Act
requirements,’’ respectively, wherever
they appear in the following places:
■ a. Section 150.103, in the definition of
‘‘Complaint’’.
■ b. In the heading of subpart B of part
150.
■ c. Section 150.201.
■ d. Section 150.203, in the
introductory text and paragraphs (a) and
(b).
■ e. Section 150.205(d) and (e)(1).
■ f. Section 150.207, in the section
heading and text.
■ g. Section 150.209.
■ h. Section 150.211, in the
introductory text.
■ i. Section 150.213(b) and (c).
■ j. Section 150.217, in the introductory
text.
■ k. Section 150.219(a).
■ l. Section 150.221(a).
■ m. Section 150.301.
■ n. Section 150.303(a) introductory
text, (a)(3), and (b).
■ o. Section 150.305(a)(1), (b)(2), and
(c)(2).
■ p. Section 150.309.
■ q. Section 150.311, in the introductory
text and paragraphs (d), (f) introductory
text, (f)(3), and (g).
■ r. Section 150.313(a) and (e)(3)(iv).
■ s. Section 150.317(a)(1) and (a)(3).
■ t. Section 150.319(b)(1) introductory
text, (b)(1)(ii), and (b)(1)(iii).
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
■
■
u. Section 150.343(a).
v. Section 150.465(c).
PART 154—HEALTH INSURANCE
ISSUER RATE INCREASES:
DISCLOSURE AND REVIEW
REQUIREMENTS
14. The authority citation for part 154
continues to read as follows:
■
Authority: Section 2794 of the Public
Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300gg–94).
15. In § 154.200, revise the third
sentence and add a fourth sentence to
paragraph (a)(2) and paragraph (b) to
read as follows:
■
§ 154.200
review.
Rate increases subject to
(a) * * *
(2) * * * A state-specific threshold
shall be based on factors impacting rate
increases in a state to the extent that the
data relating to such state-specific
factors is available by August 1. States
interested in proposing a state-specific
threshold for approval are required to
submit a proposal to the Secretary by
August 1.
(b) The Secretary will publish a notice
no later than September 1 of each year,
to be effective on January 1 of the
following year, concerning whether a
threshold under paragraph (a)(1) or
(a)(2) of this section applies to the state;
except that, with respect to the 12month period that begins on September
1, 2011, the threshold under paragraph
(a)(1) of this section applies.
*
*
*
*
*
■ 16. Revise § 154.215 to read as
follows:
§ 154.215 Submission of rate filing
justification.
(a) If any product is subject to a rate
increase, a health insurance issuer must
submit a Rate Filing Justification for all
products in the single risk pool,
including new or discontinuing
products, on a form and in a manner
prescribed by the Secretary.
(b) The Rate Filing Justification must
consist of the following Parts:
(1) Unified rate review template (Part
I), as described in paragraph (d) of this
section.
(2) Written description justifying the
rate increase (Part II), as described in
paragraph (e) of this section.
(3) Rating filing documentation (Part
III), as described in paragraph (f) of this
section.
(c) A health insurance issuer must
complete and submit Parts I and III of
the Rate Filing Justification described in
paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(3) of this
section to CMS and, as long as the
applicable state accepts such
PO 00000
Frm 00036
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
submissions, to the applicable state. If a
rate increase is subject to review, then
the health insurance issuer must also
complete and submit to CMS and, if
applicable, the state Part II of the Rate
Filing Justification described in
paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(d) Content of unified rate review
template (Part I): The unified rate
review template must include the
following as determined appropriate by
the Secretary:
(1) Historical and projected claims
experience.
(2) Trend projections related to
utilization, and service or unit cost.
(3) Any claims assumptions related to
benefit changes.
(4) Allocation of the overall rate
increase to claims and non-claims costs.
(5) Per enrollee per month allocation
of current and projected premium.
(6) Three year history of rate increases
for the product associated with the rate
increase.
(e) Content of written description
justifying the rate increase (Part II): The
written description of the rate increase
must include a simple and brief
narrative describing the data and
assumptions that were used to develop
the rate increase and including the
following:
(1) Explanation of the most significant
factors causing the rate increase,
including a brief description of the
relevant claims and non-claims expense
increases reported in the rate increase
summary.
(2) Brief description of the overall
experience of the policy, including
historical and projected expenses, and
loss ratios.
(f) Content of rate filing
documentation (Part III): The rate filing
documentation must include an
actuarial memorandum that contains the
reasoning and assumptions supporting
the data contained in Part I of the Rate
Filing Justification. Parts I and III must
be sufficient to conduct an examination
satisfying the requirements of
§ 154.301(a)(3) and (4) and determine
whether the rate increase is an
unreasonable increase. Instructions
concerning the requirements for the rate
filing documentation will be provided
in guidance issued by CMS.
(g) If the level of detail provided by
the issuer for the information under
paragraphs (d) and (f) of this section
does not provide sufficient basis for
CMS to determine whether the rate
increase is an unreasonable rate increase
when CMS reviews a rate increase
subject to review under § 154.210(a),
CMS will request the additional
information necessary to make its
determination. The health insurance
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
issuer must provide the requested
information to CMS within 10 business
days following its receipt of the request.
(h) Posting of the disclosure on the
CMS Web site:
(1) CMS promptly will make available
to the public on its Web site the
information contained in Part II of each
Rate Filing Justification.
(2) CMS will make available to the
public on its Web site the information
contained in Parts I and III of each Rate
Filing Justification that is not a trade
secret or confidential commercial or
financial information as defined in
HHS’s Freedom of Information Act
regulations, 45 CFR 5.65.
(3) CMS will include a disclaimer on
its Web site with the information made
available to the public that explains the
purpose and role of the Rate Filing
Justification.
(4) CMS will include information on
its Web site concerning how the public
can submit comments on the proposed
rate increases that CMS reviews.
■ 17. Revise § 154.220 to read as
follows:
§ 154.220 Timing of providing the rate
filing justification.
A health insurance issuer must
submit a Rate Filing Justification for all
rate increases that are filed in a state on
or after April 1, 2013, or effective on or
after January 1, 2014 in a state that does
not require the rate increase to be filed,
as follows:
(a) If a state requires that a proposed
rate increase be filed with the state prior
to the implementation of the rate, the
health insurance issuer must submit to
CMS and the applicable state the Rate
Filing Justification on the date on which
the health insurance issuer submits the
proposed rate increase to the state.
(b) For all other states, the health
insurance issuer must submit to CMS
and the state the Rate Filing Justification
prior to the implementation of the rate
increase.
§ 154.225
[Amended]
18a. In § 154.225(a), introductory text,
remove the words ‘‘Preliminary
Justification’’ and add in their place
‘‘Rate Filing Justification.’’
■
§ 154.230
[Amended]
18b. In § 154.230(b) and (c)(1), remove
the words ‘‘Preliminary Justification’’
and add in their place ‘‘Rate Filing
Justification.’’
■ 19. Amend § 154.301 as follows:
■ a. Amend paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and
(a)(3)(xi) by removing ‘‘; and’’ and
adding in its place a period.
■ b. Amend paragraphs (a)(4)(i),
(a)(4)(ii), and (a)(4)(vi) through (a)(4)(x)
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
■
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
by removing the semicolons and
replacing them with periods.
■ c. Revise paragraphs (a)(4)(iii) through
(a)(4)(v), and (b).
■ d. Add new paragraphs (a)(3)(iii),
(a)(3)(iv), and (a)(4)(xiii) through
(a)(4)(xv). The revisions and additions
read as follows:
§ 154.301 CMS’s determinations of
effective rate review programs.
(a) * * *
(3) * * *
(iii) The reasonableness of
assumptions used by the health
insurance issuer to estimate the rate
impact of the reinsurance and risk
adjustment programs under sections
1341 and 1343 of the Affordable Care
Act.
(iv) The health insurance issuer’s data
related to implementation and ongoing
utilization of a market-wide single risk
pool, essential health benefits, actuarial
values and other market reform rules as
required by the Affordable Care Act.
(4) * * *
(iii) The impact of cost-sharing
changes by major service categories,
including actuarial values.
(iv) The impact of benefit changes,
including essential health benefits and
non-essential health benefits.
(v) The impact of changes in enrollee
risk profile and pricing, including rating
limitations for age and tobacco use
under section 2701 of the Public Health
Service Act.
*
*
*
*
*
(xiii) The impacts of geographic
factors and variations.
(xiv) The impact of changes within a
single risk pool to all products or plans
within the risk pool.
(xv) The impact of reinsurance and
risk adjustment payments and charges
under sections 1341 and 1343 of the
Affordable Care Act.
*
*
*
*
*
(b) Public disclosure and input. In
addition to satisfying the provisions in
paragraph (a) of this section, a state with
an effective rate review program must
provide, for the rate increases it reviews,
access from its Web site to at least the
information contained in Parts I, II, and
III of the Rate Filing Justification that
CMS makes available on its Web site (or
provide CMS’s Web address for such
information) and have a mechanism for
receiving public comments on those
proposed rate increases.
*
*
*
*
*
PO 00000
Frm 00037
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 4700
13441
PART 156—HEALTH INSURANCE
ISSUER STANDARDS UNDER THE
AFFORDABLE CARE ACT, INCLUDING
STANDARDS RELATED TO
EXCHANGES
20. The authority citation for part 156
continues to read as follows:
■
Authority: Title I of the Affordable Care
Act, sections 1301–1304, 1311–1312, 1321,
1322, 1324, 1334, 1342–1343, and 1401–
1402, Pub. L. 111–148, 124 Stat. 119 (42
U.S.C. 18042).
21. A new § 156.80 is added to subpart
A to read as follows:
■
§ 156.80
Single risk pool.
(a) Individual market. A health
insurance issuer must consider the
claims experience of all enrollees in all
health plans (other than grandfathered
health plans) subject to section 2701 of
the Public Health Service Act and
offered by such issuer in the individual
market in a state, including those
enrollees who do not enroll in such
plans through the Exchange, to be
members of a single risk pool.
(b) Small group market. A health
insurance issuer must consider the
claims experience of all enrollees in all
health plans (other than grandfathered
health plans) subject to section 2701 of
the Public Health Service Act and
offered by such issuer in the small
group market in a state, including those
enrollees who do not enroll in such
plans through the Exchange, to be
members of a single risk pool.
(c) Merger of the individual and small
group markets. A state may require the
individual and small group insurance
markets within a state to be merged into
a single risk pool if the state determines
appropriate. A state that requires such
merger must submit to CMS information
on its election in accordance with the
procedures described in § 147.103 of
this subchapter.
(d) Index rate—(1) In general. Each
plan year or policy year, as applicable,
a health insurance issuer must establish
an index rate for a state market
described in paragraphs (a) through (c)
of this section based on the total
combined claims costs for providing
essential health benefits within the
single risk pool of that state market. The
index rate must be adjusted on a marketwide basis based on the total expected
market-wide payments and charges
under the risk adjustment and
reinsurance programs in the state and
Exchange user fees. The premium rate
for all of the health insurance issuer’s
plans in the relevant state market must
use the applicable market-wide adjusted
index rate, subject only to the plan-level
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
13442
Federal Register / Vol. 78, No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 / Rules and Regulations
erowe on DSK2VPTVN1PROD with RULES_2
adjustments permitted in paragraph
(d)(2) of this section.
(2) Permitted plan-level adjustments
to the index rate. For plan years or
policy years beginning on or after
January 1, 2014, a health insurance
issuer may vary premium rates for a
particular plan from its market-wide
index rate for a relevant state market
based only on the following actuarially
justified plan-specific factors:
(i) The actuarial value and costsharing design of the plan.
(ii) The plan’s provider network,
delivery system characteristics, and
utilization management practices.
(iii) The benefits provided under the
plan that are in addition to the essential
health benefits. These additional
benefits must be pooled with similar
benefits within the single risk pool and
the claims experience from those
benefits must be utilized to determine
rate variations for plans that offer those
benefits in addition to essential health
benefits.
(iv) Administrative costs, excluding
Exchange user fees.
(v) With respect to catastrophic plans,
the expected impact of the specific
eligibility categories for those plans.
(e) Grandfathered health plans in the
individual and small group market. A
state law requiring grandfathered health
plans described in § 147.140 of this
subchapter to be included in a single
VerDate Mar<15>2010
15:19 Feb 26, 2013
Jkt 229001
risk pool described in paragraphs (a)
through (c) of this section does not
apply.
(f) Applicability date. The provisions
of this section apply for plan years (as
that term is defined in § 144.103 of this
subchapter) in the group market, and for
policy years (as that term is defined in
§ 144.103 of this subchapter) in the
individual market, beginning on or after
January 1, 2014.
■ 22. A new § 156.155 is added to
subpart B to read as follows:
§ 156.155
plans.
Enrollment in catastrophic
(a) General rule. A health plan is a
catastrophic plan if it meets the
following conditions:
(1) Meets all applicable requirements
for health insurance coverage in the
individual market (including but not
limited to those requirements described
in parts 147 and 148 of this subchapter),
and is offered only in the individual
market.
(2) Does not provide a bronze, silver,
gold, or platinum level of coverage
described in section 1302(d) of the
Affordable Care Act.
(3) Provides coverage of the essential
health benefits under section 1302(b) of
the Affordable Care Act once the annual
limitation on cost sharing in section
1302(c)(1) of the Affordable Care Act is
reached.
PO 00000
Frm 00038
Fmt 4701
Sfmt 9990
(4) Provides coverage for at least three
primary care visits per year before
reaching the deductible.
(5) Covers only individuals who meet
either of the following conditions:
(i) Have not attained the age of 30
prior to the first day of the plan or
policy year.
(ii) Have received a certificate of
exemption for the reasons identified in
section 1302(e)(2)(B)(i) or (ii) of the
Affordable Care Act.
(b) Coverage of preventive health
services. A catastrophic plan may not
impose any cost-sharing requirements
(such as a copayment, coinsurance, or
deductible) for preventive services, in
accordance with section 2713 of the
Public Health Service Act.
(c) Application for family coverage.
For other than self-only coverage, each
individual enrolled must meet the
requirements of paragraph (a)(5) of this
section.
Dated: February 15, 2013.
Marilyn Tavenner,
Acting Administrator, Centers for Medicare
& Medicaid Services.
Approved: February 20, 2013.
Kathleen Sebelius,
Secretary, Department of Health and Human
Services.
[FR Doc. 2013–04335 Filed 2–22–13; 11:15 am]
BILLING CODE 4120–01–P
E:\FR\FM\27FER2.SGM
27FER2
Agencies
[Federal Register Volume 78, Number 39 (Wednesday, February 27, 2013)]
[Rules and Regulations]
[Pages 13405-13442]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Printing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 2013-04335]
[[Page 13405]]
Vol. 78
Wednesday,
No. 39
February 27, 2013
Part II
Department of Health and Human Services
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
45 CFR Parts 144, 147, 150, et al.
Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act; Health Insurance Market
Rules; Rate Review; Final Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 78 , No. 39 / Wednesday, February 27, 2013 /
Rules and Regulations
[[Page 13406]]
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES
45 CFR Parts 144, 147, 150, 154 and 156
[CMS-9972-F]
RIN 0938-AR40
Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act; Health Insurance
Market Rules; Rate Review
AGENCY: Department of Health and Human Services.
ACTION: Final rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This final rule implements provisions related to fair health
insurance premiums, guaranteed availability, guaranteed renewability,
single risk pools, and catastrophic plans, consistent with title I of
the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act, as amended by the
Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010, referred to
collectively as the Affordable Care Act. The final rule clarifies the
approach used to enforce the applicable requirements of the Affordable
Care Act with respect to health insurance issuers and group health
plans that are non-federal governmental plans. This final rule also
amends the standards for health insurance issuers and states regarding
reporting, utilization, and collection of data under the federal rate
review program, and revises the timeline for states to propose state-
specific thresholds for review and approval by the Centers for Medicare
& Medicaid Services (CMS).
DATES: Effective Date. This rule is effective on April 29, 2013, except
45 CFR 147.103 and the amendments to 45 CFR part 154 are effective on
March 29, 2013.
Applicability Dates. The provisions of this final rule generally
apply to health insurance coverage for plan or policy years beginning
on or after January 1, 2014. The provisions of 45 CFR 147.103 apply on
March 29, 2013. The amendments to 45 CFR part 154 apply on April 1,
2013.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Jacob Ackerman, (410) 786-1565 (or by
email: marketreform@cms.hhs.gov), concerning the health insurance
market rules; Douglas Pennington, (410) 786-1553 (or by email:
ratereview@hhs.gov), concerning rate review.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Table of Contents
I. Background
A. Legislative Overview
B. Structure of the Final Rule
II. Provisions of the Proposed Rule and Analysis and Responses to
Comments
A. Part 144--Requirements Relating to Health Insurance Coverage
1. Subpart A--General Provisions
B. Part 147--Health Insurance Reform Requirements for the Group
and Individual Health Insurance Markets
1. Fair Health Insurance Premiums
2. State Reporting
3. Guaranteed Availability of Coverage
4. Guaranteed Renewability of Coverage
C. Part 150--CMS Enforcement in Group and Individual Insurance
Markets
D. Part 154--Health Insurance Issuer Rate Increases: Disclosure
and Review Requirements
1. Subpart B--Disclosure and Review Provisions
2. Subpart C--Effective Rate Review Programs
E. Part 156--Health Insurance Issuer Standards Under the
Affordable Care Act, Including Standards Related to Exchanges
1. Subpart A--General Provisions
2. Subpart B--Standards for Essential Health Benefits, Actuarial
Value, and Cost Sharing
F. Applicability to Special Plan Types
III. Modification of Effective Date of Certain Provisions
IV. Provisions of the Final Regulations
V. Collection of Information Requirements
A. ICRs Regarding State Disclosures
B. ICRs Regarding Rate Increase Disclosure and Review
VI. Regulatory Impact Analysis
A. Summary
B. Executive Orders
1. Need for Regulatory Action
2. Summary of Impacts
3. Anticipated Benefits, Costs, and Transfers
C. Regulatory Alternatives
D. Regulatory Flexibility Act
E. Unfunded Mandates
F. Federalism
G. Congressional Review Act
Executive Summary: Beginning in 2014, health insurance issuers will
be prohibited from denying coverage to any American because of a pre-
existing condition, and from charging individuals and small employers
higher premiums based on health status or gender. In addition, health
insurance issuers will no longer be able to segment enrollees into
separate rating pools in order to charge high-risk individuals more
than low-risk individuals. These reforms, combined with other
provisions in the Affordable Care Act, will improve the functioning of
both the individual and small group markets and make health insurance
affordable and accessible to millions of individuals and families who
currently lack affordable coverage options.
The Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) published
proposed standards to implement the 2014 market reform provisions of
the Affordable Care Act and to amend the federal rate review program in
a November 26, 2012 Federal Register proposed rule entitled ``Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act; Health Insurance Market Rules; Rate
Review'' (77 FR 70584). These standards apply to health insurance
issuers offering non-grandfathered health insurance coverage both
inside and outside of the new competitive marketplaces called
Affordable Insurance Exchanges, or ``Exchanges.''
This final rule: (1) Provides that health insurance issuers may
vary the premium rate for health insurance coverage in the individual
and small group markets only based on family size, geography, and age
and tobacco use within limits; (2) directs health insurance issuers to
offer coverage to and accept every employer or individual who applies
for coverage in the group and individual market, subject to certain
exceptions; (3) directs health insurance issuers to renew or continue
in force coverage in the group and individual market, subject to
certain exceptions; (4) codifies the requirement that issuers maintain
a single risk pool for the individual market and a single risk pool for
the small group market (unless a state decides to merge the markets
into a single risk pool); and (5) outlines standards for enrollment in
catastrophic plans for young adults and people who cannot otherwise
afford health insurance.
Finally, this rule amends the standards under the rate review
program in 45 CFR part 154. The amendments revise the timeline for
states to propose state-specific thresholds for review and approval by
CMS. The amendments also direct health insurance issuers to submit data
relating to proposed rate increases in a standardized format specified
by the Secretary of HHS (the Secretary), and modify criteria and
factors for states to have an effective rate review program. These
changes are necessary to reflect the new market reform provisions
discussed above and to fulfill the statutory requirement beginning in
2014 that the Secretary, in conjunction with the states, monitor
premium increases of health insurance coverage offered through an
Exchange and outside of an Exchange. The provisions are also designed
to streamline data collection for issuers, states, Exchanges, and HHS.
The substantive authority for these final rules is generally
sections 2701, 2702, 2703, 2723 and 2794 of the Public Health Service
Act (PHS Act) and sections 1302(e), 1312(c), and 1560(c) of the
Affordable Care Act. PHS Act section 2792 authorizes rulemaking as
necessary or appropriate to carry out the provisions of title XXVII of
the PHS Act, including sections 2701, 2702, 2703, 2723, and 2794.
Section 1321(a) of the
[[Page 13407]]
Affordable Care Act authorizes rulemaking with respect to sections
1302(e), 1312(c), and 1560(c).
I. Background
A. Legislative Overview
The Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act (Pub. L. 111-148)
was enacted on March 23, 2010. The Health Care and Education
Reconciliation Act of 2010 (Pub. L. 111-152) was enacted on March 30,
2010. We refer to the two statutes collectively as the ``Affordable
Care Act'' in this final rule.
Subtitles A and C of title I of the Affordable Care Act
reorganized, amended, and added to the provisions of part A of title
XXVII of the PHS Act relating to health insurance issuers in the group
and individual markets and to group health plans that are non-federal
governmental plans.\1\ As relevant here, these PHS Act provisions
include section 2701 (fair health insurance premiums), section 2702
(guaranteed availability of coverage), section 2703 (guaranteed
renewability of coverage), and section 2794 (ensuring that consumers
get value for their dollars). In addition, subtitle D of title I of the
Affordable Care Act includes section 1302(e) (catastrophic plans) and
section 1312(c) (single risk pool). These provisions will establish a
federal floor that ensures individuals and employers in all states have
certain basic protections with respect to the availability and
affordability of health insurance coverage.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The Affordable Care Act also added section 715(a)(1) to the
Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) and section
9815(a)(1) to the Internal Revenue Code (the Code) to incorporate
the provisions of part A of title XXVII of the PHS Act into ERISA
and the Code, and to make them applicable to group health plans
other than non-federal governmental group health plans. The market
reform provisions discussed in this final rule apply only to health
insurance issuers offering health insurance coverage.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 2701(a)(1) of the PHS Act regarding fair health insurance
premiums provides that the premium rate charged by a health insurance
issuer for health insurance coverage offered in the individual or small
group market may vary with respect to a particular plan or coverage
only based on the following factors: (1) Whether the plan or coverage
covers an individual or family; (2) rating area; (3) age (within a
ratio of 3:1 for adults); and (4) tobacco use (within a ratio of
1.5:1). Section 2701(a)(2) directs each state to establish one or more
rating areas and charges the Secretary with reviewing the adequacy of
state-established rating areas. If the Secretary determines that a
state's rating areas are not adequate, or that a state does not
establish such areas, the statute authorizes the Secretary to establish
rating areas for that state. Section 2701(a)(3) directs the Secretary,
in consultation with the National Association of Insurance
Commissioners (NAIC), to define permissible age bands for rating
purposes. Section 2701(a)(4) provides that, for purposes of family
coverage, any rating variation for age and tobacco use must be applied
based on the portion of the premium attributable to each family member.
Section 2702 of the PHS Act directs a health insurance issuer
offering health insurance coverage in the group or individual market in
a state to accept every employer and individual in the state that
applies for the coverage, subject to certain exceptions. These
exceptions allow issuers to restrict enrollment in coverage: (1) To
open and special enrollment periods as described in section 2702(b);
(2) to employers with eligible individuals who live, work, or reside in
the service area of a network plan as described in section
2702(c)(1)(A); and (3) in certain situations involving limited network
capacity and limited financial capacity as described in section
2702(c)(1)(B) and (d).
Section 2703 of the PHS Act requires a health insurance issuer to
renew or continue in force any coverage in the group or individual
market at the option of the plan sponsor or the individual. Exceptions
to this requirement described in section 2703(b) allow the issuer to
nonrenew or discontinue coverage for nonpayment of premiums, fraud, or
violation of participation or contribution rules under state law. The
law also permits an issuer to cease to offer either a particular type
of product or all coverage in a particular market, to refuse to renew
coverage if all of the plan's enrollees leave the service area of a
network plan, or if group health plan coverage is provided through a
bona fide association and the employer's association membership ends.
Finally, an exception outlined in section 2703(d) permits a health
insurance issuer, at the time of coverage renewal, to modify the
coverage offered to a group health plan in the large group market, or
in the small group market if, for coverage that is available in such
market other than through one or more bona fide associations, the
modification is consistent with state law and effective on a uniform
basis among group health plans with that product.\2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\2\ Section 2742 of the PHS Act provides a corresponding
exception for the uniform modification of coverage in the individual
market.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 2701 applies to health insurance issuers offering health
insurance coverage in the individual and small group markets, and in
the large group market if a state, beginning in 2017, allows health
insurance issuers in the large group market to offer qualified health
plans (QHPs) in such market through an Exchange pursuant to section
1312(f)(2)(B) of the Affordable Care Act.\3\ Sections 2702 and 2703
apply to issuers in the individual and group (small and large) markets.
These provisions apply to health insurance coverage in the respective
markets regardless of whether the coverage is a QHP offered on
Exchanges. Section 1255 of the Affordable Care Act provides that
sections 2701, 2702, and 2703 of the PHS Act are effective for plan
years (in the individual market, policy years) beginning on or after
January 1, 2014.\4\ Section 1251(a)(2) of the Affordable Care Act
provides that these PHS Act sections do not apply to grandfathered
health insurance coverage.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3\ The applicable definitions for ``individual market,''
``small group market,'' and ``large group market'' are found in PHS
Act section 2791(e) and section 1304(a) of the Affordable Care Act.
\4\ See 45 CFR 144.103 for definitions of ``plan year'' and
``policy year.'' These terms are defined differently from ``plan
year'' and ``benefit year'' as defined in 45 CFR 155.20 with respect
to QHPs.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section 1302 of the Affordable Care Act specifies levels of
coverage or ``actuarial values'' that health plans in the individual
and small group markets, both inside and outside of an Exchange, will
meet as part of the requirement to cover an essential health benefits
(EHB) package beginning in 2014. These plans will provide a bronze,
silver, gold, or platinum level of coverage as described in section
1302(d), or a catastrophic plan in the individual market as described
in section 1302(e) for young adults and people who cannot otherwise
afford health insurance.
Section 1312(c)(1) and (2) of the Affordable Care Act directs a
health insurance issuer to consider all enrollees in all health plans
(other than grandfathered health plans) offered by such issuer to be
members of a single risk pool for a market (the individual market or
small group market). Section 1312(c)(3) gives states the option to
merge the individual and small group markets within the state into a
single risk pool. Section 1312(c) applies to health plans offered both
inside and outside of an Exchange for plan years (in the individual
market, policy years) beginning on or after January 1, 2014. It does
not apply to grandfathered health plans, and explicitly preempts state
law
[[Page 13408]]
requiring grandfathered health plans to be included in a single risk
pool.
Section 1003 of the Affordable Care Act adds a new section 2794 of
the PHS Act, which directs the Secretary, in conjunction with the
states, to establish a process for the annual review of ``unreasonable
increases in premiums for health insurance coverage.'' The statute
provides that health insurance issuers must submit to the Secretary and
the applicable state justifications for unreasonable premium increases
prior to the implementation of the increases. Section 2794(b)(2) also
specifies that in plan years beginning in 2014, the Secretary, in
conjunction with the states, shall monitor premium increases of health
insurance coverage offered through an Exchange and outside of an
Exchange. Section 2794 of the PHS Act does not, by its own terms, apply
to grandfathered health insurance coverage or to self-funded plans.
Regulations at 45 CFR 154.101(b) further limit the scope of review to
small group and individual market coverage.
Section 1563 of the Affordable Care Act amended the Health
Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA)
enforcement provision that previously governed group health insurance
coverage and non-federal governmental group health plans by expanding
its scope to include individual health insurance coverage and by
renumbering the provision as section 2723 of the PHS Act.
The preemption provisions of PHS Act section 2724(a)(1) apply so
that the requirements of part A of title XXVII of the PHS Act are not
to be ``construed to supersede any provision of state law which
establishes, implements, or continues in effect any standard or
requirement solely relating to health insurance issuers in connection
with individual or group health insurance coverage except to the extent
that such standard or requirement prevents the application of a
requirement'' of part A of title XXVII of the PHS Act. Section 1321(d)
of the Affordable Care Act applies the same preemption principle to the
requirements of title I of the Affordable Care Act.\5\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\5\ In addition, section 1252 of the Affordable Care Act
provides that any standard or requirement adopted by a state
pursuant to title I of the Affordable Care Act (or an amendment made
by title I) must be applied uniformly to all health plans in each
insurance market to which the standard and requirements apply.
Sections 1302(e) and 1312(c) of the Affordable Care Act and the
amendments to PHS Act sections 2701, 2702, and 2703 are all found in
title I of the Affordable Care Act.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Structure of the Final Rule
The regulations outlined in this final rule are codified in 45 CFR
parts 144, 147, 150, 154, and 156. Part 144 outlines standards
regarding the basis, scope, and applicability of 45 CFR parts 144
through 148. Part 147 outlines standards for health insurance issuers
in the group and individuals markets related to health insurance
reforms. Part 150 outlines standards regarding enforcement. Part 154
outlines standards for health insurance issuers in the small group and
individual markets with respect to rate increase disclosure and review.
Part 156 outlines standards for issuers of QHPs, including with respect
to participation in an Exchange.
II. Provisions of the Proposed Rule and Analysis and Responses to
Comments
HHS published standards under the statutory provisions discussed in
section I.A. of the preamble in a November 26, 2012 Federal Register
proposed rule entitled ``Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act;
Health Insurance Market Rules; Rate Review'' (77 FR 70584). HHS
received approximately 500 comment letters in response to the November
26, 2012 proposed rule. Commenters represented a wide variety of
stakeholders, including states, tribal organizations, consumers, health
insurance issuers, health care providers, employers, members of the
public, and others. Additionally, HHS consulted with the NAIC through
its Health Care Reform Actuarial (B) Working Group to define
permissible age bands and consulted with and requested formal, written
comments from tribal leaders and representatives about the provisions
of this rule that impact tribes.
This section summarizes the provisions of the November 26, 2012
proposed rule and discusses and provides responses to the comments.
A. Part 144--Requirements Relating to Health Insurance Coverage
1. Subpart A--General Provisions (Sec. 144.101 and Sec. 144.102)
HHS proposed technical changes in Sec. 144.101 and Sec. 144.102
to clarify enforcement of the health insurance reform requirements
added by the Affordable Care Act and implemented in 45 CFR part 147. In
Sec. 144.102(c), HHS also proposed to clarify how to determine whether
insurance coverage sold through associations is group or individual
coverage under the PHS Act.
Comments received regarding HHS's enforcement processes and
regarding bona fide associations are addressed in other sections of the
preamble that we deemed to be more relevant to the substance of the
comments.
Comment: Several commenters supported the clarifications proposed
in Part 144. In particular, commenters supported the clarifications
concerning coverage sold through associations, noting that they would
ensure such coverage complies with the market reform protections of the
Affordable Care Act.
Response: Based on the comments received, we are finalizing the
proposed provisions in Sec. 144.101 and Sec. 144.102 of the proposed
rule without modification.
Comment: A few commenters asked for clarification about how to
determine whether a group policy should be treated as large group or
small group coverage for purposes of applying the PHS Act requirements
when employer group size fluctuates between the definition of large
employer and small employer.
Response: We intend to issue future guidance on counting employees
for determining market size of a group health plan.
B. Part 147--Health Insurance Reform Requirements for the Group and
Individual Health Insurance Markets
1. Fair Health Insurance Premiums (Sec. 147.102)
Section 147.102 of this final rule implements section 2701 the PHS
Act, which specifies that the only rating factors that may be used to
vary premium rates for health insurance coverage in the individual and
small group markets are (1) Family size; (2) geographic rating area;
(3) age (within a ratio of 3:1 for adults); and (4) tobacco use (within
a ratio of 1.5:1).\6\ \7\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\6\ All non-grandfathered health insurance coverage offered
through associations and through multiple employer welfare
arrangements (MEWAs) is subject to the premium rating rules
applicable to the appropriate market, as defined by PHS Act section
2791(e)(1), (3), and (5) (definitions of individual market, large
group market, and small group market, respectively).
\7\ The age, tobacco use, and geographic rating factors are
multiplicative. For example, the maximum variation for age and
tobacco use is 4.5:1 (3 times 1.5:1). The family rate calculation
could be additive or multiplicative, depending on whether a per-
member- or family-tier-rating methodology is used, as discussed
later in this preamble.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Comment: We received several comments requesting flexibility in the
application of section 2701. For example, some commenters suggested
that we allow states and issuers to phase in the premium rating rules,
specifically the 3:1 age rating factor. One commenter recommended
issuer flexibility to transition to the new per-member-rating
methodology in states without community rating. Further, some
commenters noted that small businesses in Massachusetts are permitted
to form
[[Page 13409]]
group health insurance purchasing cooperatives and receive premium
discounts based on other factors that, while permitted by state law,
were not explicitly included in the proposed rule.
Response: We do not have the legal authority to permit any rating
factors in the final rule other than those explicitly permitted by
section 2701 of the PHS Act. Further, we do not have the legal
authority to provide for a phase-in of certain rating provisions such
as the 3:1 age factor or the per-member-rating methodology.
a. Family Rating
In Sec. 147.102(c)(1), we proposed that issuers develop premiums
for family coverage by adding up the rate of each covered family
member.\8\ Under this proposal, the rates of no more than the three
oldest family members under age 21 would be taken into account in
computing the family premium. There would be no cap on the number of
family members age 21 and older whose per-member rates would be added
into the family premium. We solicited comment on the number of family
members that should be included in this rating cap, as well as the
appropriate age limit for the cap.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\8\ Under this approach, the issuer would charge the same per-
member premium for all family members of the same age and tobacco
use status. The issuer could not charge different rates for family
members of the same age and tobacco use status based on their
status, for example, as the policyholder, spouse, or dependent.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
We noted that rating based on specified family tiers, and other
family rating practices that fail to apply the age and tobacco use
factors proportionately to individual family members, would generally
be impermissible pursuant to PHS Act section 2701(a)(4), which requires
that any rating variation for age and tobacco use be apportioned to
each family member's premium. However, in Sec. 147.102(c)(2), we
proposed flexibility for community rated states that do not permit
rating based on age or tobacco use to require issuers to use a standard
family-tier methodology with corresponding multipliers. We solicited
comment on whether instead of permitting such flexibility, states with
pure community rating should also use the per-member approach that
would be used in states that allow rating for age and tobacco use.
We noted that health insurance issuers currently have flexibility
in determining how to set rates for family policies and in defining
which family members may be on the same policy, subject to federal and
state laws requiring coverage of certain individuals. We solicited
comment on whether to set standards governing the minimum categories of
family members that issuers must include in setting rates for family
policies or to defer to states and issuers to make this determination.
We also solicited comment on the types of individuals who are typically
included under family coverage, including types of covered individuals
who would not meet the classification of tax dependents under the Code.
Comment: Many commenters remarked on the proposed three-person
rating cap for family members under age 21. Several commenters
supported the cap, while some commenters expressed concern that it
would increase rates for individuals and smaller families. Other
commenters believed the cap would increase rates for larger families
and requested that no more than two children under age 21 be rated for
family coverage. Several commenters recommended clarifying that only
the three oldest ``dependent children'' under age 21 would be taken
into account in computing the family premium, so that policyholders and
spousal dependents under age 21 would not be counted toward the three-
person cap. Other commenters suggested raising the age limit for the
cap to age 26, to better align with the rules regarding extension of
dependent coverage under section 2714 of the PHS Act.
Response: The final rule maintains the cap at three persons, but
clarifies that the cap applies only to the rates of no more than the
three oldest ``covered children'' under age 21. This will mitigate
premium increases for larger families accustomed to family tier rating
structures and allow for more accurate rating of families with spouses
under the age of 21. We maintain age 21 as the age limit for the cap
given that the medical risk associated with individuals between age 21
and 26 is higher than the risk associated with individuals under the
age of 21. Further, this approach maintains consistency with our
approach to child and adult rates for purposes of applying the age
rating factor.
Comment: Many commenters supported the proposed per-member-rating
methodology and the flexibility for states with community rating to
require health insurance issuers to use a standard family-tier
methodology with corresponding multipliers. Some commenters suggested
that all states should have the option to use a family-tier structure,
while other commenters supported applying per-member rating uniformly
across all states, including those with community rating. A few
commenters requested clarification of whether there is a limit on the
number of family-tier categories permitted in community rated states.
Response: PHS Act section 2701(a)(4) compels per-member rating
because the age and tobacco use factors must be attributable to
individuals. Thus, only community rated states, which do not allow
rating based on age or tobacco use, are able to implement family-tier-
rating structures consistent with PHS Act section 2701(a)(4). Those
states may require all health insurance issuers in the individual and
small group markets to use a standard family-tier methodology with
corresponding multipliers and will have the discretion to set the
number of tiers in the family-tier structure. If a state has community
rating but does not adopt a uniform family-tier structure (with
corresponding multipliers), per-member rating will apply in that state.
Comment: Numerous commenters recommended that the final rule defer
to the states (and to issuers if permitted by state law) on the
categories of family members that must be included on a family policy,
noting that state law typically provides the basis for defining
familial status. Other commenters urged that HHS adopt a broad
definition of family coverage that accounts for all family
compositions, including opposite sex and same sex domestic partners;
biological, adoptive, step, foster, and grandchildren (if under the
care of a grandparent); children under guardianship arrangements; and
any other child who would be considered a tax dependent under the Code.
Response: The final rule does not specify the minimum categories of
family members that must be rated together on a family policy. We
recognize that state laws differ with respect to marriage, adoption,
and custody and believe that states are best positioned to make
decisions regarding family coverage practices. Accordingly, states have
the flexibility to require issuers to include specific types of
individuals on a family policy and nothing in these final rules
precludes this ability. We note that if an individual is not eligible
for family coverage, he or she will be able to purchase individual
coverage on a guaranteed availability basis.
b. Small Group Rating
In Sec. 147.102(c)(3), we proposed that issuers in the small group
market calculate rates for employee and dependent coverage on a per-
member basis, and calculate the group premium by totaling the premiums
attributable to each covered individual. States may require issuers to
base small group
[[Page 13410]]
premiums on an average amount for each employee in the group, provided
that the total group premium equals the premium that would be derived
through the per-member-rating approach. Furthermore, employers would
retain flexibility to decide how to allocate employer contributions to
health coverage.
Comments: Many commenters supported applying per-member rating in
the small group market, especially in the Small Business Health Options
Program (SHOP) where an ``employee choice'' model would make composite
rating difficult to administer. However, some commenters recommended
allowing composite rating in the small group market outside the SHOP,
and for ``employer choice'' coverage inside the SHOP where permitted,
to minimize disruption in current issuer rating practices. Other
comments raised concern that moving to per-member rating may increase
premiums for older workers.
Response: The final rule directs that issuers use the per-member-
rating methodology in the small group market. As discussed in the
November 26, 2012 proposed rule, per-member rating assures compliance
with the requirement that age and tobacco rating only be apportioned to
an individual family member's premium, enhances employee choice inside
the SHOP, and promotes the accuracy of the risk adjustment methodology.
Nothing in these final rules precludes a state from requiring issuers
to offer (or a small employer from electing to offer) premiums based on
average employee amounts where every employee in the group is charged
the same premium. We note that the age bands, as implemented by the
per-member-rating methodology, are only generally applicable to health
insurance coverage in the individual and small group markets and are
consistent with the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, 29
U.S.C. 621.
c. Geographic Rating
In Sec. 147.102(b), we proposed that each state establish rating
areas, which would be presumed adequate if they meet one of the
following options: one rating area for the entire state, or no more
than seven rating areas based on counties, three-digit zip codes (that
is, areas in which all zip codes share the same first three digits), or
metropolitan statistical areas (MSAs) and non-MSA geographic
divisions.\9\ We proposed that states would also be permitted to use
other actuarially justified geographic divisions, or a number of rating
areas greater than seven, with approval from HHS to ensure adequacy. In
the event that states do not exercise the option to establish rating
areas (or a state's rating areas were determined to be inadequate), we
proposed that the default would be a single rating area for the entire
state or one of the other proposed geographic standards as determined
by HHS in consultation with the state, local issuers, and other
interested stakeholders.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\9\ MSAs encompass at least one urban core with a population of
at least 50,000 people, plus adjacent territory that has a high
degree of social and economic integration with the core. MSAs are
always established along county boundaries, but may include counties
from more than one state. The 367 MSAs in the United States include
approximately one-third of the counties and 83 percent of the
population of the United States.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The November 26, 2012 proposed rule requested comment on various
aspects concerning the proposed geographic rating area standards,
namely comments concerning the use of other geographic divisions or
factors; the maximum number of rating areas within a state that would
be presumed adequate; whether states with existing rating areas would
have to make changes to conform to the proposed standards; whether to
establish minimum geographic size and population requirements; and the
appropriate schedules and procedures for states to modify their rating
areas in the future.
Comment: While some commenters supported the proposed rating area
standards, many expressed concern that HHS would not extend a
presumption of adequacy if a state established more than seven rating
areas. Commenters asserted that the threshold of seven rating areas may
not be high enough to reflect actuarially justified differences in
health care costs and utilization patterns, particularly in states with
large and diverse health care markets, and noted that issuers today use
more than seven rating areas in some states. These commenters
recommended that states have flexibility to establish rating areas that
reflect local market conditions and that minimize disruption. Others
commenters were concerned about discrimination against rural,
underserved, or high-cost populations.
Response: Following review of the comments submitted on this issue,
we have determined that it is appropriate to modify the standards in
Sec. 147.102(b) to provide states with additional flexibility to
establish rating areas under section 2701 of the PHS Act. The revised
standards recognize that in many cases, states established rating areas
after an open and transparent dialogue with stakeholders. Further, the
revised standards are intended to provide sufficient flexibility to
states to establish rating areas that are responsive to local market
conditions, while protecting consumers from potentially discriminatory
rating practices.
Section 147.102(b)(3) of this final rule provides that a state's
rating areas must be based on one the following geographic divisions:
Counties, three-digit zip codes, or MSAs and non-MSAs, and will be
presumed adequate if they meet either of the following conditions: (1)
As of January 1, 2013, the state had established by law, rule,
regulation, bulletin, or other executive action uniform geographic
rating areas for the entire state; or (2) After January 1, 2013, the
state establishes by law, rule, regulation, bulletin, or other
executive action for the entire state no more geographic rating areas
than the number of MSAs in the state plus one. Under these standards,
geographic rating areas may be noncontiguous, but the area encompassed
by a geographic rating area must be separate and distinct from areas
encompassed by other geographic rating areas. As mentioned, rating
areas must be based on counties, three-digit zip codes, or MSAs/non-
MSAs. While we proposed the possibility that HHS might approve rating
areas based on other existing geographic divisions, we have determined
that these are the only geographic boundaries that would be feasible
for purposes of implementing the premium tax credit under Code section
36B. We note that if a state had established geographic rating areas on
or before January 1, 2013 that did not follow these geographic
boundaries, the state would have an opportunity to adjust their
proposed rating areas before the default rating area is applied.
We recognize that a greater number of rating areas than the number
of MSAs in the state plus one may in some cases be actuarially
justified. Therefore, states have the option pursuant to Sec.
147.102(b)(4) of this final rule to seek approval from HHS of a greater
number of rating areas as long as the areas are based on counties,
three-digit zip codes, or MSAs and non-MSAs. We will review such state
proposals to ensure they are actuarially justified and non-
discriminatory as discussed below.
Comment: A few commenters requested that HHS specify the criteria
it will use to assess the adequacy of state rating area proposals.
Response: As mentioned above, states may seek approval from HHS of
a number of geographic rating areas that is greater than the number of
MSAs in the state plus one, provided they are based on counties, three-
digit zip codes,
[[Page 13411]]
or MSAs/non-MSAs. HHS will review the state proposals pursuant to the
criteria described in Sec. 147.102(b)(5) of this final rule. We will
determine that a state's rating areas are adequate if they: (1) Are
actuarially justified; (2) are not unfairly discriminatory; (3) reflect
significant differences in health care unit costs by rating area; (4)
lead to stability in rates over time; (5) apply uniformly to all health
insurance issuers in a market; and (6) are based on one of the
geographic boundaries described above. We believe these are the
appropriate criteria to ensure state rating areas are adequate and not
designed to isolate high-cost populations of the state.
Comment: One commenter requested clarification as to whether PHS
Act section 2701 prevents a state from setting limits on the
permissible variation in a rating area factor.
Response: Section 2701 of the PHS Act does not limit the amount by
which rates may vary based on geography. Therefore, states and issuers
may determine the appropriate variation for the geographic rating area
factor. We note, however, that a rating area factor should be
actuarially justified to ensure that individuals and employers are not
charged excessively high premiums that render meaningless the
guaranteed availability protections of section 2702 of the PHS Act.
Comment: A few commenters requested clarification of whether states
must apply geographic rating areas uniformly across the individual and
small group markets in a state. Other commenters asked whether rating
areas may vary by product, noting that provider contracting varies
geographically between Preferred Provider Organization (PPO) and Health
Maintenance Organization (HMO) plans, and also between broad and narrow
networks.
Response: PHS Act section 2701 does not prevent a state from
establishing different rating areas for the individual or small group
markets. However, to preserve the integrity of the single risk pool
requirement, rating areas must apply uniformly within each market and
may not vary by product. If a state merges its individual and small
group markets pursuant to section 1312(c) of the Affordable Care Act,
rating areas will apply uniformly to both the individual and small
group markets in the state.
Comment: Several commenters suggested that HHS should not establish
minimum geographic size and population standards for rating areas.
Commenters noted that geographic differences in health care costs are
based on factors such as price, provider agreements, utilization
patterns, and access to care and technology--not based on size or
population. By contrast, a few commenters argued minimum geographic
size and population requirements were necessary to ensure that rating
areas are not excessive in small or sparsely populated states.
Response: This final rule does not establish minimum geographic
size or population requirements. We believe the geographic standards
and criteria set forth in this final rule provide the appropriate basis
for ensuring that state rating areas are actuarially justified and non-
discriminatory.
Comment: A few commenters argued that states should have the
flexibility to align rating areas with service areas to prevent issuer
``cherry-picking'' of service areas. Commenters expressed concern that
if issuers are able to choose to write business in only the lower cost
areas within geographic rating areas, there could be reduced
competition and consumer access issues.
Response: While the final rule does not require that geographic
rating areas be aligned with service areas, we recommend that states
consider aligning both rating and service areas. As we noted in the
March 27, 2012 Federal Register final rule entitled ``Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act; Establishment of Exchange and
Qualified Health Plans; Exchange Standards for Employers'' (77 FR
18309), herein referred to as the Exchange final rule, Exchanges have
flexibility on several elements of the QHP certification process,
including the contracting model, so that Exchanges can appropriately
adjust to local market conditions and consumer needs. To the extent
issuers operate within such uniform service areas or operate statewide,
this policy would facilitate consumers' ability to compare health
insurance premiums, promoting competition within the market.
Furthermore, aligning rating areas with QHP service areas in the
Exchange may simplify consumer understanding and Exchange
administration of eligibility determinations for premium tax credits,
which may be complex if QHP service areas are highly individualized.
Comment: Many commenters expressed concern that applying a single
statewide rating area as the default standard would not be appropriate
in many states. Commenters suggested various alternatives, such as
defaulting to county, three-digit zip code, or MSA boundaries;
defaulting to existing state or issuer rating areas; or defaulting to
the rating areas of the state's EHB base benchmark plan.
Response: Although the November 26, 2012 proposed rule suggested
flexibility in applying either a single statewide rating area or
another geographic standard as the default, in response to comments, we
are modifying Sec. 147.102(b)(2) to specify that if a state does not
establish rating areas (or does not provide information to CMS about
such rating areas in accordance with the state reporting requirements
discussed in section II.B.2. of the preamble), or a state's rating
areas are determined to be inadequate, the default will be one rating
area for each MSA in the state and one rating area for all other non-
MSA portions of the state, as defined by the Office of Management and
Budget (https://www.census.gov/population/metro/data/def.html). We
believe MSA/non-MSA designations will sufficiently reflect actuarially
justified differences in health care unit costs by geography and ensure
rating areas are established timely, providing certainty to issuers. We
encourage states to establish rating areas as soon as possible but not
later than 30 days following publication of this final rule.
Comment: With respect to the process for updating state-established
rating areas, several commenters suggested that states have flexibility
to periodically review and modify their geographic rating areas
(including default rating areas) as necessary or appropriate. Some
commenters suggested that rating areas be reviewed on a regular basis,
such as annually or biannually, while other commenters suggested less
frequent reviews, subject to the discretion of the states. Several
commenters noted that insurance products and rates are often developed
a year or more in advance and emphasized that issuers must be given
adequate time to incorporate any changes to rating areas into their
pricing.
Response: As discussed in section II.B.2. of the preamble, Sec.
147.103 of this final rule provides for the Secretary to issue guidance
that will establish a process and timeline for states to update their
rating areas (including default rating areas). HHS anticipates this
process will provide sufficient notice to health insurance issuers in
advance of state rate filing deadlines.
d. Age Rating
In 147.102(a)(1)(iii), we proposed that the premium rate charged by
a health insurance issuer for non-grandfathered health insurance
coverage in the individual or small group market may vary by age,
except that such rate may not vary by more than 3:1 for adults, as set
forth by the statute. We proposed to
[[Page 13412]]
define adults as individuals age 21 and older for purposes of this
provision. For individuals under age 21, we proposed that rates must be
actuarially justified based on a standard population. Further, we
proposed that an enrollee's age for rating purposes be determined at
the time of policy issuance and renewal and requested comment on
whether other measurement points, such as birthdays, were appropriate.
After consulting with the NAIC, we proposed the following standard
age bands for use in all states and markets subject to section 2701 of
the PHS Act:
Children: A single age band for children ages 0 through
20.
Adults: One-year age bands for adults ages 21 through 63.
Older adults: A single age band for adults ages 64 and
older.
We solicited comment on the proposed age bands, including comment on
whether single or multiple age bands for children were appropriate.
Finally, we proposed that health insurance issuers in a state and
market use a uniform age rating curve established by the state,
specifying the relative distribution of rates across all age bands. We
proposed an HHS standard default age curve that would apply in both the
individual and small group markets in states that do not exercise the
option to establish their own age curve. We requested comment on the
default age rating curve, including comment on the premium impact of
the transition from the child age curve to the adult age curve.
Comment: Many commenters supported applying the maximum 3:1 age
rating factor to adults defined as individuals age 21 and older. Some
commenters, however, recommended defining the adult age as beginning at
age 19 to better align with the definition of ``pediatric services'' in
the November 26, 2012 Federal Register proposed rule entitled ``Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act; Standards Related to Essential
Health Benefits, Actuarial Value, and Accreditation'' (77 FR 70644),
herein referred to as the EHB/AV/Accreditation proposed rule. Other
commenters recommended that adult rating begin at age 26, consistent
with the rules regarding dependent coverage of children to age 26 under
section 2714 of the PHS Act.\10\ Several commenters suggested we allow
issuers to develop rates for individuals age 65 and older outside of
the 3:1 age rating factor due to the higher health care costs
associated with this population.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\10\ 45 CFR 147.120.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Response: We are finalizing the proposed requirement that the
maximum 3:1 ratio for age rating applies to adults age 21 and older.
PHS Act section 2701(a)(1)(A)(iii) provides that age rating with
respect to adults must be consistent with section 2707(c) relating to
child-only plans available to individuals up to age 21. Accordingly,
the 3:1 age rating factor applies to all individuals age 21 and older,
including those who may be eligible for Medicare based on age. The 3:1
age factor ratio does not apply to individuals under age 21.
Comment: Nearly all commenters expressed support for the proposal
to establish single-year age bands for adults age 21 through 63.
However, some commenters suggested that multiple age bands for children
were necessary to reflect the fact that claims costs for children vary
by age, particularly children age 0 to 1, who have much higher health
care costs than older children.
Response: The final rule maintains a single age band for children
to keep rates level between ages 0 through 1 and ages 2 through 20.
This will avoid higher premiums for newborns and provide for easier
price comparisons between different plans. A single band for children
also simplifies and promotes efficiency of the risk adjustment
methodology.
Comment: Most commenters supported determining an enrollee's age
for rating purposes once a year at the time of policy issuance or
renewal. Commenters stated that such annual determination is generally
consistent with current issuer rating practices, helps enrollees to
understand and plan for rate increases, and promotes administrative
efficiency for issuers. In instances where a family member is added to
a family policy or an employee is added to a group health plan outside
of policy issuance or renewal, a few commenters requested issuer
flexibility to apply an age rating factor based on the new enrollee's
age at the time of enrollment.
Response: Based on the comments received, we are finalizing the
provision that for rating purposes an enrollee's age be determined at
the time of policy issuance or renewal. We clarify that for individuals
who are added to the plan or coverage other than on the date of policy
issuance or renewal, the enrollee's age may be determined as of the
date such individuals are added or enrolled in the coverage.
Comment: A few commenters requested state flexibility to use
different age-band structures, such as five-year bands in the small
group market. One commenter specifically recommended that states
operating their own risk adjustment programs should have flexibility to
establish age bands and to determine whether they must be standardized
across a market. Other commenters urged HHS to apply the same age-band
structure to both the individual and small group markets to align more
closely with per-member rating, minimize rate disruption when
individuals move between the two markets, and facilitate states'
ability to merge the individual and small group markets into a single
risk pool if they determine it appropriate.
Response: The uniform age bands in this final rule apply in all
states and markets subject to section 2701 of the PHS Act: the
individual and small group markets in all states, and the large group
market in states that, beginning in 2017, permit health insurance
issuers in the large group market to offer QHPs in such market through
an Exchange. Applying age bands consistently nationwide simplifies
identification of the second lowest cost silver plan for calculation of
the premium tax credit under Code section 36B. As indicated below,
states are welcome to establish their own age rating curve provided the
curve incorporates the uniform age bands. A state may establish
separate age curves for the individual and small group markets.
Comment: With respect to HHS's proposed default standard age curve,
several commenters recommended smoothing the age curve to avoid a
significant premium differential between the child age curve at age 20
and the adult age curve at age 21, while another commenter recommended
smoothing the age curve for older adults. One commenter suggested that
issuers should have flexibility to set their own age curves. Another
commenter supported the default age rating curve as proposed,
suggesting that it will enhance the transparency, predictability, and
accuracy of risk adjustment. A few commenters urged that HHS not make
frequent changes to the default age curve and that issuers be provided
sufficient time to respond to any updates.
Response: As we stated in the November 26, 2012 proposed rule, the
0.635 age rating factor for children age 0 through 20 is supported by
HHS's analysis of data available through HealthCare.gov and an
examination of the large group insurance market. Although the shift
from the child age curve to the adult age curve could result in a
premium differential that is not reflected in current issuer rating
practices, we do not believe the differential will result in a
significant financial burden on consumers, given
[[Page 13413]]
the low premiums for individuals in these age groups, as well as the
relative premium stability from ages 21 through 30.
HHS will establish in guidance a default age rating curve that will
apply in both the individual and small group markets in states that do
not exercise the option to establish their own age curve (or that do
not provide information to CMS about their age curve in accordance with
the state reporting requirements discussed in section II.B.2. of the
preamble). We intend to adopt in guidance the default age curve as
proposed in the November 26, 2012 proposed rule for states that allow a
maximum 3:1 ratio for age rating. For states that adopt narrower ratios
for age rating, the default age curve established by HHS would take
into account the permissible rating variation for age under state law.
We intend to revise the default age curve periodically, but no more
frequently than annually, to reflect market patterns in the individual
and small group markets following implementation of the 2014 market
reforms.
Comment: One commenter requested clarification of whether issuers
may establish their own, actuarially justified child age factor based
on a standard population, rather than using the 0.635 child age factor
in the HHS default standard age curve.
Response: Health insurance issuers within a market and state must
use the uniform age rating curve established by each state or the HHS
default standard age curve in instances where a state does not
establish a uniform age curve, specifying the relative distribution of
rates for all age bands, including the child age band. As discussed in
the November 26, 2012 proposed rule, the age factor associated with the
child age band must be actuarially justified based on a standard
population.
Comment: A few commenters asked HHS to clarify how age rating
applies to child-only plans. For example, some commenters requested
clarification that the child age band and age curve apply only to
dependent children on family policies, not to children enrolled in
child-only plans.
Response: The child age band and child age curve apply to child-
only plans in the same manner that they apply to all other individual
and small group market coverage. Thus, for example, a 10-year-old child
would be charged the same rate based on age whether the child was a
dependent on a family policy or enrolled in a child-only plan.
e. Tobacco Rating
In Sec. 147.102(a)(1)(iv), we proposed that the premium rate
charged by a health insurance issuer for non-grandfathered health
insurance coverage offered in the individual or small group market may
vary for tobacco use, except that such rate may not vary by more than
1.5:1, as set forth by the statute. States or issuers would have
flexibility within these limits to determine the appropriate tobacco
rating factor for different age groups (for example, younger enrollees
could be charged a lower tobacco use factor than older enrollees
provided the tobacco use factor does not exceed 1.5:1 for any age
group).
Further, we proposed to coordinate application of the tobacco
rating rules of PHS Act section 2701 with the nondiscrimination and
wellness program rules of PHS Act section 2705. Specifically, we
proposed that a health insurance issuer in the small group market would
be required to offer a tobacco user the opportunity to avoid paying the
full amount of the tobacco rating factor permitted under PHS Act
section 2701 if he or she participates in a wellness program meeting
the standards of section 2705 of the PHS Act and its implementing
regulations.\11\ We solicited comment on this proposal and on whether
and how the same wellness incentives promoting tobacco cessation could
apply in the individual market.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\11\ The Departments of HHS, Labor, and the Treasury published
proposed rules under PHS Act section 2705 entitled ``Incentives for
Nondiscriminatory Wellness Programs in Group Health Plans'' in the
November 26, 2012 Federal Register (77 FR 70620). The rules proposed
that the additional increase in the size of the reward for wellness
programs designed to prevent or reduce tobacco use would not be
limited to the small group market, to provide consistency across
markets and to provide large group, self-insured, and grandfathered
employment-based plans the same additional flexibility to promote
tobacco-free workforces as small, insured non-grandfathered health
plans.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
We proposed that the definition of ``tobacco use'' for purposes of
section 2701 be consistent with the approach taken with respect to
health-contingent wellness programs designed to prevent or reduce
tobacco use under section 2705. We noted that a common definition of
``tobacco use'' does not currently exist among the states, resulting in
wide variation in how health insurance issuers define and assess
tobacco use in insurance applications. We solicited comment on how to
define ``tobacco use'' for purposes of both section 2701 and section
2705 and suggested several possible approaches, such as reliance on
self-reporting, a defined amount of tobacco use within a specified
look-back period, regular tobacco use, or tobacco use of sufficient
frequency so as to be addicted to nicotine. We also solicited comment
on use of the single streamlined application under 45 CFR 155.405 to
collect information on tobacco use.
Comments: Numerous commenters supported establishing a clear
definition and standard application questions to determine tobacco use.
Commenters stated that in defining tobacco use, it would be important
for HHS to specify the types of tobacco products that would be
included, establish a minimum frequency of usage, define the
appropriate look-back period, and clarify permissible assessment
methods. For example, some commenters recommended a broad definition
that includes any form of tobacco use in the past 12 months, while
other commenters suggested considering only the most common types of
tobacco products used within a 30-day look-back period. Additionally,
some commenters recommended relying on self-reporting, while other
commenters sought flexibility for issuers to use additional methods to
verify accuracy and prevent fraud, such as cotinine testing,
attestations, health assessments, and physician affidavits. Several
commenters urged HHS to consult with experts and use planned consumer
testing of the single streamlined application to develop precise and
narrow language and questions about tobacco use. A few commenters
representing tribal organizations suggested that a uniform definition
of tobacco use include an express exemption for religious and
ceremonial uses. One commenter suggested that states have flexibility
to determine what constitutes tobacco use.
Response: The National Health Interview Survey, administered by the
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, asks survey respondents if
they use tobacco products ``every day, some days, or not at all?'' \12\
In this final rule, we establish a definition of ``tobacco use'' that
is based on the National Health Interview Survey, while setting forth
the meaning of ``some days'' to ensure clarity for issuers and
consumers. Specifically, for purposes of this final rule, we define
``tobacco use'' as use of tobacco on average of four or more times per
week within no longer than the past six months. Further,
[[Page 13414]]
tobacco use must be defined in terms of when a tobacco product was last
used. Tobacco includes all tobacco products. However, religious or
ceremonial uses of tobacco (for example, by American Indians and Alaska
Natives) are specifically exempt under this final rule. This approach
establishes a minimum standard to assure consistency in the individual
and small group health insurance markets and simplifies administration
of the tobacco rating factor. For example, an individual could be asked
the following two questions about tobacco use: (1) Within the past six
months, have you used tobacco regularly (four or more times per week on
average excluding religious or ceremonial uses)? (2) If yes, when was
the last time you used tobacco regularly? Issuers will have flexibility
within the federal definition and as permitted by applicable state law
to shorten the applicable period of time from the last regular use of
tobacco. Because ``four or more'' as well as ``six months'' are federal
thresholds, states have the ability to define both the frequency of use
per week and the look-back period in ways that are more consumer
protective (that is, a frequency of more than four times per week and a
look-back period of less than six months). This definition is
transitional. We intend to consult with experts, use experience with
the above definition, and study the interaction effects with the
permanent risk adjustment program to develop a more evidenced-based
definition of tobacco use through future rulemaking or guidance. We
also intend to conduct consumer testing of language and questions about
tobacco use.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\12\ Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Cigarette
Smoking Among Adults--United States, 1992, and Changes in the
Definition of Current Cigarette Smoking, MMWR Weekly 43(19); 342-
346, May 20, 1994.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Comment: Several commenters requested additional consequences for
individuals who fail to disclose tobacco use during the application
process, such as allowing issuers to collect additional premiums or
other penalties, to rescind the policy in the case of intentional
misrepresentation or fraud, and to determine the individual to be
ineligible for certain enrollment periods. In addition, commenters
suggested there should be clear and prominent warnings to applicants
about the consequences of failing to answer questions about tobacco use
truthfully.
Response: If an enrollee is found to have reported false or
incorrect information about their tobacco use, the issuer may
retroactively apply the appropriate tobacco use rating factor to the
enrollee's premium as if the correct information had been accurately
reported from the beginning of the plan year. However, an issuer must
not rescind the coverage on this basis. Tobacco use is not a material
fact for which an issuer may rescind coverage if there is a
misrepresentation because these regulations already provide the remedy
of recouping the tobacco premium surcharge that should have been paid
since the beginning of the plan or policy year. Accordingly, it is the
view of the Department of HHS, Labor, and the Treasury (which share
interpretative jurisdiction over section 2712 of the PHS Act) that this
remedy of recoupment renders any misrepresentation with regard to
tobacco use no longer a ``material'' fact for purposes of rescission
under PHS Act section 2712 and its implementing regulations.\13\
Additionally, under guaranteed availability of coverage rules, an
issuer may not deny an enrollee or their covered dependents an
enrollment period described in this final rule because an enrollee
provided false or incorrect information about their tobacco use.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\13\ 26 CFR 54.9815-2712T, 29 CFR 2590.715-2712, and 45 CFR
147.128.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Comments: Several commenters remarked on the proposed rules
concerning tobacco rating and wellness programs in the small group
market. Some commenters objected to the rules, arguing that
participation in a tobacco cessation program does not necessarily
result in an actual reduction in the specific financial risk associated
with tobacco use, and that issuers need to be able to rate for the
higher expected claims costs of tobacco users. Several other commenters
supported the proposed link between tobacco rating and wellness
programs, noting that tobacco cessation programs are more effective in
addressing tobacco use than a premium surcharge, and suggesting that
the rules should be expanded to include participation in a broader
array of tobacco cessation programs offered outside of one's workplace,
including in the individual market.
Response: We finalize our proposal that a health insurance issuer
in the small group market may impose the tobacco rating factor under
section 2701 only in connection with a wellness program meeting the
requirements under section 2705, allowing a tobacco user the
opportunity to avoid paying the full amount of the tobacco rating
factor by participating in a wellness program meeting the standards of
section 2705(j) and its implementing regulations. We note that wellness
rules already apply in the group market. Additionally, the use of
tobacco cessation programs may help alleviate underreporting of tobacco
use. Pursuant to section 2701(a)(5) of the PHS Act, these rules will
apply to coverage offered in the large group market in a state that,
beginning in 2017, allows health insurance issuers to offer QHPs in
such market through an Exchange.
Comment: Some commenters supported the proposal allowing issuers to
vary tobacco rating by age. Other commenters suggested that tobacco
rating should apply only with respect to individuals age 18 and older,
the age at which people can begin to legally use tobacco products in
most states. Other commenters expressed concern that tobacco rating
would disproportionally impact low-income populations and recommended
that HHS prohibit tobacco rating altogether.
Response: PHS Act section 2701 permits rating for tobacco use
within a ratio of 1.5:1. While we do not have authority to prohibit the
imposition of the 1.5:1 tobacco rating factor, we agree that tobacco
rating should be limited to legal use of tobacco products under federal
and state law, which generally is limited to those 18 years and older.
We clarify our interpretation in the final rule. Consistent with these
rules and subject to applicable state law, issuers will have the
flexibility to vary tobacco rating by age, provided the tobacco use
factor does not exceed 1.5:1 for any age band.
Comment: Several commenters sought clarification that states may
require a narrower ratio than 1.5:1 for tobacco use or prohibit tobacco
rating altogether.
Response: Pursuant to section 2724(a)(1) of the PHS Act, a state
law with respect to health insurance issuers is not preempted unless it
prevents the application of a federal requirement. Section 2701
provides that the premium rate charged by a health insurance issuer in
the individual or small group market cannot vary for tobacco use by
more than 1.5:1. Therefore, a state law that prescribes a narrower
ratio (for example, 1.25:1) or prohibits varying rates for tobacco use
altogether would not be preempted, since such law would not prevent the
application of section 2701. Because states may generally impose
requirements on health insurance issuers that are more consumer
protective than those imposed by federal law, the language in proposed
Sec. 147.102(a)(1)(iv) providing that states may use narrower tobacco
rating factors is unnecessary, and we remove it from the final rule.
(We make parallel revisions in proposed Sec. 147.102(a)(1)(iii) with
respect to state laws that use narrower age rating factors).
2. State Reporting (Sec. 147.103)
In various provisions throughout proposed Sec. 147.102, we
proposed that
[[Page 13415]]
no later than 30 days after publication of the final rule, states
submit certain rating information to CMS generally to support the
accuracy of the risk adjustment methodology. This included information
about the following, as applicable:
The use of a narrower age rating ratio than 3:1 for adults
age 21 and older.
The use of a narrower tobacco rating ratio than 1.5:1 for
individuals who use tobacco.
State-established rating areas.
State-established age rating curves.
In states with community rating, the use of uniform family
tiers and corresponding multipliers.
A requirement that premiums be based on average enrollee
amounts in the small group market.
In addition, in Sec. 156.80(c), we proposed that a state inform
CMS of its decision to merge the individual and small group markets in
a state into a single risk pool.
We received no comments about the proposed reporting process.
Accordingly, we are finalizing the state reporting process as proposed.
However, for organization and clarity, we are consolidating these
reporting requirements in a new Sec. 147.103 of this final rule.
Section 147.103(a) provides that for the 2014 plan or policy year,
states will submit information no later than 30 days following
publication of the final rule, in a form and manner specified by the
Secretary. Section 147.103(b) provides for the Secretary to issue
future guidance that would establish a process and timeline for states
to submit information for plan or policy years after 2014 (or for
updating a state standard that applies in 2014). As described in Sec.
156.80(c), states will follow the same process with respect to a state
decision to merge the individual and small group markets in a state
into a single risk pool.
3. Guaranteed Availability of Coverage (Sec. 147.104)
In Sec. 147.104, we proposed that a health insurance issuer
offering health insurance coverage in the individual or group market in
a state must offer to any individual or employer in the state all of
the issuer's products that are approved for sale in the applicable
market, and accept any individual or employer that applies for those
products.\14\ Consistent with other consumer protection rules under the
Affordable Care Act, we proposed that this requirement include non-
grandfathered closed blocks of business and solicited comment on our
proposal.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\14\ Other federal laws may restrict the health insurance
coverage products available to certain individuals. For example,
individuals must meet certain requirements related to residency,
citizenship/immigration status, and non-incarceration in order to
buy QHPs through an Exchange (45 CFR 155.305(a)).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
We also proposed that issuers establish enrollment periods during
which they would allow individuals and employers to purchase health
insurance coverage. We proposed to align the initial and annual open
enrollment periods outside the Exchanges with those inside the
Exchanges. Specifically, we proposed a continuous open enrollment
period in the group market and a fixed open enrollment period in the
individual market based on a calendar policy year, consistent with the
Exchange and SHOP standards outlined in 45 CFR 155.410 and 155.725.
Effective dates of coverage would also follow those in the Exchange and
SHOP. We solicited comment on how to address the open enrollment needs
of individual market enrollees whose coverage renews on a non-calendar
year basis.
We proposed that issuers in the individual and group markets
establish special enrollment periods for individuals and plan
participants and beneficiaries to enroll in coverage outside of the
annual open enrollment period as a result of qualifying events
triggering eligibility for COBRA continuation coverage under section
603 of ERISA.\15\ These special enrollment periods are in addition to
those in section 2704(f) of the PHS Act and other federal law.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\15\ For employees, COBRA events include a loss of coverage due
to voluntary or involuntary termination of employment for reasons
other than gross misconduct and reduction in the number of hours of
employment. For spouses of covered employees, these events include a
loss of coverage due to reasons that would make the employee
eligible for COBRA, the employee's becoming entitled to Medicare,
divorce or legal separation of the covered employee, and death of
the covered employee. For children of covered employees, these
events include a loss of coverage due to reasons that would make the
employee eligible for COBRA, the employee's becoming entitled to
Medicare, divorce or legal separation of the covered employee, death
of the covered employee, and loss of dependent child status under
plan rules.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
We proposed that a participant, beneficiary, or enrollee would have
30 calendar days from the date of a qualifying event (generally
consistent with the HIPAA standard) to request special enrollment, but
invited comment on whether to establish a longer election period, such
as 60 calendar days (generally consistent with the Exchange standard).
We proposed special enrollment period effective dates that followed the
effective dates of coverage for QHP special enrollment periods in Sec.
155.420(b). We noted that a notice of special enrollment rights is
currently required to be provided to group health plan participants and
beneficiaries under HIPAA and solicited comment on whether issuers in
the individual market should provide a similar notice to individual
market enrollees.
Additionally, we proposed rules governing the circumstances under
which issuers are permitted to deny coverage to individuals and
employers. These rules would allow issuers to deny coverage to an
employer whose eligible individuals do not live, work, or reside in the
service area of a network plan (or to an individual who does not live
or reside in the service area of a network plan) and in certain
situations involving limited network capacity and limited financial
capacity.
We also proposed that issuers in the small group market would be
permitted to require small employers to satisfy minimum contribution or
group participation requirements, to the extent allowed by state law
or, in the case of a QHP offered in the SHOP, as permitted by Sec.
156.285(c), and to decline to offer coverage if these standards were
not met. This policy was intended to prevent adverse selection.
Specifically, we were concerned that a small employer could take
advantage of the continuous open enrollment opportunity under the
proposed rule to wait to purchase a group policy.
We also addressed the issue of whether there could be an exception
from the guaranteed availability requirements allowing coverage sold
through bona fide associations to be limited to members of the
association. We contrasted the existing provisions in section 2703(b)
(which retained a guaranteed renewability exception permitting coverage
to be limited to members of a bona fide association) with the
provisions in section 2702 (where the exception had not been included
in the statute), and proposed that there was no basis for an exception
from the guaranteed availability requirement for coverage sold through
bona fide associations. We invited comment, however, on whether and how
a transition or exception process for bona fide association coverage
could be structured to minimize disruption.
To ensure consistency in the marketing of health plans inside and
outside of the Exchange and to minimize adverse selection, we proposed
to extend to the entire health insurance market the Exchange marketing
standard applicable to QHPs under Sec. 156.225. This standard requires
that an issuer comply with state marking standards and not employ
[[Page 13416]]
marketing practices or benefit designs that will have the effect of
discouraging the enrollment of individuals with significant health
needs in health insurance coverage.
Finally, we solicited comment about how to prevent potential gaming
of guaranteed availability rights and about strategies to minimize the
risk of adverse selection.
Comment: Several commenters asked that the term ``offer'' in
section 2702 be interpreted to mean ``actively marketed,'' so that
issuers would not be required to reopen closed blocks of business.
Commenters expressed concern about having to develop enrollment
materials for closed products. In addition, some commenters were
concerned that this requirement would make it difficult for issuers to
bring existing products into compliance with the Affordable Care Act in
a manner that minimizes consumer confusion, and ultimately prompt some
issuers to terminate closed products. Some commenters argued that the
requirement is not necessary because starting in 2014, individuals will
have choices beyond closed blocks, alleviating many of the concerns
about closed blocks in today's market. Other commenters requested
flexibility for states to determine the best policy for addressing
closed blocks.
Response: Section 2702 provides that each health insurance issuer
that offers health insurance coverage in the group or individual market
in a state must accept every employer or individual in the state that
applies for such coverage. We have interpreted the term ``offer'' as
used throughout the title XXVII requirements of the PHS Act as added by
the Affordable Care Act (which apply to ``a health insurance issuer
offering health insurance coverage'') to refer to an issuer offering
both new as well as existing coverage. Accordingly, this final rule
does not interpret the term ``offer'' in section 2702 to mean
``actively marketing.'' We note that while this provision requires an
issuer to accept any individual or employer that applies for coverage,
it does not require closed blocks to be actively marketed. Furthermore,
we clarify that only non-grandfathered plans are subject to guaranteed
availability.
Comment: Several commenters remarked on the application of the
guaranteed availability requirements to coverage sold through bona fide
associations.
Response: We refer readers to section II.F.2. of the preamble for
discussion of this issue.
Comment: We received a few comments about the proposal that issuers
would be allowed to decline to offer coverage to small employers for
failure to satisfy minimum contribution or group participation
requirements under state law or the SHOP standards. Several commenters
expressed support for the policy and recommended extending it to the
large group market. One commenter emphasized that minimum participation
and contribution standards must be reasonable and not burdensome to the
point that small employers are discouraged from offering coverage.
Response: Upon further consideration of this issue, we have
determined that small employers cannot be denied guaranteed
availability of coverage for failure to satisfy minimum participation
or contribution requirements. As in the case of the bona fide
association exception discussed above, while Congress left in place an
exception for failure to meet contribution or participation
requirements under the guaranteed renewability requirement in section
2703(b), it provided no such exception from the guaranteed availability
requirement in section 2702. To the contrary, language in the
guaranteed availability provision for group health plans that was in
place before the Affordable Care Act was not included in section 2702.
Accordingly, the proposed approach would conflict with the guaranteed
availability provisions in section 2702 of the PHS Act. Moreover,
permitting issuers to deny coverage altogether to a small employer with
between 50 and 100 employees based on a failure to meet minimum
participation or contribution requirements could subject such employer
to a shared responsibility payment under section 4980H of the Code for
a failure to offer coverage to its employees.
While section 2702 contains no exception to guaranteed availability
based on a failure to meet contribution or minimum participation
requirements, section 2702(b)(1) permits an issuer to limit enrollment
in coverage to open and special enrollment periods. Under our authority
in section 2702(b)(3) to define ``open enrollment periods,'' we are
providing in this final rule that, in the case of a small employer that
fails to meet contribution or minimum participation requirements, an
issuer may limit its offering of coverage to an annual open enrollment
period, which we set forth in this final rule as the period beginning
November 15 and extending through December 15 of each year. As such,
the group market will have continuous open enrollment, except for small
employers that fail to meet contribution or minimum participation
requirements, for which the enrollment period may be limited to the
annual enrollment period described above, from November 15 through
December 15. This approach addresses concerns about adverse selection
in a manner that is consistent with the statutory provisions. We do not
extend this provision to the large group market because large employers
generally do not present the same adverse selection risk as small
employers.
Comment: Several commenters voiced concerns about the potential for
individuals with histories of non-payment to game guaranteed
availability. Some commenters suggested that we take action to both
prevent individuals with histories of non-payment from taking advantage
of guaranteed availability and to prevent individuals from dropping in
and out of coverage based on medical need. Other commenters, including
the NAIC, recommended that states have the flexibility to develop an
environment that will discourage adverse selection and suggested that
there are a number of tools available to states to limit adverse
selection. Some of the tools identified by commenters included: (1)
Allowing issuers to require pre-payment of premiums each month; (2)
allowing issuers to require payment of all outstanding premiums before
enrollees can re-enroll in coverage after termination due to non-
payment of premiums; (3) allowing late enrollment penalties or
surcharges (similar to those in Medicare Parts B and D); (4) allowing
issuers to establish waiting periods or delayed effective dates of
coverage; (5) allowing issuers to offset claims payments by the amount
of any owed premiums; (6) allowing issuers to prohibit individuals who
have canceled coverage or failed to renew from enrolling until the
second open enrollment period after their coverage ceased (unless they
replace coverage with other creditable coverage); (7) restricting
product availability (for example, to a catastrophic, bronze, or silver
level plan) outside of enrollment periods to prevent high-risk
individuals from enrolling in more generous coverage when medical needs
arise; and (8) allowing individuals to move up one metal level each
year through the Exchange shopping portal.
Response: We appreciate the various strategies suggested by
commenters and agree that states have flexibility to implement policies
to address adverse selection. We encourage states to consider
approaches to discourage adverse selection while ensuring consumers'
guaranteed availability rights are protected since state policies
[[Page 13417]]
that limit guaranteed availability are preempted by this law. We intend
to address permissible strategies to limit adverse selection in future
guidance.
Comment: Several commenters suggested that the language in proposed
Sec. 147.104(e), which prohibits marketing practices or benefit
designs that will have the effect of discouraging the enrollment of
individuals with significant health needs in health insurance coverage,
be broadened to apply to all forms of discrimination prohibited by the
March 27, 2012 Exchange final rule and section 1557 of the Affordable
Care Act, such as discrimination based on age, disability, race,
ethnicity, gender, and sexual orientation, not just discrimination
against individuals with significant or high cost health care needs.
One commenter urged HHS to provide guidance about marketing practices
and benefit designs that would be considered discriminatory under this
standard. Another commenter asked HHS to remind states of their
responsibility to monitor issuer marketing practices.
Response: As noted in the November 26, 2012 proposed rule,
discriminatory marketing practices or benefit designs represent a
failure by issuers to comply with the guaranteed availability
requirements. In response to comments, we revise Sec. 147.104(e) of
this final rule to make clear that a health insurance issuer and its
officials, employees, agents and representatives must not employ
marketing practices or benefit designs that will have the effect of
discouraging the enrollment of individuals in health insurance coverage
based on these factors. This standard will ensure consistency with the
prohibition on discrimination with respect to EHB in Sec. 156.125, the
non-discrimination standards applicable to QHPs under Sec. 156.200(e),
and the marketing standards in Sec. 156.225.
Comment: Numerous commenters expressed support for aligning open
enrollment periods inside and outside of the Exchange to promote
consistency between markets and minimize the potential for adverse
selection. However, some commenters were concerned that establishing
open enrollment periods and effective dates of coverage in the
individual market based on a calendar policy year would not align with
many individual policies, which are currently offered on a non-
calendar-year basis. Commenters suggested various approaches to
resolving the transition, such as providing to individuals whose
coverage renews mid-2014 a one-time special enrollment period to
purchase coverage that complies with 2014 market reform provisions;
requiring individuals whose coverage begins on a date other than
January 1 to re-enroll during the next open enrollment period; and
allowing a rating adjustment for individual health insurance policies
covering less than a full year to reflect that fact that enrollees will
have less than 12 months to reach the annual deductible. Other
commenters recommended that states have flexibility to set their open
enrollment periods and effective dates.
Response: We maintain the proposed open enrollment periods in Sec.
147.104(b)(1) of this final rule. We believe that consistent open
enrollment periods will help minimize adverse selection between the
Exchanges and the outside market, reduce consumer confusion, and allow
issuer marketing to be focused on a single enrollment campaign. Rolling
open enrollment periods with individual-specific dates, by contrast,
would add complexity for families and increase risk selection. We agree
with commenters that a one-time open enrollment period will allow
individuals with non-calendar year plans to transition to a calendar-
year plan upon their renewal date in 2014 and provide for such
enrollment opportunity as discussed below. States may wish to consider
other strategies to ease the transition, such as directing issuers to
pro-rate premiums for policies covering less than a full year, among
other transitional measures.
Comment: One commenter noted that his state currently allows
individuals to purchase individual health insurance coverage on a
guarantee-issue basis at any time during the year and requested
clarification as to whether state standards would be preempted by the
federal standards. Another commenter urged HHS to ensure that issuers
apply consistent rules when offering coverage outside of open
enrollment. The commenter expressed concern that some issuers would
attempt to employ selective marketing practices designed to attract
low-risk individuals (for example, for enrollment in catastrophic
plans).
Response: Section 2724(a)(1) of the PHS Act provides that nothing
in part A or part C of title XXVII of the PHS Act should be construed
to preempt any state law that does not prevent the application of a
federal requirement. Therefore, these final rules do not preclude the
application of stronger consumer protections provided by state law
including, for example, open enrollment periods that allow individuals
to purchase coverage more frequently than the federal standards. We
note that if a health insurance issuer in the individual market allows
for enrollment outside of an open or special enrollment period, the
issuer must still comply with all of the individual market provisions
of the PHS Act, including the prohibition against pre-existing
condition exclusions and the prohibition against discrimination based
on health status. An issuer cannot selectively offer enrollment in a
plan to individuals outside of open or special enrollment periods in a
manner that discriminates among individuals based on a pre-existing
medical condition or health status.
Comment: A number of commenters recommended providing additional
special enrollment periods to those described in proposed Sec.
147.104(b)(2), which incorporated the special enrollment periods for
COBRA qualifying events under section 603 of ERISA. Specifically,
several commenters recommended adding the guaranteed renewability
exceptions in Sec. 147.106(b) through (d), for which an enrollee
experiences a loss in coverage through no fault of their own, as
explicit triggers permitting special enrollment. A few commenters
recommended including special enrollment periods for pregnancy. One
commenter suggested providing a special enrollment period when
individuals permanently move into the issuer's service area, consistent
with the Exchange standard.
Response: We agree that it is appropriate to provide additional
enrollment opportunities for individuals experiencing certain
significant life changes, including several of those suggested by
commenters. To provide consistency across the individual market, we
believe these events should follow the special enrollment periods for
individuals seeking coverage through the Exchanges, as described in the
March 27, 2012 Exchange final rule. Because PHS Act section 2702
provides for ``special'' enrollment periods for ``qualifying events''
under ERISA, we are providing for additional ``limited'' open
enrollment periods in the individual market under our authority in PHS
Act section 2702(b)(3) to promulgate regulations with respect to open
enrollment periods. These limited open enrollment periods are
equivalent to special enrollment periods in terms of the limited scope
and nature of their applicability, and coverage obtained during such
limited open enrollment period will become effective consistent with
the dates described in Sec. 155.420(b).
Accordingly, in Sec. 147.104(b)(2) of this final rule, we cross-
reference the enrollment periods in Sec. 155.420(d) of the March 27,
2012 Exchange finale rule
[[Page 13418]]
(except as discussed below). Thus, under Sec. 147.104(b)(2), limited
open enrollment periods are triggered in the individual market by the
following events:
An individual and any dependents losing minimum essential
coverage.
An individual gaining or becoming a dependent through
marriage, birth, adoption, or placement for adoption.
An individual experiencing an error in enrollment.
An individual adequately demonstrating that the plan or
issuer substantially violated a material provision of the contract in
which he or she is enrolled.
An individual becoming newly eligible or newly ineligible
for advance payments of the premium tax credit or experiencing a change
in eligibility for cost-sharing reductions.
New coverage becoming available to an individual or
enrollee as a result of a permanent move.
Additionally, the final rule provides that an individual enrolled
in a non-calendar year plan is entitled to a limited open enrollment
period beginning 30 calendar days prior to the individual's policy
renewal date outside the open enrollment period for 2014. This one-time
limited open enrollment period will allow individuals with non-calendar
year policies in the individual market to transition to a calendar year
policy that complies with 2014 market reform requirements of the
Affordable Care Act.
We clarify that loss of minimum essential coverage triggering a
limited open enrollment period does not include failure to pay premiums
on a timely basis, including COBRA premiums prior to expiration of
COBRA coverage, or situations allowing for a rescission as specified in
45 CFR 147.128.
We also note that these limited open enrollment periods do not
include the events described in paragraphs (d)(3), (d)(8), or (d)(9) of
Sec. 155.420 of the March 27, 2012 Exchange final rule (concerning
citizenship status, Indians, and exceptional circumstances). The
enrollment periods for events described in paragraphs (d)(3) and (d)(8)
are related to specific Exchange eligibility criteria and therefore are
not appropriate for the broader market. The enrollment periods in
paragraph (d)(9) arising from exceptional circumstances are not similar
enough to those discussed in the November 26, 2012 proposed rule for
HHS to include in the final rule. We would initiate future rulemaking
if we were to establish a limited open enrollment period based on the
triggering event in paragraph (d)(9) of Sec. 155.420. With the
exception of these triggering events, limited open enrollment periods
are the same inside and outside the Exchange in the individual and the
small group market. We note that states may create special enrollment
periods or limited open enrollment periods in addition to those
established by this final rule.
Comment: Many commenters supported establishing 60-day special
enrollment periods, consistent with those in the Exchange, to reduce
consumer confusion, facilitate orderly enrollment, and ease the
administrative burden on states and issuers. One commenter recommended
30-day special enrollment periods, consistent with the HIPAA standard.
A few commenters recommended a 63-day election period. Other commenters
recommended that individuals be permitted to begin the special
enrollment process 30 days prior to a known qualifying event.
Response: We agree that 60-day enrollment periods will promote
consistency with the Exchanges and will give consumers the time they
need to explore coverage options following a change in life
circumstances. Therefore, we provide a 60-day election period for the
special and limited open enrollment periods in the individual market.
However, to avoid inconsistency with the statutory requirement in PHS
Act section 2704(f)(1) that individuals losing group health coverage
must request special enrollment not later than 30 days after the loss
of coverage, we maintain 30-day special enrollment periods for the
group market. We note that the March 27, 2012 Exchange final rule
(Sec. 155.725(a)(3)) currently provides for 60-day special enrollment
periods with respect to the SHOP. We intend to revise the SHOP special
enrollment periods to be consistent with the election period in group
market under PHS Act section 2704(f)(1) and this final rule. We also
note that we will monitor the effects the 60-day election period has on
the individual market and whether or not is necessary to move to a 30-
day election period to be consistent with the group market.
Comment: In response to our request for comment, many commenters
supported a requirement that issuers in the individual market provide a
notice of special enrollment rights to individual market enrollees,
similar to what is provided to group health plan participants and
beneficiaries under HIPAA.
Response: Following review of the comments submitted on this issue
and further consideration of the additional burden that would be
imposed on QHP issuers, we do not in this final rule require a notice
of special enrollment in the individual market. QHP issuers are already
subject to various notice requirements through the Exchange which will
allow enrollees to make timely and informed coverage decisions.
Furthermore, to ensure consistency with Exchanges and to avoid
confusion, we do not extend a notice requirement to the broader
individual market.
Comment: One commenter recommended that special enrollment periods
not apply to individual family members who do not otherwise qualify for
special enrollment. The commenter stated, for example, that an
individual who loses minimum essential coverage should be allowed to
obtain new coverage, but should not be allowed to obtain coverage for
other dependents that were not covered on the previous policy.
Response: If an individual experiences an event that triggers a
limited open or special enrollment right pursuant to Sec.
147.104(b)(2) or (b)(3) of this final rule, the individual has the
option to choose any family coverage offered in the individual market
to cover members of his or her family. Pursuant to existing HIPAA
regulations at Sec. 146.117, this right already exists in the group
market.
Comment: Some commenters recommended that issuers offering
individual health insurance coverage be required to offer family
coverage, while one commenter recommended clarifying that offering
family coverage is not required under the guaranteed availability
provisions.
Response: The final rule does not require an issuer to offer family
coverage. While issuers are required to offer all products that are
approved for sale in a market, an issuer is not required to offer a
family coverage option with every policy form.
4. Guaranteed Renewability of Coverage (Sec. 147.106)
In Sec. 147.106, we proposed to implement the guaranteed
renewability provisions of section 2703 of the PHS Act. We proposed
that an issuer offering health insurance coverage in the group or
individual market must renew or continue in force such coverage at the
option of the plan sponsor or individual. The exceptions to this
requirement include: (1) Nonpayment of premiums; (2) fraud; (3)
violation of minimum employer participation or contribution rules, as
permitted under applicable state law; (4) termination of a particular
type of product or all coverage in a market; (5) enrollees' movement
outside the service area of a
[[Page 13419]]
network plan; and (6) for coverage provided through a bona fide
association, an employer's loss of membership in the association.\16\
We noted that under the March 27, 2012 Exchange final rule at Sec.
155.430, QHP issuers are permitted to terminate coverage in additional
circumstances (for example, decertification of the QHP in the Exchange)
and requested comment on whether issuers in such circumstances should
be required to renew coverage on a non-QHP basis outside the Exchange.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\16\ Section 2742(b)(5) of the PHS Act provides an exception to
guaranteed renewability for an individual market enrollee's loss of
membership in a bona fide association.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
We also proposed standards governing the discontinuance of a
particular product or all health insurance coverage in the group or
individual market, consistent with the statute.
Finally, we proposed that issuers in the group market may uniformly
modify coverage at the time of coverage renewal and noted that parallel
provisions in section 2742 of the PHS Act allow for the uniform
modification of coverage in the individual market. We stated that the
uniform modification of coverage provisions would allow issuers to make
cost-sharing adjustments and benefit design changes to come into
compliance with the requirements of the Affordable Care Act that become
effective in 2014 and requested comment on whether such interpretation
should be incorporated explicitly into regulation text.
Comment: Many commenters supported allowing enrollees in a QHP that
terminates or is decertified in the Exchange to elect to renew coverage
on a non-QHP basis outside the Exchange. Some commenters supported
applying such standard with respect to all QHP termination events.
Other commenters suggested enrollees should be notified in such
instances that continuing coverage outside of the Exchange will affect
their eligibility for advance payments of the premium tax credit and
cost-sharing reductions. One commenter asserted that renewing coverage
on a non-QHP basis may be unnecessary, since an enrollee's loss of
coverage in a QHP will in most instances trigger a special enrollment
right, and argued that decisions about coverage renewal are best left
to the states.
Response: As discussed above, if an individual loses minimum
essential coverage because, for example, a QHP is decertified,
individuals enrolled in the QHP will have a limited open enrollment
right for any policy in the individual market, including any product
being offered by the same issuer that offered the QHP.
Comment: A few commenters recommended clarifying that coverage may
be non-renewed for loss of eligibility. For example, commenters
suggested that for consistency with Sec. 156.155 regarding
catastrophic plans, a non-renewal provision would apply at the end of
the policy year in which the person was no longer eligible for
coverage.
Response: Individuals may only qualify for enrollment in some plans
(for example, catastrophic plans or QHPs in the Exchange) if they meet
certain eligibility criteria. While we do not include this
clarification explicitly in Sec. 147.106 of the final rule, we note
that issuers are not required to renew coverage if an individual is not
otherwise eligible for such coverage.
Comment: One commenter recommended that issuers be permitted to
non-renew coverage when an enrollee becomes covered by other minimum
essential coverage to prevent individuals from over-insuring.
Response: Consistent with PHS Act section 2703, the final rule does
not include enrollment in other coverage as an exception for guaranteed
renewability. We note that state coordination of benefit laws may apply
in instances where individuals are enrolled in more than one type of
coverage.
Comment: With respect to the discontinuation of coverage provisions
in Sec. 147.106(d)(1), one commenter suggested that HHS recognize the
large group and small group segments of the group market so that an
issuer is not required to exit both segments of the group market when
exercising the option to discontinue all coverage in a market.
Response: PHS Act section 2703(c)(2)(A) permits an issuer to non-
renew or discontinue coverage if the issuer discontinues offering all
health insurance coverage in the ``group market.'' Thus, the issuer
must withdraw from the entire group market in order to satisfy this
exception to guaranteed renewability. The final rule implements the
statute without modification.
Comment: Several commenters noted that the guaranteed renewability
laws in some states would prevent issuers from making plan design
changes and cost-sharing adjustments necessary to bring existing, non-
grandfathered coverage into compliance with the requirements of the
Affordable Care Act that become effective in 2014. Commenters urged HHS
to incorporate language into regulation text explicitly permitting
issuers to discontinue or uniformly modify coverage at renewal, even if
such discontinuance or modification is not permitted under applicable
state law.
Response: State laws that prevent issuers from uniformly modifying
coverage, as permitted by sections 2703 and 2742 of the PHS Act, to
comply with federal standards in title XXVII of the PHS Act would, in
effect, prevent the application of such standards and, therefore, be
preempted under section 2724(a)(1) of the PHS Act.
C. Part 150--CMS Enforcement in Group and Individual Insurance Market
We proposed technical changes in 45 CFR part 150 to reflect that
the HIPAA enforcement standard, as originally codified in PHS Act
section 2722 and redesignated as section 2723 by the Affordable Care
Act, applies to the market reform provisions of the PHS Act created by
the Affordable Care Act. Pursuant to section 2723, states have the
primary enforcement authority with respect to health insurance issuers
in the group and individual markets. HHS has secondary enforcement
authority and will enforce a provision in a state only if the state
advises us that it does not have authority to enforce the provision or
if the state fails to substantially enforce a provision.
Comment: Several commenters requested a safe harbor from
enforcement, at least for the first year of implementation, as long as
issuers are making good faith efforts to comply and implement the new
requirements. Special concern was raised in the instance where state
law conflicts with federal law.
Response: As stated in previous Affordable Care Act guidance, our
approach to implementation is marked by an emphasis on assisting
(rather than imposing penalties on) issuers and others that are working
diligently and in good faith to understand and comply with the law.\17\
While the final rule does not provide an enforcement safe harbor for
the market reform provisions, HHS will continue to work closely with
issuers and states in the implementation of these provisions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\17\ See, for example, Affordable Care Act Implementation FAQs--
Set 1 Q1, available at https://cciio.cms.gov/resources/factsheets/aca_implementation_faqs.html.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Comment: One commenter questioned HHS's authority to extend this
enforcement standard to the provisions of the Affordable Care Act
including the market reform provisions.
Response: Title I of the Affordable Care Act amends title XXVII of
the PHS
[[Page 13420]]
Act. Specifically, the market reform provisions are enumerated in
sections 2701, 2702, and 2703 of title XXVII of the PHS Act, which are
subject to the enforcement provisions of PHS Act section 2723.
Comment: One commenter requested clarification regarding the
process HHS uses to determine that a state is not substantially
enforcing a provision of title XXVII of the PHS Act.
Response: We refer readers to 45 CFR 150.203, et. seq. for
regulations describing HHS's enforcement processes.
D. Part 154--Health Insurance Issuer Rate Increases: Disclosure and
Review
1. Subpart B--Disclosure and Review Provisions
a. State-specific Thresholds (Sec. 154.200)
In Sec. 154.200(a)(2) and (b), we proposed that states seeking
state-specific thresholds submit proposals to CMS by August 1 of each
year. The Secretary would publish a Federal Register notice not later
than September 1 of each year concerning whether a state-specific
threshold applies in a state. If approved, a state-specific threshold
would become effective on January 1 of the year following the
Secretary's notice.
Comment: A few commenters were concerned that proposed timeline
would not give issuers sufficient time to file rates before January 1.
Response: We are finalizing the revised timeline in Sec.
154.200(a)(2) and (b) as proposed because the new dates increase
consistency inside and outside of the Exchange. We are working to align
the market with the QHP submission schedule and with the 2014 market
reforms. Since QHP filings are due April 30 of each year, moving the
state-specific threshold application date to August 1 will give states
the appropriate amount of time to analyze the QHP information they
receive and to request a state-specific threshold if they believe one
is necessary. We will be moving the state-specific threshold
determination deadline from June 1 to September 1, with any potential
state-specific threshold going into effect January 1 of the following
year. Under the May 23, 2011 rate review final rule (76 FR 29964), the
Secretary was to publish a notice about state-specific thresholds by
June 1, and the effective date of any state-specific threshold was
September 1 of the same year. Under this final rule, issuers will still
have three months to prepare to file rates under any potential state-
specific threshold. Therefore, we are shifting the entire timeline
forward three months to enable states to have enough information to
assess their markets appropriately. We note that the January 1
effective date for state-specific thresholds only means that rate
filings submitted on or after January 1 will be subject to any
potential state-specific threshold and not necessarily rate increases
that are effective January 1.
b. Submission of Rate Filing Justification (Sec. 154.215)
Section 2794(b)(2(A) of the PHS Act directs that beginning in 2014,
the Secretary, in conjunction with the states, shall monitor premium
increases of health insurance coverage offered through an Exchange and
outside an Exchange. To enable the Secretary to carry out this new
monitoring function and to streamline data collection for programs
beginning in 2014, we proposed revisions in Sec. 154.215 that would
direct health insurance issuers to submit data and documentation
regarding rate increases on a standardized form determined by the
Secretary. We also proposed that the rate review standards be modified
by extending the requirement that health insurance issuers report
information about rate increases to all rate increases, not just those
above the review threshold. States would continue to have the authority
to collect additional information above this baseline to conduct more
thorough reviews or rate monitoring. Furthermore, the review threshold
in Sec. 154.200 would continue to be used to determine which rates
must be reviewed rather than just reported.
Under the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (PRA) process (44 U.S.C.
chapter 35), we proposed a ``unified rate review'' template for health
insurance issuers to use for submitting data for rate increases. In
this final rule, we have revised the text of Sec. 154.215 to reflect
the ``unified rate review'' terminology. We also have added language
explicitly reflecting the fact that the premium rates subject to rate
review reporting are shaped by the premium rating standards implemented
under the single risk pool requirement and the applicability of the
guaranteed availability and renewability requirements. We clarify that
states are not specifically required to use the unified rate review
template in order to have an effective rate review program.
Comment: Several commenters remarked on the proposal to expand
reporting of all rate increases using the unified rate review template.
Some commenters supported the expanded reporting requirement, while
other commenters were concerned about the administrative burden on
issuers. One commenter suggested that the proposal would allow both CMS
and states to monitor rate trends and identify patterns that could
indicate market disruption.
Response: Section 2794(b)(2)(A) of the PHS Act, as added by the
Affordable Care Act, requires the Secretary to monitor premium
increases of health insurance coverage offered both inside and outside
an Exchange, for plan years beginning in 2014. Accordingly, we proposed
that issuers offering health insurance coverage in the small group or
individual markets report information about all rate increases. We
believe that standardizing the reporting process will reduce
administrative burden and duplication over time and enable both states
and CMS to evaluate information about the single risk pool, actuarial
value, essential health benefits, and other market reforms beginning in
2014. This reporting will also assist states and CMS in monitoring the
market inside and outside the Exchange for adverse selection.
Therefore, we are finalizing the requirement to report all rate
increases in Sec. 154.215 as proposed. We note that when new business
is included in the unified rate review template, the issuer must
demonstrate all premium and claims projections for the new products and
plans as provided in guidance. Historical experience is only required
for existing product/plan combinations represented on the unified rate
review template. We also note that, in response to comments received
through the PRA process, we have made changes to the uniform rate
review template to both remove data elements and to make some optional
in the first two years of applicability. As discussed in more detail in
section V. of the preamble, we estimate that these changes reduce the
number of required data elements by approximately 45 percent.
Comment: Several commenters remarked on the content of the proposed
unified rate review template.
Response: We address these comments in section V. of the preamble
regarding collection of information requirements. As mentioned above,
we have made changes to the template in response to comments to ensure
streamlined and efficient data collection.
2. Subpart C--Effective Rate Review Programs
a. Determination of Effective Rate Review Programs (Sec. 154.301)
To account for the market reform changes in 2014, we proposed to
modify the standards in Sec. 154.301(a)(3) for
[[Page 13421]]
states to have an effective rate review program with respect to rate
filings subject to review. Specifically, we proposed that a state with
an effective rate review program review the following additional
elements as part of its rate review process: (1) the reasonableness of
assumptions used by an issuer to estimate the rate impact of the
reinsurance and risk adjustment programs; and (2) issuer data related
to implementation and ongoing utilization of a market-wide single risk
pool, essential health benefits, actuarial values, and other market
reform provisions of the Affordable Care Act. We did not propose to
modify the 10 percent subject to review threshold as finalized in Sec.
154.200.
We also proposed to revise Sec. 154.301(a)(4) by adding additional
factors that states would take into consideration when conducting their
examinations, including (1) in reviewing the impact of cost-sharing
changes, the impact on the actuarial value of the health plan in light
of the requirement under section 1302(d) of the Affordable Care Act
that a plan meet one of the AV levels; and (2) in reviewing benefit
changes to a plan, the impact of the changes on the plan's essential
health benefits and non-essential health benefits.
Additionally, we proposed that states take into account, to the
extent possible, the following additional factors when conducting an
examination of a rate review filing:
Other standardized ratio tests (in addition to the medical
loss ratio) recommended or required by statute, regulation, or best
practices;
The impact of geographic factors and variations;
The impact of changes within a single risk pool to all
products or plans within the risk pool; and
The impact of reinsurance and risk adjustment payments and
charges.
Finally, we proposed revisions in Sec. 154.301(b) to ensure that a
state with an effective rate review program make available on its Web
site, at a minimum, the same amount of information in Parts I, II, and
III of each Rate Filing Justification that CMS makes available on its
Web site. We proposed that a state may, instead of providing access to
the information contained in Parts I, II, and III or each Rate Filing
Justification, provide a link to CMS's Web site where consumers can
find such information.
Comment: Several commenters remarked on the proposed additional
criteria for states to have an effective rate review program. Some
commenters supported the additional criteria, while others suggested
that states with effective rate review programs should have flexibility
to use either the unified rate review template or their own templates
and formats for collecting information from issuers. One commenter
suggested that CMS should accept state regulators' attestations that
they are reviewing the required information, but not necessarily
require that states incorporate the unified rate review template into
their review process.
Response: We finalize the proposed amendments in Sec. 154.301
except that, in order to limit additional factors to only those that
reflect the 2014 market reforms, we do not require states to consider
``other standardized ratio tests recommended or required by statute,
regulation, or best practices'' to have an effective rate review
program. Although states will likely consider these ratio tests as part
of their review processes, we intend to minimize the criteria and
factors for states to have an effective rate review program in order to
give states the maximum flexibility to conduct reviews. Further, this
final rule does not require states to incorporate the unified rate
review template into their review process. States will retain the
flexibility to use other collection tools, provided they collect the
information necessary to conduct effective reviews. States cannot rely
on issuer attestation alone in conducting these reviews. Issuers in all
states, including those with effective rate review programs, must still
under this final rule submit information to CMS using the unified rate
review template. We note that states and issuers will have an incentive
to use the collection tools provided by CMS to ensure streamlined and
efficient data collection.
This approach strikes the appropriate balance between maintaining
state flexibility and allowing CMS to carry out functions related to:
(1) The monitoring of premium increases of health insurance coverage
offered through an Exchange and outside an Exchange as required by
section 2794(b)(2)(A) of the PHS Act; (2) Exchanges such as QHP
certification and premium tax credit and cost-sharing reduction
verification; and (3) the risk adjustment and reinsurance programs. We
note that even without the administrative efficiencies associated with
using the information collected through rate review authority for the
second and third functions listed above, the same data would be needed
and collected to carry out the first function by itself. We also
clarify that we will use the information collected only for these
specified purposes and will initiate future rulemaking if we intend to
use the data for any other purpose.
Comment: Some commenters expressed concern about the public release
of information. Commenters recommended disclosing only a minimal amount
of information and that such disclosure not include confidential or
proprietary information.
Response: As mentioned in the preamble of the November 26, 2012
proposed rule, we will release only information collected that is
determined not to include trade secrets and is approved for release
under the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). In general, all
information collected by HHS is subject to FOIA. In accordance with the
HHS's FOIA implementing regulations at 45 CFR 5.65(c), health insurance
issuers may designate part or all of the information submitted as
exempt from disclosure under Exemption 4 of the FOIA if the issuer
believes the information is commercial or financial information that is
confidential or privileged. If there is a FOIA request, we will follow
the pre-disclosure notification procedures found at 45 CFR 5.65(d)
through (e) to seek issuer input on the applicability of Exemption 4
before disclosure is made. If the information has previously been
published or made generally available to the public, it will not be
considered confidential or privileged for purposes of Exemption 4. In
addition, as discussed in section II.E.1.a. of the preamble, issuers
will set their index rates and plan-specific pricing once per year upon
filing their rates with state insurance departments, and information
would only be released after the QHP submission process is concluded.
Accordingly, we believe that public disclosure of certain rate review
information will not undermine competitive market dynamics.
b. Rate Filing Justification (Sec. 154.225 and Sec. 154.330)
We proposed to amend Sec. 154.225 and Sec. 154.330 by replacing
the term ``Preliminary Justification'' with the term ``Rate Filing
Justification,'' to reflect more appropriately the rate filing
information that would be reported. We received no comments regarding
this proposed change. Accordingly, we are finalizing proposed Sec.
154.225 and Sec. 154.330 without modification.
[[Page 13422]]
E. Part 156--Health Insurance Issuer Standards Under the Affordable
Care Act, Including Standards Related to Exchanges
1. Subpart A--General Provisions
a. Single Risk Pool (Sec. 156.80)
In Sec. 156.80, we proposed standards to implement the requirement
in section 1312(c) of the Affordable Care Act that an issuer use a
single risk pool for a market (the individual market, small group
market, or merged market) when developing rates and premiums for
coverage effective beginning in 2014.
We proposed that an issuer develop a market-wide index rate
(average rate) based on the total combined EHB claims experience of all
enrollees in all non-grandfathered plans in the risk pool. After
setting the index rate, the issuer would make a market-wide adjustment
based on the expected aggregated payments and charges under the risk
adjustment and reinsurance programs in a state. The premium rate for
any given plan could not vary from the resulting adjusted market-wide
index rate, except for the following factors: The actuarial value and
cost-sharing structure of the plan; the plan's provider network,
delivery system characteristics, and utilization management practices;
plan benefits in addition to EHB; and with respect to catastrophic
plans, the expected impact of specific eligibility categories for those
plans. The index rate, the market-wide adjustment to the index rate,
and the plan-specific adjustments would have to be actuarially
justified and implemented transparently, consistent with federal and
state rate review processes.
We invited comment on the set of allowable plan-specific
adjustments and whether to allow flexibility in product pricing in 2016
after issuers had gained sufficient experience with the reformed
market. Additionally, in the ``HHS Notice of Benefit and Payment
Parameters for 2014'' proposed rule (77 FR 73118), we solicited comment
on whether Exchange user fees or other administrative costs should be
spread across all plans in a market as a market-wide adjustment to the
index rate.
Comment: Several commenters suggested that issuers should be
allowed to reflect distribution costs and other administrative costs
associated with different products in their premiums to promote
administrative efficiency. One commenter recommended allowing a market-
wide adjustment to the index rate for Exchange user fees, as well as
distribution costs, agent and broker commissions, and all
administrative costs, to spread these costs evenly across the market
and protect against adverse selection. Other commenters urged that any
flexibility in product pricing not result in de facto experience rating
based on health status. A few commenters opposed our proposal to pool
Exchange user fees across all plans in a market within a state because
they believed that this would unfairly increase costs for members that
are not enrolled in the Exchange. Other commenters supported the
proposal to pool Exchange user fees across all of an issuer's plans in
a relevant market within a state.
Response: We agree with commenters urging the pooling of Exchange
user fees across the market as these costs are not related to the
unique efficiencies or designs of a particular plan. Accordingly, the
final rule directs issuers to make a market-wide adjustment to the
index rate for Exchange user fees. This will ensure that Exchange user
fees are spread evenly across the market, creating a level playing
field inside and outside the Exchange, and further protecting against
adverse selection. Further, this policy is consistent with the
treatment of Exchange user fees for medical loss ratio (MLR) and rebate
calculations under 45 CFR 158.161(a).\18\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\18\ CCIIO Technical Guidance (CCIIO 2012-002): Questions and
Answers Regarding the Medical Loss Ratio Regulation, Q&A 34
(Apr. 20, 2012), available at https://cciio.cms.gov/resources/files/mlr-qna-04202012.pdf.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As for distribution costs and other administrative costs (other
than Exchange user fees), we believe that issuers should be allowed to
make actuarially justified adjustments to the market-wide index rate at
the individual plan level for those costs. This will allow pricing to
vary among individual plans by administrative costs reasonably
allocable to those plans, ensuring that administrative efficiencies are
priced accurately and promoting market competition. The final rule
therefore includes administrative costs (other than Exchange user fees)
as an additional factor that issuers may use to modify the market-wide
index rate at the individual plan level.
Comment: Several commenters requested issuer flexibility in product
pricing to adequately adjust for the risk of their enrollees.
Commenters opposed any restriction to making actuarially justified
adjustments to the index rate for new and renewing businesses during
the course of the year. Other commenters suggested issuers adjust the
index rate on a consistent, annual basis.
Response: Issuers in the individual or combined markets (in states
that have merged the individual and small group markets) should set
their index rates and plan-specific pricing once per year, upon filing
their rates with the state's department of insurance. Permitting
changes in these markets to the index rate throughout the year could
effectively lead to premium pricing in violation of the rules described
above. We believe that these rates should apply to new and renewing
enrollees during the course of the year.
Comment: Several commenters requested clarification on whether
adjustments to the index rate could reflect differences in health
status. Some commenters also requested that issuers be permitted to
make an adjustment to the index rate to account for induced
utilization. Other commenters requested that HHS enforce the single
risk pool requirement so that the index rate and plan-specific rates
set by issuers do not reflect differences in enrollee health status.
Response: As indicated in the preamble of the November 26, 2012
proposed rule, we believe that the purpose of the single risk pool is
to prevent issuers from segregating enrollees into separate rating
pools based on health status. In this final rule, we confirm that plan-
specific adjustments to the market-wide index rate must not reflect
differences in health status or risk selection. In addition, we exclude
induced demand from the index rate adjustments because of the actuarial
difficulty of measuring whether differences in total plan expenditures
are due to risk selection or induced demand.
Comment: Several commenters requested clarification on whether the
term ``actuarial value'' for the purpose of the individual plan
adjustment to the index rate has the same meaning as the term
``actuarial value'' in the Actuarial Value (AV) calculator in the
November 26, 2012 EHB/AV/Accreditation proposed rule. Several
commenters also requested clarification on the method for applying
plan-specific premium factors, particularly whether issuers may adjust
the index rate for anticipated difference in utilization, risk
adjustment payments and reinsurance payments through plan design, and
the allowable adjustment for catastrophic plans.
Response: The calculation of the actuarial value through the AV
calculator is based on data sets provided by HHS reflecting a standard
population, utilization, and unit prices. For the purpose of developing
an adjustment to the market-wide index rate for individual plans, we
would expect health insurance issuers to utilize pooled allowable
claims data as a basis for calculating the plan-specific
[[Page 13423]]
actuarial value. By using the claims data of their pooled population,
issuers can develop more accurate adjustments to the index rate for
individual plans. In the absence of data, issuers of new plans would
have the option of calculating pooled allowable claims using
actuarially reasonable projections.
Additionally, we would expect issuers to proportionally allocate
anticipated reinsurance and risk adjustment payments and charges based
on plan premium by applying the risk adjustment/reinsurance adjustment
factor as a constant multiplicative factor across plans. We believe
that this modification would prevent issuers from differentially
allocating risk adjustment and reinsurance payments and charges across
plans in a manner that would reintroduce risk selection differences
into plan premiums.
Finally, with respect to catastrophic plans, we clarify that
issuers may make a plan-specific adjustment to the market-wide index
rate that accounts for differences between catastrophic and non-
catastrophic plans in expected average enrollee gross spending and
expected average risk adjustment payment transfers. This plan-specific
adjustment would be uniform across all of an issuer's catastrophic
plans (that is, risk across all catastrophic plans must be pooled).
This adjustment for catastrophic plans should not include plan
liability differences due to actuarial value, because actuarial value
differences should be accounted for in the actuarial value adjustment.
Comment: A few commenters requested flexibility in the claims data
that could be used to determine the index rate for the initial years of
Exchange operation. One commenter specifically recommended that issuers
be permitted to use the claims experience from grandfathered books of
business when developing initial rates.
Response: We recognize that lack of robust EHB claims experience
may create challenges for issuers in setting rates in the initial years
of implementation. We clarify that in the absence of applicable claims
data, an issuer may use any reasonable source of claims data, including
claims experience from grandfathered books of business or claims data
from actuarial rate manuals (to the extent available), to establish its
index rate, as long as those data are used to actuarially estimate the
portion of claims data associated with providing coverage for EHB as
required to establish the index rate.
Comment: A few commenters expressed concern that merging the
individual and small group markets could cause market disruption and
affect the rating methodology. Other commenters requested clarification
about how the single risk pool would apply if a state elected to merge
its individual and small group markets.
Response: If a state exercises the option to merge its individual
and small group markets, an issuer must, in accordance with Sec.
156.80(d) of this final rule, calculate the market-wide index rate and
plan-specific adjustments based on the merged market. As only non-
grandfathered individual market plans are eligible for payments under
the transitional reinsurance program, in a merged market, the pooled
reinsurance adjustment should be based only on the portion of the
issuer's individual market business eligible for reinsurance payments.
Comment: Numerous commenters requested clarification of whether the
single risk pool is to be maintained at the holding company level or at
the individual licensee level.
Response: Section 1312(c) of the Affordable Care Act requires a
health insurance issuer to maintain a single risk pool in the
individual market and a single risk pool in the small group market
(unless a state requires both pools to be merged). Section 1301(b)(2)
of the Affordable Care Act provides that the term ``health insurance
issuer'' has the meaning given the term in section 2791(b) of the PHS
Act, which defines a health insurance issuer as an entity that is
licensed to conduct the business of insurance in a state. Accordingly,
the single risk pool is to be maintained at the licensed entity level.
2. Subpart B--Standards for Essential Health Benefits, Actuarial Value,
and Cost Sharing
a. Enrollment in Catastrophic Plans (Sec. 156.155)
In Sec. 156.155, we proposed standards for catastrophic plans
offered in the individual market, consistent with section 1302(e) of
the Affordable Care Act. Specifically, we proposed that a health plan
is a catastrophic plan if it: (1) Meets all applicable requirements for
health insurance coverage in the individual market; (2) does not offer
coverage at the bronze, silver, gold, or platinum levels of coverage
described in section 1302(d) of the Affordable Care Act; (3) does not
provide coverage of essential health benefits until the enrolled
individual reaches the annual limitation in cost sharing in section
1302(c)(1) of the Affordable Care Act; and (4) covers at least three
primary care visits per year before reaching the deductible. Further,
we proposed that a catastrophic plan may not impose any cost-sharing
requirements for preventive services identified in section 2713 of the
PHS Act.
We also proposed to codify the statutory criteria identified in
section 1302(e)(2) of the Affordable Care Act listing the two
categories of individuals eligible to enroll in a catastrophic plan.
The first category includes individuals who are younger than age 30
before the beginning of the plan year. The second category includes
individuals who have been certified as exempt from the individual
responsibility payment because they cannot afford minimum essential
coverage or because they are eligible for a hardship exemption.
Finally, we proposed that if a catastrophic plan covers more than one
person (such as a catastrophic family plan), each individual enrolled
must satisfy at least one of these two eligibility criteria.
Comment: A few commenters requested clarification as to whether the
provisions regarding catastrophic plans apply only to coverage offered
through an Exchange.
Response: Section 1301(a)(1)(B) of the Affordable Care Act directs
a QHP to provide the EHB package described in section 1302(a) that,
subject to section 1302(e), meets the actuarial value (AV) levels
described in section 1302(d) (bronze, silver, gold, or platinum levels
of coverage). Section 1302(e) describes an exception to the AV
requirements for catastrophic plans. These provisions are incorporated
by reference in section 2707(a) of the PHS Act, which extends coverage
of the EHB package required under section 1302(a) to health insurance
issuers offering non-grandfathered coverage in the individual and small
group markets. Accordingly, the provisions regarding catastrophic plans
apply to coverage offered both inside and outside of an Exchange.
Comment: One commenter recommended clarifying that individuals are
eligible for enrollment in a catastrophic plan (offered through or
outside the Exchange) if they have obtained from the Exchange a
hardship exemption based on inability to afford or obtain coverage.
Response: As discussed in the February 1, 2013 Federal Register
proposed rule entitled ``Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act;
Exchange Functions: Eligibility for Exemptions; Miscellaneous Minimum
Essential Coverage Provisions'' (78 FR 7348), herein referred to as the
Minimum Essential Coverage proposed rule, only the Exchange may issue
certificates of exemption based on hardship. Under the Minimum
Essential
[[Page 13424]]
Coverage proposed rule, there are several situations where an Exchange
would grant a certificate of exemption for hardship based on an
inability to afford or obtain coverage. One category of the hardship
exemption is based on the Exchange determining that an applicant, or
another individual in the applicant's family, is unable to afford
coverage for a calendar year based on the applicant's projected
household income. This specific category would allow individuals to
receive a hardship exemption in lieu of the statutory unaffordability
exemption based on the individual's actual household income. We agree
that, consistent with the above discussion of section 2707(a) of the
PHS Act, individuals granted a certificate of exemption from the
Exchange based on hardship may use such exemption determination to
establish eligibility to purchase a catastrophic plan outside of the
Exchange.
Comment: One commenter stated that with respect to a catastrophic
family plan, only one member of a family should have to meet the
eligibility criteria rather than all family members.
Response: Section 1302(e)(1)(A) of the Affordable Care Act provides
that the only individuals who are eligible to enroll in a catastrophic
plan are those individuals who meet specific eligibility criteria
described in section 1302(e)(2). Therefore, we do not accept the
commenter's suggestion that all members of a family may enroll in a
catastrophic plan if only one family member is eligible to enroll.
Comment: We received several comments about the requirement that
catastrophic plans must provide coverage for at least three primary
care visits before reaching the annual deductible. Some commenters
recommended clarifying that issuers must cover at least three primary
care visits in addition to the preventive services required to be
covered without cost sharing under section 2713 of the PHS Act, and
that issuers may not impose any cost-sharing requirements for these
visits. Other commenters recommended clarifying that primary care
visits include visits to obstetrical or gynecological providers.
Response: Health insurance issuers providing catastrophic coverage
must fully comply with PHS Act section 2713 and its implementing
regulations in addition to providing coverage for at least three
primary care visits. The classification of who is a primary care
provider for the purpose of the primary care visits is determined by
the terms of the health plan or by state law.
F. Applicability to Special Plan Types
1. Student Health Insurance Coverage (Sec. 147.145)
Section 1560(c) of the Affordable Care Act provides that nothing in
title I of the Affordable Care Act, or an amendment made by title I,
``shall be construed to prohibit an institution of higher education (as
such term is defined for purposes of the Higher Education Act of 1965)
from offering a student health insurance plan, to the extent that such
requirement is otherwise permitted under applicable federal, state, or
local law.'' HHS has interpreted section 1560(c) to mean that if
particular requirements of the Affordable Care Act would have, as a
practical matter, the effect of prohibiting an institution of higher
education from offering a student health plan otherwise permitted under
federal, state, or local law, these requirements would be inapplicable
pursuant to section 1560(c).
HHS published a final rule in the March 21, 2012 Federal Register
entitled ``Student Health Insurance Coverage'' (77 FR 16453), which
clarified that for purposes of federal law, student health insurance
coverage is defined as a type of individual health insurance coverage
and therefore generally subject to the individual market requirements
of title XXVII of the PHS Act and title I of the Affordable Care Act.
However, pursuant to section 1560(c) of the Affordable Care Act, the
March 21, 2012 final rule exempted student health insurance coverage
from the guaranteed availability and guaranteed renewability
requirements of PHS Act sections 2741(e)(1) and 2742(b)(5) added by
HIPAA.
Consistent with that policy, the November 26, 2012 proposed rule
outlined similar exemptions for student health insurance coverage from
the guaranteed availability and guaranteed renewability requirements of
PHS Act sections 2702 and 2703 added by the Affordable Care Act to
ensure that enrollment in student health insurance plans may be limited
only to students and their dependents. Further, we solicited comment on
whether issuers should be permitted to maintain a separate risk pool
for student health insurance coverage and whether different premium
rating rules should apply.
Comment: While some commenters recommended including student health
insurance coverage in the general individual market risk pool, many
commenters urged HHS to recognize the unique characteristics of student
health insurance plans by allowing separate risk pooling of such
coverage. Commenters expressed concern that pooling the risk of student
enrollees with other individual market enrollees could increase student
health insurance premiums and potentially discourage some universities
from offering student health insurance plans. Commenters also noted
that student health insurance issuers typically do not underwrite
students on an individual basis, but rather offer coverage to
institutions of higher education at a group community rate. These
commenters requested flexibility with respect to the premium rating
rules of PHS Act section 2701 so that issuers may continue to consider
characteristics such as the educational institution's claims
experience, enrollment method, demographics, and availability of on-
campus services when developing rates and premiums for student health
insurance coverage.
Response: We recognize that student health insurance coverage
generally is rated and administered differently than other forms of
individual health insurance coverage. Issuers of student health
insurance coverage typically contract with a college or university to
issue a ``blanket'' health insurance policy, from which students can
buy coverage, and the policy is generally rated on a group basis based
on the total expected claims experience of the college's or
university's students enrolled in the plan. Accordingly, under HHS's
authority in section 1560(c) of the Affordable Care Act to ensure that
the law's requirements would not effectively prohibit the offering of a
student health insurance plan otherwise permitted under federal, state,
or local law, and to minimize market disruption in the initial
transition to the reformed market, this final rule provides that non-
grandfathered student health insurance coverage is not subject to the
single risk pool requirement of section 1312(c) of the Affordable Care
Act.
Student health insurance is subject under these final rules to the
premium rating requirements of section 2701 of the PHS Act. We note,
however, that given the exemption from single risk pool requirement,
the premium rate charged by an issuer offering student health insurance
coverage may be based on a school-specific group community rate if,
consistent with section 2701, the issuer offers the coverage without
rating for age or tobacco use. This provides flexibility to student
health insurance issuers with respect to the per-member-rating
provisions of PHS Act section 2701(a)(4) and Sec. 147.102(c)(1), while
ensuring that student enrollees and their dependents are not charge
more based on their health status or gender.
[[Page 13425]]
The treatment of student health insurance coverage under these
final rules will serve as a transitional policy. We intend to monitor
student health insurance coverage as the insurance market transitions
to the 2014 market reforms and revisit this policy in the future.
Comment: Several commenters supported the proposal to exempt
student health insurance coverage from the guaranteed availability and
renewability requirements of the Affordable Care Act. One commenter
specifically recommended with respect to the guaranteed availability
provisions of the November 26, 2012 proposed rule that open enrollment
periods for student health insurance plans be permitted to coincide
with college and university enrollment periods.
Response: In this final rule, we finalize our proposal to exempt
student health insurance coverage from the guaranteed availability
requirements under PHS Act section 2702 and the guaranteed renewability
requirements under PHS Act section 2703. Therefore, the special and
open enrollment periods under section 2702 do not apply to issuers of
student health insurance coverage. Student health insurance issuers may
work with colleges and universities to determine appropriate enrollment
periods for student enrollees and their dependents.
2. Bona Fide Association Coverage
As mentioned above, we proposed, consistent with PHS Act section
2702, that non-grandfathered health insurance coverage made available
in the individual or group market through a bona fide association must
be guaranteed available to all individuals or employers in a state and
market. These proposed rules represented a change from existing law
permitting coverage sold through bona fide associations to be limited
only to association members; therefore, we invited comment on whether
and how a transition or exception process for bona fide association
coverage could be structured to minimize disruption.
Comment: Several commenters noted that the Affordable Care Act
preserved an exception for coverage sold through bona fide associations
from the guaranteed renewability provisions of sections 2703 and 2742
of the PHS Act and urged HHS to recognize a similar exception for bona
fide associations from the guaranteed availability provisions of
section 2702. Some commenters recommended providing a transition period
during which issuers could close association coverage to new
enrollment, while other commenters cautioned that as long as issuers
offering coverage through bona fide associations are able to limit
coverage to association members, they effectively will be able to
select healthy applicants and refuse applicants with high health care
costs.
Response: Section 1563 of the Affordable Care Act deleted the
exception contained in section 2711(f) of the PHS Act that existed
prior to the amendments made by the Affordable Act, which exempted
small group coverage sold through bona fide associations from having to
guarantee issue policies to anyone other than members of the
association. Therefore, the final rule implements the Affordable Care
Act, which does not recognize an exception from guaranteed availability
for bona fide association coverage. We note that while starting in
2014, health insurance issuers may not limit coverage sold through
associations only to association members, nothing prevents an issuer
from renewing existing association coverage. Furthermore, as discussed
in the November 26, 2012 proposed rule, the exception for limited
network capacity could provide a basis for limiting enrollment in
certain products to bona fide association members.
3. Expatriate Plans
Comment: A few commenters urged HHS to exempt expatriate coverage
from the market reform provisions of the Affordable Care Act, including
the guaranteed availability, guaranteed renewability, premium rating,
and rate review provisions, arguing that expatriate plans face special
circumstances and considerations in complying with these provisions of
federal law. For example, commenters stated that expatriate policies
are designed to meet the unique coverage needs of employees while
working outside of the United States (and their dependents). Commenters
also noted that the rates for expatriate policies must accommodate the
regulatory requirements and health care costs of other countries;
reflect benefits that are particularly important to expatriates (such
as medical evacuation coverage, war risk coverage, and currency
fluctuation); and maintain global competitiveness with non-U.S. issuers
offering expatriate coverage. Accordingly, commenters recommended that
enrollment in expatriate policies be limited to expatriate employees
and their dependents, and that the rules reflect the unique rating
requirements faced by expatriate plans.
Response: We plan to issue future guidance on the applicability of
the market reform provisions of the Affordable Care Act, including
these final rules, to expatriate policies.
4. State High Risk Pools
Comment: We received several comments as to whether states may
continue their high risk pools beyond 2014. Many commenters supported
state flexibility to transition high risk pools as a means of
minimizing premium disruption and promoting continuity of care. A few
commenters noted that high risk pool enrollees will have a right to
guaranteed availability and stated such individuals must not be
prohibited from enrolling in other coverage offered in the individual
market, particularly through the Exchange. Some commenters suggested
that enrollees who maintain high risk pool coverage should be eligible
for premium tax credits and cost-sharing reductions and notified about
new coverage options. Other commenters requested clarification about
whether state high risk pools are subject to the market reform
provisions of the Affordable Care Act.
Response: Many states currently have high risk insurance pools as
their state alternative mechanism to provide insurance coverage for
individuals who meet enrollment criteria and who do not otherwise have
access to group or individual health insurance coverage. Since state
high risk pool coverage is not provided through insurance and is not
group health plan coverage, state high risk pool coverage is not
subject to title XXVII of the PHS Act. However, some states, as their
state alternative mechanism, require issuers (or certain issuers of
last resort) to guarantee the availability of a product or specific
benefit design. If the state alternative mechanism is individual market
insurance coverage, it is subject to title XXVII of the PHS Act.
Individuals enrolled in state high risk pools will have the same rights
as others to guaranteed availability for any products offered inside
and outside of the state Exchange, and states may not prevent
individuals from moving to other products or to a state's Exchange.
States will continue to have the discretion to determine whether each
state continues to have a high risk pool in order to ease the
transition of enrollees to other products, consistent with the February
1, 2013 Minimum Essential Coverage proposed rule, which proposed to
designate state high risk pools as minimum essential coverage for a
period of time to be determined by the Secretary.\19\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\19\ 78 FR 7348.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 13426]]
III. Modification of Effective Date for Certain Provisions
The Congressional Review Act, 5 U.S.C. 801(a)(3), ordinarily
requires that the effective date of a ``major rule'' such as this final
rule be at least 60 days from the date of publication. However, 5
U.S.C. 808(2) permits the federal agency promulgating the rule to
determine an effective date, notwithstanding this otherwise applicable
60-day requirement, when an agency ``for good cause finds (and
incorporates the finding and a brief statement of reasons therefore in
the rule issued) that notice and public procedure thereon are
impracticable, unnecessary, or contrary to the public interest.'' While
this final rule is generally effective 60 days from the date of
publication, we have determined for 45 CFR 147.103, which specifies the
timing for state reporting of rating factors, and the amendments to 45
CFR part 154 governing rate review, an effective date 30 days from the
date of publication of this rule.
Section 147.103 directs states to report to HHS within 30 days
after publication of this rule certain rating factors required by Sec.
147.102, including but not limited to: the age rating ratio if a state
adopts a ratio narrower than 3:1 for adults; the tobacco rating ratio
if a state adopts a ratio narrower than 1.5 to 1; a uniform age rating
curve if a state adopts any; and geographical rating areas if the state
establishes any. It is imperative that HHS receive these data from the
states within 30 days of publication of this final rule in order to
implement timely the risk adjustment methodology set forth in section
1343 of the Affordable Care Act and its implementing regulations.
Should these data not be received within 30 days of publication of this
final rule, HHS's risk adjustment scores for use on January 1, 2014
would have to be calculated using assumed rating factors based on the
limitations set forth in this final rule, which could result in
inaccurate risk adjustment payments to health insurance issuers in
states that have developed different rating factors. This may in turn
lead to imbalance in the insurance markets in those states with
different rating factors. Furthermore, health insurance issuers are
required to submit their applications by April 30, 2013 to the
Exchanges to be certified as QHPs in 2014. In order to submit accurate
information on their applications, the issuers will need to know what
rating factors in a state will be effective starting January 1, 2014.
The amendments to 45 CFR part 154 revise the timeline for states to
propose state-specific thresholds for review and approval by HHS. The
amendments also direct health insurance issuers to submit data relating
to proposed rate increases in a standardized format specified by the
Secretary of HHS, and modify criteria and factors for states to have an
effective rate review program. These changes are necessary to reflect
the new market reform provisions and to fulfill the statutory
requirement beginning in 2014 that the Secretary, in conjunction with
the states, monitor premium increases of health insurance coverage
offered through an Exchange and outside of an Exchange. The provisions
are also designed to streamline data collection for issuers, states,
Exchanges, and HHS. Since health insurance issuers will be submitting
their 2014 rate filings in states starting April 1, 2013, these
amendments must be effective at that point for consumers to experience
the full benefits in 2014 of the rate review process both inside and
outside the Exchanges.
Furthermore, HHS and the states must have the ability to collect,
beginning April 1, 2013, rate data from health insurance issuers
relating to the 2014 market reforms to ensure effective implementation
of the market reforms starting January 1, 2014. For example, if the
data submission requirement for all rate increases is not in place by
April 1, 2013, states and HHS will have very little ability to gauge
whether issuers have combined all of their products into a single risk
pool in either the individual or small group markets. Issuers could,
therefore, implement different index rates and allowable modifiers
without fear of being observed by a regulator for some time, which
would have the potential effect of issuers continuing to rate for
health status in 2014.
Accordingly, for the reasons stated above, 45 CFR 147.103 of this
final rule and the amendments to 45 CFR part 154 are effective 30 days
after publication of this final rule.
IV. Provisions of the Final Regulations
For the most part, this final rule incorporates the provisions of
the proposed rule. Those provisions of this final rule that differ from
the proposed rule are as follows:
Changes to Sec. 147.102 (Fair health insurance premiums)
Clarifies that tobacco use means use of tobacco on average
four or more times per week within no longer than the past six months,
including all tobacco products but excluding religious and ceremonial
uses of tobacco. Further, tobacco use must be defined in terms of when
a tobacco product was last used. Additionally, clarifies that issuers
may vary rates for tobacco use only with respect to individuals who may
legally use tobacco under federal and state law.
Gives states additional flexibility to establish
geographic rating areas that would be presumed adequate.
Modifies the default rating area standard such that there
would be one rating area for each metropolitan statistical area and one
rating area comprising all non-metropolitan statistical areas in the
state.
Clarifies the criteria that HHS will use to determine
whether proposed state rating areas are adequate.
Clarifies that the cap on the number of individuals under
age 21 taken into account when computing the family premium applies to
the three oldest ``covered children'' under age 21.
Deletes language in paragraphs (a)(1)(iii) and (a)(1)(iv)
providing that states may use narrower age and tobacco use factors to
avoid confusion.
Consolidates state reporting requirements in a new Sec.
147.103.
Changes to Sec. 147.104 (Guaranteed availability of coverage)
Adds events triggering limited open enrollment periods in
the individual market, consistent with Exchange special enrollment
periods, as well as a one-time limited open enrollment period for the
2014 calendar year for individuals with non-calendar year individual
policies.
Establishes 60-day special and limited open enrollment
periods in the individual market; maintains 30-day special enrollment
periods in the group market.
Ensures consistency of the prohibition against employing
discriminatory marketing practices and benefit designs with the
prohibition on discrimination with respect to EHB in Sec. 156.125 and
the non-discrimination standards applicable to QHPs under Sec.
156.200(e).
Changes to Sec. 147.145 (Student health insurance coverage)
Exempts student health insurance coverage from the single
risk pool requirements of Affordable Care Act section 1312(c).
Changes to Sec. 154.215 (Submission of Rate Filing Justification)
Clarifies that if any product is subject to a rate
increase, an issuer must submit a Rate Filing Justification for all
products in the single risk pool, including new or discontinuing
products.
Replaces the term ``standardized data template'' with
``unified rate review template'' each place it appears.
[[Page 13427]]
Changes to Sec. 156.80 (Single risk pool)
Clarifies that the index rate for the single risk pool
must be adjusted on a market-wide basis for Exchange user fees and may
be adjusted at the plan-level for distribution costs and other
administrative costs.
Changes to Sec. 156.155 (Enrollment in catastrophic plans)
Makes a technical correction in paragraph (c) of this
section that each enrolled individual in the case of a catastrophic
plan covering multiple individuals must meet the eligibility criteria
outlined in paragraph ``(a)(5)'' of this section.
V. Collection of Information Requirements
In the November 26, 2012 proposed rule (77 FR 70584), we solicited
public comments on each of the sections identified as containing
information collection requirements (ICRs). In this final rule, we are
restating our summary of the information collection requirements and
providing summaries of the comments received and our responses to those
comments. Regarding wage data, we generally used data from the Bureau
of Labor Statistics to derive average labor costs (including fringe
benefits) for estimating the burden associated with the ICRs.
A. ICRs Regarding State Disclosures (Sec. 147.102(b), Sec.
147.102(e), Sec. 147.103, Sec. 156.80(c))
The final rule directs states to submit to CMS certain information
as applicable about their rating and risk pooling requirements. A state
will inform CMS if it adopts a narrower age rating ratio than 3:1 or
adopts a narrower rating ratio for tobacco use than 1.5:1. A state will
also submit information to CMS regarding state-established geographic
rating areas and state-established uniform age rating curves. A state
with pure community rating will submit information to CMS about its
uniform family tiers and corresponding multipliers, if any. A state
will also inform CMS if it requires premiums to be based on average
enrollee amounts in the small group market (Sec. 147.103). Finally, a
state will inform CMS if it elects to merge its individual and small
group market risk pools (Sec. 156.80(c)). Because we do not know how
many states will choose to establish their own geographical rating
areas, age rating curves, and family tier structures; adopt narrower
age or tobacco rating factors; require premiums to be based on average
enrollee amounts in the small group market; or merge their individual
and small group market risk pools, we have estimated the burden for one
state.
The burden associated with this requirement is the time involved
for states to provide to CMS information on the rating factors and
requirements applicable to their small group and individual markets. If
a state adopts narrower rating ratios for age or tobacco use, or
chooses to merge their individual and small group market risk pools,
the state will inform CMS. We estimate that it will take 20 minutes for
a state to prepare and submit a report to CMS for each of these
disclosures, for a total burden of one hour and a cost of approximately
$31 for all three reports combined.
This final rule provides that a state's rating areas must be based
on the geographic divisions of counties, three-digit zip codes, or MSAs
and non-MSAs and will be presumed adequate if either of the following
conditions are met: (1) As of January 1, 2013, the state had
established by law, rule, regulation, bulletin, or other executive
action uniform geographic rating areas for the entire state; or (2)
After January 1, 2013, the state establishes by law, rule, regulation,
bulletin, or other executive action for the entire state no more
geographic rating areas than the number of MSAs in the state plus one.
We anticipate that states that currently have geographical rating areas
will retain them. For states that establish rating areas, we estimate
that it will take one hour for a state to prepare and submit a report
to CMS on its geographical rating areas, for a burden of one hour and a
cost of approximately $31.
If a state develops an age rating curve, the state will report the
state's age rating curve to CMS. We anticipate that HHS's default
standard age rating curve will apply in most states. Only one state
commented that it would establish its own age rating curve. For states
that designate their own curve, we estimate that it will take three
hours for each state to prepare and submit a report on its age rating
curve, for a burden of three hours and a cost of $93.
If a state is community rated and designates a uniform family tier
structure with corresponding multipliers, the state will report family
tier structure information to CMS. We estimate that very few states
will designate family tier structures and that it will take one hour to
prepare and submit a report to CMS. The burden for reporting family
tier structure information is estimated to be one hour, and a cost of
approximately $31.
If a state requires premiums in the small group market to be based
on average enrollee amounts, it will submit that information to CMS. We
estimate that it will take one hour for a state to prepare and submit
the report on small group market premiums to CMS, for a burden of one
hour and a cost of approximately $31.
We assume that each report will be prepared by clerical staff (at a
cost of approximately $31 per hour) and will be reviewed by a senior
manager (using 1 hour of labor at approximately $65 per hour) prior to
submission to CMS. The total burden for all disclosures is eight hours
(seven by clerical staff and one by a senior manager) and approximately
$279 per state, if a state needs to prepare and submit a report in all
of these areas.
We expect that states that already have established a narrower age
or tobacco rating ratio, family tier structure and requirements for
small group market premiums to be based on average enrollee amounts,
will retain them and simply incur the burden of reporting them. Based
on our interactions with state officials and review of publicly
available studies prepared by actuarial firms on the impact of the
Affordable Care Act on the health insurance market in various states,
we believe that many states have already studied the issue of merging
their individual and small group market risk pools and would only incur
the burden of reporting. We anticipate that few states will choose to
establish their own age rating curve or establish new geographical
rating areas and incur related administrative costs. If a state chooses
to establish its own age rating curve (Sec. 147.102(e)), it is likely
to engage an actuarial consultant. We estimate that it will require
approximately 100 hours of effort by an actuary (at a cost of $225 per
hour) and 23 hours of combined labor by state actuaries (10 hours at a
cost of approximately $50 per hour) and senior management (13 hours at
a cost of approximately $65 an hour) to establish an age curve. The
total burden will be 123 hours and approximately $24,000. If a state
chooses to establish geographical rating areas (Sec. 147.102(b)), if
they haven't already done so, staff actuaries are likely to conduct an
analysis and prepare a report for management (30 hours at a cost of
approximately $50 per hour) and senior management will review the
reports and make a decision (2 hours at a cost of approximately $65 an
hour). The total burden would be 32 hours and approximately $1,600.
B. ICRs Regarding Rate Increase Disclosure and Review (Sec. 154.215,
Sec. 154.301)
This final rule directs that health insurance issuers use a unified
rate review template, as specified by the
[[Page 13428]]
Secretary, to report information about a proposed rate increase to CMS.
States with effective rate review programs have the option to
incorporate this template into their rate review process. The existing
information collection requirement (OMB Control Number 0938-1141)
includes a standardized template that is currently used by issuers
seeking rate increases to submit data to CMS. CMS published an updated
rate review template for public comment, in accordance with the
Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (44 U.S.C. chapter 35).
Health insurance issuers seeking rate increases will submit data
using the unified rate review template and will incur administrative
costs to prepare and submit the data. Based on CMS's experience with
the 2011 MLR reporting year, there are 2,010 health insurance issuers
(company/state combinations, including territories) offering coverage
in the individual market in all states and 1,050 issuers offering
coverage in the small group market in all states, while there are 2,294
unique issuers offering products in one or both markets. Most issuers
already have to provide this information to their respective states. We
anticipate a total of 7,650 submissions for rate review increases
annually in both markets. Based on past experience, we anticipate that
approximately 1,200 of these submissions will be for rate increases at
or above the subject to review threshold and the remaining 6,450
submissions will be for rate increases below the review threshold. We
assume that each submission will require 11 hours of work by an actuary
(at a cost of $225 per hour), including minimal time required for
recordkeeping. The total cost for all submissions will be approximately
$19 million. Therefore, the increase in administrative costs for all
issuers seeking rate increases below the review threshold will be
approximately $16 million, with an average of $7,000 per issuer. It
should be noted that there are administrative efficiencies gained by
helping issuers to avoid significant duplication of effort for filings
subject to review by using the same standardized template for all
issuers offering health insurance coverage in the small group or
individual markets across all states, and because the vast majority of
states currently require all rate increases to be filed. These
efficiencies are not quantified in this rule.
A few commenters remarked that the costs related to rate review
template submission have been underestimated. An industry group also
provided estimates of the number of submissions and related costs.
According to industry feedback received by CMS, the current rate review
template being used requires only one to four hours of actuarial labor
to complete. The unified rate review template includes more data and we
estimate that it would take an actuary 11 hours, on average, to
complete. Issuers will have to submit only one consolidated report for
all their products in a market, unlike the current template in use
which requires a separate submission for each product.
Additionally, issuers seeking rate increases may need to adjust
their systems to provide the data required in the unified rate review
template and incur one-time costs. One commenter provided a range of
anticipated costs obtained from an industry survey. However, we do not
expect many issuers to undertake major systems changes to prepare the
rate review submissions. Most of the data elements specified in the new
template are currently captured by issuers and most of the changes will
involve categorizing the data into new categories and aggregating the
information to the market level. We estimate that an issuer would need,
on average, 40 hours of work by a programmer (at a cost of
approximately $50 per hour) to develop a program that will extract the
necessary data from its systems. The total one-time cost to all issuers
for developing a program to extract the necessary data will be
approximately $4.6 million, with an average cost of approximately
$2,000 per issuer.
For filings subject to review, states with effective rate review
programs may use the data submissions in their reviews; however, this
is not expected to increase review costs.
Based on comments received and discussions with issuers and states,
we have made changes to the proposed template to address concerns that
have been raised. We have both removed data elements from the uniform
rate review template and identified information that will be optional
in the first two years of applicability. We estimate that through these
changes we have reduced the number of required data elements by
approximately 45 percent. States may collect additional information
above this baseline. We expect that the unified rate review template
will not significantly increase the burden on states or industry;
rather, the data requested in the template will assist states and
industry in complying with the market rules.
In addition, the final rule gives states with effective rate review
programs the discretion to choose whether to incorporate the unified
rate review template in their rate review processes or whether to use
their own rate review templates. Issuers in states with effective rate
review programs that do not require the federal template will still be
required to submit information about all rate increases to CMS on the
template.
Table V.1--Annual Reporting, Recordkeeping and Disclosure Burden*
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hourly
Burden per Total labor cost Total labor Total capital/
Regulation Section(s) Number of Responses response annual of cost of maintenance Total cost
respondents (hours) burden reporting reporting ($) costs ($) ($)
(hours) ($)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Age Ratio, Tobacco Ratio, Rating 1 8 1 8 35 279 0 279
areas, Family Tier, Small Group
Market Premium, Age rating curve:
Sec. 147.103; Risk Pool Merger:
Sec. 156.80 (c)....................
Age curve (Sec. 147.102(e))......... 1 1 123 123 194 24,000 0 24,000
[[Page 13429]]
Geographical Rating Area (Sec. 1 1 32 32 51 1,600 0 1,600
147.102(b))..........................
Rate Increase Disclosure and Review 2,294 7,650 11 84,150 225 19,000,000 0 19,000,000
(Sec. 154.215, Sec. 154.301) **..
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total............................. .............. ........... ........... 84,313 ........... 19,025,879 .............. 19,025,879
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Not included in this table is a 4.6 million upfront burden related to rate increase disclosures.
** Of the $19 million labor cost of reporting, only $16.3 million is attributable to this rule.
We have submitted an information collection request to OMB for
review and approval of the ICRs contained in this final rule. The
requirements are not effective until approved by OMB and assigned a
valid OMB control number.
VI. Regulatory Impact Analysis
In accordance with the provisions of Executive Order 12866, this
final rule was reviewed by the Office of Management and Budget.
A. Summary
As stated earlier in this preamble, this final rule implements the
Affordable Care Act's requirements on health insurance coverage related
to fair health insurance premiums, guaranteed availability, guaranteed
renewability, single risk pools, and catastrophic plans. These
provisions are generally effective for plan or policy years beginning
on or after January 1, 2014. In addition, this final rule amends the
standards for health insurance issuers and states regarding reporting,
utilization, and collection of data under the rate review program.
CMS has crafted this final rule to implement the protections
intended by Congress in an economically efficient manner. We have
examined the effects of this final rule as required by Executive Order
13563 (76 FR 3821, January 21, 2011), Executive Order 12866 (58 FR
51735, September 1993, Regulatory Planning and Review), the Regulatory
Flexibility Act (RFA) (September 19, 1980, Pub. L. 96-354), the
Unfunded Mandates Reform Act of 1995 (Pub. L. 104-4), Executive Order
13132 on Federalism, and the Congressional Review Act (5 U.S.C.
804(2)). In accordance with OMB Circular A-4, CMS has quantified the
benefits, costs, and transfers where possible, and has also provided a
qualitative discussion of the benefits, costs, and transfers that may
stem from this final rule.
B. Executive Orders 13563 and 12866
Executive Order 12866 (58 FR 51735) directs agencies to assess all
costs and benefits of available regulatory alternatives and, if
regulation is necessary, to select regulatory approaches that maximize
net benefits (including potential economic, environmental, public
health and safety effects; distributive impacts; and equity). Executive
Order 13563 (76 FR 3821, January 21, 2011) is supplemental to and
reaffirms the principles, structures, and definitions governing
regulatory review as established in Executive Order 12866.
Section 3(f) of Executive Order 12866 defines a ``significant
regulatory action'' as an action that is likely to result in a final
rule--(1) Having an annual effect on the economy of $100 million or
more in any one year, or adversely and materially affecting a sector of
the economy, productivity, competition, jobs, the environment, public
health or safety, or state, local or tribal governments or communities
(also referred to as ``economically significant''); (2) creating a
serious inconsistency or otherwise interfering with an action taken or
planned by another agency; (3) materially altering the budgetary
impacts of entitlement grants, user fees, or loan programs or the
rights and obligations of recipients thereof; or (4) raising novel
legal or policy issues arising out of legal mandates, the President's
priorities, or the principles set forth in the Executive Order.
A regulatory impact analysis (RIA) must be prepared for rules with
economically significant effects (for example, $100 million or more in
any 1 year), and a ``significant'' regulatory action is subject to
review by the OMB. OMB has designated this final rule as a
``significant regulatory action.'' Even though it is uncertain whether
it is likely to have economic impacts of $100 million or more in any
one year, CMS has provided an assessment of the potential costs,
benefits, and transfers associated with this final regulation.
1. Need for Regulatory Action
Sections 1302(e) and 1312(c) of the Patient Protection and
Affordable Care Act (Affordable Care Act), and sections 2701, 2702, and
2703 of the Public Health Service Act (PHS Act), as added and amended
by the Affordable Care Act, create certain standards related to fair
health insurance premiums, guaranteed availability, guaranteed
renewability, risk pools, and catastrophic plans applicable to non-
grandfathered health insurance coverage starting in 2014. These final
regulations provide the necessary guidance to implement these important
consumer protections. The current individual and small group health
insurance markets generally are viewed as dysfunctional, placing
consumers at a disadvantage due to the high cost of health insurance
coverage, resulting from factors such as lack of competition, adverse
selection, and limited transparency. In addition to affordability
concerns, many people have difficulty finding and enrolling in coverage
options. If employer-based coverage is not available, a person may find
that affordable individual market coverage is not available due to
medical underwriting. The provisions of this final rule, combined with
other provisions in the Affordable Care Act, will improve the
functioning of both the individual and the small group markets and make
insurance affordable and accessible to millions of Americans who
currently do not have affordable options available to them. In
addition, this final rule would amend the existing rate review
standards to reflect the new market conditions in 2014.
[[Page 13430]]
2. Summary of Impacts
In accordance with OMB Circular A-4, Table VI.1 below depicts an
accounting statement summarizing CMS's assessment of the benefits,
costs, and transfers associated with this regulatory action. The period
covered by the RIA is 2013-2017.
CMS anticipates that the provisions of these final regulations
would ensure increased access and improve affordability of health
insurance coverage in the individual and small group markets.
Individuals who are currently unable to obtain affordable coverage
because of their medical history, health status, gender, or age will be
able to obtain such coverage under these final rules, along with other
provisions of the Affordable Care Act, leading to an increase in the
number of people with health insurance. Newly insured individuals and
individuals with expanded coverage will have increased access to health
care, improving utilization of preventive care and health outcomes and
protection from the risk of catastrophic medical expenditures, leading
to financial security. In addition, an issuer seeking a rate increase
will submit data and documentation about the rate increase using a
unified rate review template, which will provide CMS the data necessary
for monitoring rate increases. In accordance with Executive Order
12866, CMS expects that the benefits of this final regulatory action
justify the costs.
Table VI.1--Accounting Table
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative:
Benefits:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Increase in enrollment in the individual and small group market leading to improved access to health care for
the previously uninsured, especially individuals with medical conditions, which will result in improved health
and protection from the risk of catastrophic medical expenditures
* A common marketing standard covering the entire insurance market, reducing adverse selection, improving market
oversight and competition and reducing search costs for consumers.
* Decrease in administrative costs for issuers due to elimination of medical underwriting and coverage
exclusions.
* Prevent duplication of effort for rate review filings subject to review by setting forth a unified rate review
template for all issuers offering health insurance coverage in the small group or individual markets.
* Provide state departments of insurance with more capacity to conduct meaningful rate review and approval of
products sold inside and outside an Exchange by using a unified rate review template.
* Extend the availability and affordability of student health coverage as a transitional policy.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Costs.............................. Estimate............. Year dollar Discount rate Period covered
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annualized Monetized ($/year)...... $ 17.3 million....... 2012 7% 2013-2017
$17.3 million........ 2012 3% 2013-2017
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Administrative costs related to submission of data by issuers seeking rate increases below the rate review
threshold, one-time fixed costs to issuers related to rate review data extraction, disclosure of state rating
requirements and costs incurred by states choosing to establish rating areas and age rating curves.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative:
* Additional costs incurred by issuers to comply with provisions in the final rule.
* Costs related to possible increases in utilization of health care for the newly insured.
* Costs incurred by states for disclosure of rate increases, if applicable.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Transfers:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative:
* Lower rates for individuals in the individual and small group market who are older and/or in relatively poor
health, and women; and potentially higher rates for some young men which will be mitigated by provisions such
as premium tax credits, risk stabilization programs, access to catastrophic plans, and the minimum essential
coverage provision.
* Reduction in uncompensated care for providers who treat the uninsured and increase in payments from issuers.
* Decrease in out-of-pocket expenditures by the newly insured and increase in health care spending by issuers,
which may be more than offset by an increase in premium revenue.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Anticipated Benefits, Costs and Transfers
In developing this final rule, CMS carefully considered its
potential effects including both costs and benefits. One commenter
suggested providing additional quantitative estimates of benefits,
costs and transfers. Because of data limitations, CMS did not attempt
to quantify all of the benefits, costs, and transfers resulting from
this final rule. Nonetheless, CMS was able to identify several
potential impacts which are discussed qualitatively below.
There are diverse state laws and industry practices currently in
place that result in wide variation in premium rates (henceforth
referred to as ``rates'') and coverage for individual and group health
insurance markets. Regarding the individual market, only five states
have both guaranteed availability for at least some products and
modified or pure community rating requirements, while in other states,
issuers can deny health insurance coverage or charge higher premiums to
people with medical conditions.\20\ Currently, 11 states and the
District of Columbia have rate bands, which allow issuers to vary rates
only within a certain range of the average rate, two states prohibit
rating based on age, and five states prohibit rating based on tobacco
use in the individual market.\21\ In the small group market, 36 states
and the District of Columbia have rate bands, 12 states have community
rating requirements, two states do not allow rating based on age and 16
do not allow rating based on tobacco use. In many states, women are
[[Page 13431]]
charged higher premiums than men: Only 14 states prohibit gender rating
in the individual market while 15 states do not allow gender rating in
the small group market. Of the states that prohibit gender rating in
the individual market, only three of those states require maternity
coverage in all policies, meaning that women in the other states can be
charged additional premiums for maternity coverage.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\20\ GAO, Private Health Insurance: Estimates of Individuals
with Preexisting Conditions Range from 36 Million to 122 Million,
GAO-12-439, March 2012.
\21\ Kaiser Family Foundation, Focus on Health Reform: Health
Insurance Market Reforms: Rate Restrictions, June 2012.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Currently, only five states have guaranteed availability in the
individual market. Studies show that 48 states require guaranteed
renewability in the small group market while all 50 states provide some
level of guaranteed renewability in the individual market. In addition,
HIPAA already provides guaranteed renewability of coverage to
individuals and employers, irrespective of state law. Therefore, this
provision is not expected to have any significant effect in that
regard.
Starting in 2014, issuers in the individual and small group markets
will only be allowed to vary rates based on age and tobacco use within
specified ranges, family size, and geography (the fair health insurance
premium requirement). Issuers generally will accept every individual
and employer that applies for health insurance coverage (the guaranteed
availability requirement), and, subject to certain exceptions, must
also renew or continue health insurance coverage at the option of the
plan sponsor or individual (the guaranteed renewability requirement).
In addition, issuers must have single risk pools for each of the
individual and small group markets, or a single merged risk pool, if a
state so elects, which will include all individuals enrolled in non-
grandfathered plans in the applicable market (the single risk pool
requirement).
The provisions of the final rule will affect the characteristics of
enrollees, enrollment, and premium rates in the individual and small
group markets. In addition, several other related provisions of the
Affordable Care Act that will be effective in 2014, such as
establishment of the Exchanges, premium tax credits, and the minimum
essential coverage provision, will improve access to and affordability
of health insurance coverage. The Congressional Budget Office (CBO)
estimates that, by 2017, the number of uninsured will be reduced by 27
million.\22\ Therefore, it is appropriate to take into consideration
the effect of all these provisions in this analysis, even though not
all of them are the focus of this final rule. It should be noted that
the impact of these provisions may vary between states, because of the
differences in current regulatory frameworks.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\22\ ``CBO's February 2013 Estimate of the Effects of the
Affordable Care Act on Health Insurance,'' Congressional Budget
Office, February 2013.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
A few commenters referred to actuarial studies that include
estimates of premium changes in different states and markets.\23\
Actuarial studies that conclude that premiums will increase for certain
markets or age groups generally do not take into account all the
provisions of the Affordable Care Act and factors that would affect
premiums and also assume that the risk pool will worsen as a result of
these provisions. However, we, along with CBO, anticipate that the risk
pool will improve. Different provisions of the Affordable Care Act can
have opposing effects on premiums. Some of the other provisions, in
addition to the ones mentioned above, that will also affect premiums
are essential health benefits, medical loss ratio requirements, risk
adjustment, temporary risk corridors and the transitional reinsurance
programs. There are also factors such as benefit improvements;
competition among issuers in the Exchanges to be the second lowest cost
silver plan; migration of current membership to more efficient, lower
premium plans due to increased transparency; new plan design offerings
such as Accountable Care Organizations and issuers re-contracting with
providers to obtain lower unit prices due to reduction in uncompensated
or charity care. In addition, studies that focus on premiums do not
take into account the decrease in out-of-pocket costs for consumers.
According to a study, in 2010, 49 million working-age adults spent at
least 10 percent of their income on health insurance premiums and out-
of-pocket costs and 20 million working-age adults' out-of-pocket costs
were so high compared to their income that they were effectively
underinsured.\24\ Increased access will lead to a decrease in out-of-
pocket costs for these individuals.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\23\ For example, studies on the Alaska Individual Market by
Lewis & Ellis, Indiana Individual Market by Milliman, Maine Small
Group Market by Jonathan Gruber & Gorman Actuarial, LLC and
Wisconsin Small Group Market by Jonathan Gruber & Gorman Actuarial,
LLC.
\24\ Sara R. Collins, Invited Testimony: Premium Tax Credits
Under The Affordable Care Act: How They Will Help Millions Of
Uninsured And Underinsured Americans Gain Affordable, Comprehensive
Health Insurance, The Commonwealth Fund, October 27, 2011.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
This final rule directs that health insurance issuers use a unified
rate review template, as specified by the Secretary, to report
information about a proposed rate increase to CMS. States will continue
to have the authority to collect additional information above this
baseline to conduct more thorough reviews or rate monitoring.
a. Benefits
In 2011, 48.6 million people in the United States were
uninsured.\25\ In addition, an estimated 29 million adults were
underinsured in 2010.\26\ Studies have shown that people without health
insurance have reduced access to health care, higher out-of-pocket
costs, higher mortality rates and receive less preventive care.\27\
Uninsured and underinsured people are also more likely to be unable to
pay their medical bills, have medical debt, and experience financial
difficulties.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\25\ Source: U.S. Census Bureau, Current Population Survey, 2012
Annual Social and Economic Supplement, Table HI01. Health Insurance
Coverage Status and Type of Coverage by Selected Characteristics:
2011.
\26\ Cathy Schoen, Michelle M. Doty, Ruth H. Robertson and Sara
R. Collins, Affordable Care Act Reforms Could Reduce The Number Of
Underinsured US Adults by 70 Percent, Health Affairs, 30, no.9
(2011):1762-1771.
\27\ The Henry J. Kaiser Family Foundation, The Uninsured: A
Primer, Key Facts About Americans Without Health Insurance,
Washington, DC, 2011, citing a number of studies on the effects of
being uninsured; ASPE, The Value of Health Insurance: Few of the
Uninsured Have Adequate Resources to Pay Potential Hospital Bills,
2011 (https://aspe.hhs.gov/health/reports/2011/valueofinsurance/rb.shtml); Sara R. Collins, Ruth Robertson, Tracy Garber, and
Michelle M. Doty, The Income Divide in Health Care: How the
Affordable Care Act Will Help Restore Fairness to the U.S. Health
System, The Commonwealth Fund, February 2012 ; J. Doyle, Health
Insurance, Treatment and Outcomes: Using Auto Accidents as Health
Shocks, Review of Economics and Statistics, 87(2): 256-270, 2005 ;
S. Dorn, Uninsured and Dying Because of It: Updating the Institute
of Medicine Analysis on the Impact of Uninsurance on Mortality,
Urban Institute, 2008; Cathy Schoen, Michelle M. Doty, Ruth H.
Robertson and Sara R. Collins, Affordable Care Act Reforms Could
Reduce The Number Of Underinsured US Adults by 70 Percent, Health
Affairs, 30, no.9 (2011):1762-1771.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The provisions of this final rule and other changes implemented by
the Affordable Care Act will increase enrollment in the individual and
small group markets. According to CBO, there will be approximately 26
million enrollees in Exchange coverage by 2017. CBO estimates that, by
2017, the number of uninsured will be reduced by 27 million.\28\ Access
to catastrophic plans is likely to further increase the number of
insured. The provisions of this final rule will also preserve
affordability and availability of student health insurance coverage.
Newly insured individuals and individuals with expanded coverage will
have
[[Page 13432]]
access to better health care and experience a reduction in out-of-
pocket costs. Ample research demonstrates that access to insurance
coverage improves utilization of preventive care, improves health
outcomes, and creates less financial debt, which would lead to better
financial security.\29\ The State of Massachusetts passed similar
health reforms in 2006, and now has the lowest uninsured rate in the
country. In 2011, only 3.4 percent of Massachusetts residents were
uninsured.\30\ This has resulted in increased access to health care,
including preventive care and fewer individuals with high out-of-pocket
spending.\31\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\28\ ``CBO's February 2013 Estimate of the Effects of the
Affordable Care Act on Health Insurance Coverage,'' Congressional
Budget Office, February 2013.
\29\ T. Gross and Notowidigdo, Health Insurance and the Consumer
Bankruptcy Decision: Evidence from Expansions of Medicaid, Journal
of Public Economics, 95(7-8):767-778, 2011; J. Doyle, Health
Insurance, Treatment and Outcomes: Using Auto Accidents as Health
Shocks, Review of Economics and Statistics, 87(2): 256-270, 2005;
Amy Finkelstein, et al., The Oregon Health Insurance Experiment:
Evidence from the First Year, National Bureau of Economic Research
Working Paper No. 17190, July 2011; Institute of Medicine, Care
without coverage: Too little, too late, National Academies Press,
2002; J. Ayanian et al., Unmet Health Needs of Uninsured Adults in
the United States, JAMA 284(16):2061-9, 2000; Andrew P. Wilper, et
al., Health Insurance and Mortality in US Adults. American Journal
of Public Health, 99(12) 2289-2295, 2009; S. Dorn, Uninsured and
Dying Because of It: Updating the Institute of Medicine Analysis on
the Impact of Uninsurance on Mortality, Urban Institute, 2008; Jack
Hadley, Insurance Coverage, Medical Care Use, and Short-term Health
Changes Following an Unintentional Injury or the Onset of a Chronic
Condition, JAMA. 2007;297(10):1073-1084. doi: 10.1001/
jama.297.10.1073; K. Cook et al., Does major illness cause financial
catastrophe?, Health Services Research 45, no. 2, 2010.
\30\ Source: U.S. Census Bureau, Current Population Survey, 2012
Annual Social and Economic Supplement, Table HI06. Health Insurance
Coverage Status by State for All People: 2011.
\31\ Kaiser Family Foundation, Focus on Health Reform:
Massachusetts Health Care Reform: Six Years Later, June 2012.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Research shows that individuals in relatively poor health
experience difficulty obtaining health insurance coverage. This results
in lack of adequate access to health care and higher out-of-pocket
expenses for these individuals. According to a recent study by U.S.
Government Accountability Office (GAO), between 36 million and 122
million adults age 19 to 64 years old (or between 20 and 66 percent of
the adult population) have medical conditions that could result in
issuers denying them coverage or charging higher premiums.\32\ Of
these, an estimated 88 to 89 percent live in states that do not have
insurance protections provided by the fair health insurance premium and
guaranteed availability provisions of the Affordable Care Act. The GAO
study estimated that health care expenditures for adults with medical
conditions are, on average, between $1,504 and $4,844 more per year
than for other adults. Similarly, a study by HHS found that there are
between 50 million and 129 million non-elderly individuals with a
medical condition, including between 4 and 17 million children under
age 18, and up to 25 million of these adults and children are
uninsured.\33\ A study found that, in 2010, 35 percent of nonelderly
adults who shopped for health insurance coverage in the individual
market were denied coverage or received coverage exclusions for medical
conditions.\34\ The Affordable Care Act's provision on guaranteed
availability will prohibit issuers from denying coverage to individuals
based on their health status or any other factor, and the provision on
fair insurance premiums will prevent issuers from charging a higher
premium to individuals based on health status. The final rule will
ensure that individuals who would have been denied coverage or charged
excessively high premium rates, for reasons such as medical conditions
or high expected medical costs, will now be able to obtain health
insurance at an affordable cost. In addition, young adults and people
for whom coverage would otherwise be unaffordable will have access to a
catastrophic plan that will have a lower premium, protect against high
out-of-pocket costs, and cover recommended preventive services without
cost sharing.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\32\ GAO, Private Health Insurance: Estimates of Individuals
with Preexisting Conditions Range from 36 Million to 122 Million,
GAO-12-439, March 2012.
\33\ ASPE, At Risk: Preexisting Conditions Could Affect 1 in 2
Americans: 129 Million People Could Be Denied Affordable Coverage
Without Health Reform, November 2011.
\34\ Sara R. Collins, Invited Testimony: Premium Tax Credits
Under The Affordable Care Act: How They Will Help Millions Of
Uninsured And Underinsured Americans Gain Affordable, Comprehensive
Health Insurance, The Commonwealth Fund, October 27, 2011.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The provisions of this final rule and other changes implemented by
the Affordable Care Act will increase enrollment in the individual
market. An analysis by CBO and the staff of the Joint Committee on
Taxation (JCT) \35\ estimated that the characteristics of enrollees in
the individual market will be significantly different, especially due
to the addition of people who would have been uninsured in the absence
of the Affordable Care Act. CBO and JCT estimated that relatively more
new enrollees in the individual market would be younger and healthier
and likely to use less medical care, and the addition of new enrollees
would result in average premium rates in the market being 7 to 10
percent lower in 2016 compared to what they would have been in the
absence of the Affordable Care Act, all else held constant. According
to CBO and JCT, the characteristics of people in the small group market
would change slightly, and projected premium rate changes could
decrease up to 1 percent.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\35\ Congressional Budget Office, Letter to Honorable Evan Bayh,
providing an Analysis of Health Insurance Premiums Under the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act, November 30, 2009.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Currently, health insurance issuers may maintain several blocks of
business, or ``pools,'' for their individual and small group market
business. Most states place some restrictions on the number of small
group blocks of business. However, the individual market generally has
not been subject to similar restrictions. In the past, some issuers
used separate pools to segment risks, resulting in large rate increases
for less-healthy enrollees. A single risk pool will tend to lower rates
for relatively unhealthy participants in the individual market by
including younger, healthier individuals in the pool and ensuring that
newer and more long-term policyholders are pooled together. In the
small group market, a single risk pool will stabilize rates.
The guaranteed availability provision may result in some adverse
selection--individuals with poor health who would have been denied
coverage before in some states will now be able to obtain health
insurance. However, according to CBO and JCT,\36\ adverse selection
will be mitigated principally by the minimum essential coverage
provision and the availability of premium tax credits, which will make
insurance affordable for millions of Americans for whom it is currently
unaffordable. Other factors such as fixed open enrollment periods will
also help to mitigate adverse selection. The Affordable Care Act also
establishes a transitional reinsurance program, a temporary risk
corridor program, and a permanent risk adjustment program, which will
provide payments to issuers providing coverage to high-risk
individuals, to mitigate the potential effects of adverse selection.
These programs will provide payment stability to issuers and reduce
uncertainty in insurance risk in the individual market and in the small
[[Page 13433]]
group market, in the case of the permanent risk adjustment program.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\36\ Congressional Budget Office, Letter to Honorable Evan Bayh
providing An Analysis of Health Insurance Premiums Under the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act, November 30, 2009.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Administrative costs for issuers will be lowered because of the
elimination of medical underwriting and the ban on coverage exclusions.
Costs should decrease for processing new applications for coverage and
implementing the coverage exclusions in the individual and small group
markets. This, in turn, could contribute to lower premium rates.
The final rule also requires all health insurance issuers marketing
group or individual health insurance coverage to comply with the same
marketing standards as issuers offering QHPs within the Exchanges. This
minimizes the potential for the adverse selection that could result if
plans sold through Exchanges were subject to different marketing
standards from plans sold outside of the Exchanges. A common standard
covering the entire insurance market will also ensure consistency in
market oversight, increase competition, and reduce search costs for
consumers.\37\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\37\ R. Cebul et al., Unhealthy Insurance Markets: Search
Frictions and the Cost and Quality of Health Insurance, American
Economic Review 101(5): 1842-1847, 2011.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The amendments to the rate review standards will help avoid
significant issuer duplication of effort for filings subject to review
by using the same standardized template for all issuers offering health
insurance coverage in the small group or individual markets.
Additionally, the use of the unified rate review template will provide
the necessary information to conduct the review and approval of
products sold inside and outside an Exchange, monitor rates to detect
patterns that could signal market disruption, and oversee the market-
wide rules.
b. Costs
Under the final rule, issuers will likely incur some one-time,
fixed costs in order to comply with the provisions of this final rule,
including administrative expenditures for systems and software updates
and changes in marketing. In addition, states may incur costs in order
to establish geographic rating areas and uniform age rating curves. We
do not anticipate that many states will establish their own age curve:
Only one state has indicated that it would establish its own age rating
curve. As discussed in section V. of the preamble, we estimate that a
state would incur approximately $24,000 in costs to establish its own
age curve. The final rule provides that a state's rating areas must be
based on the geographic divisions of counties, three-digit zip codes,
or MSAs and non-MSAs and will be presumed adequate if either of the
following conditions are met: (1) As of January 1, 2013, the state had
established by law, rule, regulation, bulletin, or other executive
action uniform geographic rating areas for the entire state; or (2)
After January 1, 2013, the state establishes by law, rule, regulation,
bulletin, or other executive action for the entire state no more
geographic rating areas than the number of MSAs in the state plus one.
States have the option to seek approval from CMS of a greater number of
rating areas as long as the areas are based on counties, three-digit
zip codes, or MSAs and non-MSAs. We anticipate that few states will
incur costs related to establishing rating areas and estimate that
related costs will be approximately $1,600 each for those that do.
In addition to these administrative costs, insurance coverage can
lead to increased utilization of health services for individuals who
become newly insured. While a portion of this increased utilization may
be economically inefficient, studies that estimated the effects of
Medicare found that the cost of this inefficiency is likely more than
offset by the benefit of risk reduction.\38\ \39\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\38\ Finkelstein, A, McKnight R: ``What Did Medicare Do? The
Initial Impact of Medicare on Mortality and Out Of Pocket Medical
Spending '' Journal of Public Economics 2008, 92:1644-1668.
\39\ Finkelstein, A., ``The Aggregate Effects of Health
Insurance: Evidence from the Introduction of Medicare,'' National
Bureau of Economic Research. Working Paper No. 11619, Sept, 2005.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
The final rule also directs states to provide information to CMS
about their rating and risk pooling practices in several key areas, as
applicable. They include: Age and tobacco rating factors, age rating
curves, family tier structure, composite rating in the small group
market, geographical rating areas, and combined individual and small
group market risk pools. As discussed in section V. of the preamble, we
estimate a total burden of approximately $279 for a state to submit
information in all seven areas. This estimate does not include the
costs of establishing age curves and geographical rating areas, which
are discussed above.
Health insurance issuers seeking rate increases below the subject
to review threshold will submit data using the unified rate review
template and incur administrative costs to prepare and submit the data.
As discussed in section V. of the preamble, we estimate that the
increase in administrative costs for all issuers seeking rate increases
below the review threshold will be approximately $16 million, with an
average of $7,000 per issuer. It should be noted that the vast majority
of states currently require all rate increases to be filed and that
administrative efficiencies can be gained by avoiding significant
issuer duplication of effort for filings subject to review by using the
same standardized template for all issuers offering health insurance
coverage in the small group or individual markets across all states,
and because the vast majority of states currently require all rate
increases to be filed. These efficiencies are not quantified in this
rule.
Additionally, issuers seeking rate increases may need to adjust
their systems to provide the data required in the standardized template
format. The total one-time cost to all issuers for developing a program
to extract the necessary data from their systems is estimated at
approximately $4.6 million, with an average cost of approximately
$2,000 per issuer.
For filings subject to review, states with effective rate review
programs may use the data submissions in their reviews; however, it is
not expected to increase review costs.
c. Transfers
As discussed elsewhere in the preamble, most aspects of rating
methodologies today are left to the discretion of health insurance
issuers, subject to oversight by the states. In most states, issuers
may vary premium rates based on a number of factors such as age, health
status, and gender. In 2010, 60 percent of non-elderly adults who
shopped for insurance coverage in the individual market had difficulty
finding affordable coverage.\40\ Also, as a result of current gender
rating, premium rates for women are significantly higher than those for
men. According to a study by the National Women's Law Center, 92
percent of best-selling plans currently practice gender rating.\41\ The
provision of fair premiums will allow issuers to vary rates based on
only a limited number of factors and within specified ranges. Since
rating based on gender and health will no longer be
[[Page 13434]]
allowed, rates for some older, less healthy adults and women may
decrease. While these rules could increase rates for younger, healthier
adults and for some men, other factors will mitigate the effects of
reformed rating practices, such as choices of and competition among
plans on Exchanges, greater pooling of risks through the Exchanges,
premium tax credits, the risk stabilization programs, access to
catastrophic plans, and the minimum essential coverage provision.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\40\ Sara R. Collins, Invited Testimony: Premium Tax Credits
Under The Affordable Care Act: How They Will Help Millions Of
Uninsured And Underinsured Americans Gain Affordable, Comprehensive
Health Insurance, The Commonwealth Fund, October 27, 2011.
\41\ National Women's Law Center, Turning to Fairness: Insurance
discrimination against women today and the Affordable Care Act,
Washington, DC, March 2012.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
As people who were previously uninsured obtain coverage, their out-
of-pocket expenses are expected to decrease while the issuers' spending
will increase, which is expected to be mitigated by an increase in
premium collections. Expansion in health insurance coverage will also
reduce the amount of uncompensated care for providers that treat the
uninsured. Millions of people without health insurance now use health
care services for which they do not fully pay, shifting the
uncompensated cost of their care to health care providers, people who
do have insurance (in the form of higher premiums), and state and local
governments.\42\ Providers of uncompensated care try to recover the
money by increasing the amounts charged to insurance companies, which
results in higher premiums for individuals with private insurance. The
cost of uncompensated care for the previously uninsured will be
transferred from the providers (for example, hospitals and physicians),
governmental programs and charitable organizations to the individuals
and issuers of their health insurance coverage. Reduction in the number
of uninsured would reduce the amount of uncompensated care and could
lead, all else held equal, to a decrease in private health insurance
rates.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\42\ Families USA, Hidden Health Tax: Americans Pay a Premium
(Washington, DC: Families USA, 2009) (https://familiesusa2.org/assets/pdfs/hidden-health-tax.pdf).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Regulatory Alternatives
Under Executive Order 12866, CMS is required to consider
alternatives to issuing rules and alternative regulatory approaches.
Under the final rule, all issuers in a state and market will use a
uniform age rating curve. CMS considered the alternative of allowing
issuers to set their own rating curve. Under the alternative, issuers
would have more flexibility and might incur lower upfront, fixed costs
(for example, systems and software updates) to comply with the final
rule. A uniform age rating curve, however, improves the accuracy of
risk adjustment, provides for easier price comparisons between
different plans, and simplifies identification of the second lowest
cost silver plan for purposes of determining premium tax credits.
CMS also considered the alternatives of including a tobacco
component for the rating curve and keeping the rating factor for
tobacco use separate from the wellness program rules. These
alternatives would reduce flexibility for the issuers with respect to
rating for tobacco use and would provide no alternative to the tobacco
surcharge which could discourage disclosure of tobacco use. Under the
final rule, a health insurance issuer in the small group market may
implement the tobacco use surcharge only in connection with a wellness
program that effectively allows tobacco users to reduce their premiums
to the level of non-tobacco users by participating in a tobacco
cessation program or satisfying another reasonable alternative. This
provision will help to alleviate underreporting of tobacco use and
promote tobacco cessation strategies that improve health and reduce
health care costs.
CMS believes that the provisions of this final rule strike the best
balance of extending protections of the Affordable Care Act to
consumers while preserving the availability of such coverage and
minimizing market disruptions to the extent possible.
D. Regulatory Flexibility Act
The Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA) requires agencies that issue a
rule to analyze options for regulatory relief of small businesses if a
rule has a significant impact on a substantial number of small
entities. The RFA generally defines a ``small entity'' as--(1) A
proprietary firm meeting the size standards of the Small Business
Administration (SBA), (2) a nonprofit organization that is not dominant
in its field, or (3) a small government jurisdiction with a population
of less than 50,000 (states and individuals are not included in the
definition of ``small entity''). CMS uses as its measure of significant
economic impact on a substantial number of small entities a change in
revenues of more than 3 to 5 percent.
As discussed in the Web Portal final rule published on May 5, 2010
(75 FR 24481), CMS examined the health insurance industry in depth in
the Regulatory Impact Analysis we prepared for the final rule on
establishment of the Medicare Advantage program (69 FR 46866, August 3,
2004). In that analysis it was determined that there were few, if any,
insurance firms underwriting comprehensive health insurance policies
(in contrast, for example, to travel insurance policies or dental
discount policies) that fell below the size thresholds for ``small''
business established by the SBA (currently $7 million in annual
receipts for health issuers).\43\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\43\ Table of Small Business Size Standards Matched to North
American Industry Classification System Codes, effective March 26,
2012, U.S. Small Business Administration, available at www.sba.gov.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
In addition, CMS used the data from Medical Loss Ratio (MLR) annual
report submissions for the 2011 MLR reporting year to develop an
estimate of the number of small entities that offer comprehensive major
medical coverage. These estimates may overstate the actual number of
small health insurance issuers that would be affected, since they do
not include receipts from these companies' other lines of business. It
is estimated that there are 22 small entities each with less than $7
million in earned premiums that offer individual or group health
insurance coverage and would therefore be subject to the requirements
of this final regulation. These small entities account for less than
five percent of the estimated 466 companies offering health insurance
coverage in the individual or group markets in different states that
would be affected by the provisions of this rule. Thirty six percent of
these small entities belong to holding groups, and many if not all of
these small entities are likely to have other lines of business that
would result in their revenues exceeding $7 million. For these reasons,
CMS expects that this final rule will not affect small issuers.
The requirements in this final rule may affect health insurance
premiums in the small group market. We expect that many employers that
purchase health insurance coverage in the small group market would meet
the SBA standard for small entities. As mentioned earlier in the impact
analysis, the impact on premiums is likely to be small and may even
lead to lower rates in the small group market. CMS will monitor premium
changes in the small group market through the rate review program.
E. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act
Section 202 of the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act (UMRA) of 1995
requires that agencies assess anticipated costs and benefits before
issuing any final rule that includes a federal mandate that could
result in any expenditure in any one year by state, local or tribal
governments, in the
[[Page 13435]]
aggregate, or by the private sector, of $100 million in 1995 dollars,
updated annually for inflation. In early 2013, that threshold level is
approximately $139 million.
UMRA does not address the total cost of a final rule. Rather, it
focuses on certain categories of cost, mainly those ``federal mandate''
costs resulting from--(1) imposing enforceable duties on state, local,
or tribal governments, or on the private sector; or (2) increasing the
stringency of conditions in, or decreasing the funding of, state,
local, or tribal governments under entitlement programs.
This final rule gives state governments the option to establish
rating areas within the state and uniform age rating curves. There are
no mandates on local or tribal governments. State governments may incur
administrative cost related to the option of establishing rating areas
and uniform age rating curves. However, if the state government does
not act, CMS will establish the rating areas and uniform age rating
curve in that state. State governments will also incur administrative
costs related to disclosure of rating and pooling requirements to CMS,
which are estimated to be $279 per state. The private sector (for
example, health insurance issuers) will incur administrative costs
related to the implementation of the provisions in this final rule.
This final rule does not impose an unfunded mandate on local or tribal
governments. However, consistent with policy embodied in UMRA, this
final rule has been designed to be low-burden alternative for state,
local and tribal governments, and the private sector while achieving
the objectives of the Affordable Care Act.
F. Federalism
Executive Order 13132 establishes certain requirements that an
agency must meet when it promulgates a final rule that imposes
substantial direct requirement costs on state and local governments,
preempts state law, or otherwise has Federalism implications.
As discussed earlier in the preamble, states are the primary
regulators of health insurance coverage. States will continue to apply
state laws regarding health insurance coverage. However, if any state
law or requirement prevents the application of a federal standard, then
that particular state law or requirement would be preempted. If CMS
determines that a state does not meet the criteria for an effective
rate review program, then CMS will review a rate increase subject to
review to determine whether it is unreasonable. If a state does meet
the criteria, then CMS will adopt that state's determination of whether
a rate increase is unreasonable. States will continue to apply state
law requirements regarding rate and policy filings. State requirements
that are more stringent than the federal requirements would be not be
preempted by this final rule. Accordingly, states have significant
latitude to impose requirements with respect to health insurance
coverage that are more restrictive than the federal law.
In compliance with the requirement of Executive Order 13132 that
agencies examine closely any policies that may have Federalism
implications or limit the policymaking discretion of the states, CMS
has engaged in efforts to consult with and work cooperatively with
affected states, including consulting with National Association of
Insurance Commissioners.
Throughout the process of developing this final rule, CMS has
attempted to balance the states' interests in regulating health
insurance issuers and Congress's intent to provide uniform protections
to consumers in every state. By doing so, it is CMS's view that it has
complied with the requirements of Executive Order 13132. Under the
requirements set forth in section 8(a) of Executive Order 13132, and by
the signatures affixed to this rule, HHS certifies that the CMS Center
for Consumer Information and Insurance Oversight has complied with the
requirements of Executive Order 13132 for the attached final rule in a
meaningful and timely manner.
G. Congressional Review Act
This final rule is subject to the Congressional Review Act
provisions of the Small Business Regulatory Enforcement Fairness Act of
1996 (5 U.S.C. 801, et seq.), which specifies that before a rule can
take effect, the federal agency promulgating the rule shall submit to
each House of the Congress and to the Comptroller General a report
containing a copy of the rule along with other specified information,
and has been transmitted to Congress and the Comptroller General for
review.
List of Subjects
45 CFR Part 144
Health care, Health insurance, Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
45 CFR Part 147
Health care, Health insurance, Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements, and State regulation of health insurance.
45 CFR Part 150
Administrative practice and procedure, Health care, Health
insurance, Penalties, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements.
45 CFR Part 154
Administrative practice and procedure, Claims, Health care, Health
insurance, Health plans, Penalties, Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements.
45 CFR Part 156
Administrative practice and procedure, Advertising, Advisory
committees, Brokers, Conflict of interest, Consumer protection, Grant
programs-health, Grants administration, Health care, Health insurance,
Health maintenance organization (HMO), Health records, Hospitals,
Indians, Individuals with disabilities, Loan programs-health,
Organization and functions (Government agencies), Medicaid, Public
assistance programs, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements, Safety,
State and local governments, Sunshine Act, Technical Assistance, Women,
and Youth.
For the reasons set forth in the preamble, the Department of Health
and Human Services amends 45 CFR parts 144, 147, 150, 154, and 156 as
set forth below:
PART 144--REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO HEALTH INSURANCE COVERAGE
0
1. The authority citation for part 144 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Secs. 2701 through 2763, 2791, and 2792 of the
Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300gg through 300gg-63, 300gg-
91, and 300gg-92).
0
2. Amend Sec. 144.101 by revising paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) to read
as follows:
Sec. 144.101 Basis and Purpose.
* * * * *
(d) * * *
(1) States that fail to substantially enforce one or more
provisions of part 146 concerning group health insurance, one or more
provisions of part 147 concerning group or individual health insurance,
or the requirements of part 148 of this subchapter concerning
individual health insurance.
(2) Insurance issuers in States described in paragraph (d)(1) of
this section.
* * * * *
0
3. Revise Sec. 144.102 to read as follows:
[[Page 13436]]
Sec. 144.102 Scope and applicability.
(a) For purposes of 45 CFR parts 144 through 148, all health
insurance coverage is generally divided into two markets--the group
market and the individual market. The group market is further divided
into the large group market and the small group market.
(b) The protections afforded under 45 CFR parts 144 through 148 to
individuals and employers (and other sponsors of health insurance
offered in connection with a group health plan) are determined by
whether the coverage involved is obtained in the small group market,
the large group market, or the individual market.
(c) Coverage that is provided to associations, but not related to
employment, and sold to individuals is not considered group coverage
under 45 CFR parts 144 through 148. If the coverage is offered to an
association member other than in connection with a group health plan,
or is offered to an association's employer-member that is maintaining a
group health plan that has fewer than two participants who are current
employees on the first day of the plan year, the coverage is considered
individual health insurance coverage for purposes of 45 CFR parts 144
through 148. The coverage is considered coverage in the individual
market, regardless of whether it is considered group coverage under
state law. If the health insurance coverage is offered in connection
with a group health plan as defined at 45 CFR 144.103, it is considered
group health insurance coverage for purposes of 45 CFR parts 144
through 148.
(d) Provisions relating to CMS enforcement of parts 146, 147, and
148 are contained in part 150 of this subchapter.
PART 147--HEALTH INSURANCE REFORM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE GROUP AND
INDIVIDUAL HEALTH INSURANCE MARKETS
0
4. The authority citation for part 147 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Secs. 2701 through 2763, 2791, and 2792 of the
Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300gg through 300gg-63, 300gg-
91, and 300gg-92), as amended.
0
5. A new Sec. 147.102 is added to part 147 to read as follows:
Sec. 147.102 Fair health insurance premiums.
(a) In general. With respect to the premium rate charged by a
health insurance issuer for health insurance coverage offered in the
individual or small group market--
(1) The rate may vary with respect to the particular plan or
coverage involved only by determining the following:
(i) Whether the plan or coverage covers an individual or family.
(ii) Rating area, as established in accordance with paragraph (b)
of this section.
(iii) Age, except that the rate may not vary by more than 3:1 for
like individuals of different age who are age 21 and older and that the
variation in rate must be actuarially justified for individuals under
age 21, consistent with the uniform age rating curve under paragraph
(e) of this section. For purposes of identifying the appropriate age
adjustment under this paragraph and the age band under paragraph (d) of
this section applicable to a specific enrollee, the enrollee's age as
of the date of policy issuance or renewal must be used.
(iv) Subject to section 2705 of the Public Health Service Act and
its implementing regulations (related to prohibiting discrimination
based on health status and programs of health promotion or disease
prevention) as applicable, tobacco use, except that such rate may not
vary by more than 1.5:1 and may only be applied with respect to
individuals who may legally use tobacco under federal and state law.
For purposes of this section, tobacco use means use of tobacco on
average four or more times per week within no longer than the past 6
months. This includes all tobacco products, except that tobacco use
does not include religious or ceremonial use of tobacco. Further,
tobacco use must be defined in terms of when a tobacco product was last
used.
(2) The rate must not vary with respect to the particular plan or
coverage involved by any other factor not described in paragraph (a)(1)
of this section.
(b) Rating area. (1) A state may establish one or more rating areas
within that state, as provided in paragraphs (b)(3) and (b)(4) of this
section, for purposes of applying this section and the requirements of
title XXVII the Public Health Service Act and title I of the Patient
Protection and Affordable Care Act.
(2) If a state does not establish rating areas as provided in
paragraphs (b)(3) and (b)(4) of this section or provide information on
such rating areas in accordance with Sec. 147.103, or CMS determines
in accordance with paragraph (b)(5) of this section that a state's
rating areas under paragraph (b)(4) of this section are not adequate,
the default will be one rating area for each metropolitan statistical
area in the state and one rating area comprising all non-metropolitan
statistical areas in the state, as defined by the Office of Management
and Budget.
(3) A state's rating areas must be based on the following
geographic boundaries: Counties, three-digit zip codes, or metropolitan
statistical areas and non-metropolitan statistical areas, as defined by
the Office of Management and Budget, and will be presumed adequate if
either of the following conditions are satisfied:
(i) The state established by law, rule, regulation, bulletin, or
other executive action uniform rating areas for the entire state as of
January 1, 2013.
(ii) The state establishes by law, rule, regulation, bulletin, or
other executive action after January 1, 2013 uniform rating areas for
the entire state that are no greater in number than the number of
metropolitan statistical areas in the state plus one.
(4) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(3) of this section, a state may
propose to CMS for approval a number of rating areas that is greater
than the number described in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section,
provided such rating areas are based on the geographic boundaries
specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(5) In determining whether the rating areas established by each
state under paragraph (b)(4) of this section are adequate, CMS will
consider whether the state's rating areas are actuarially justified,
are not unfairly discriminatory, reflect significant differences in
health care unit costs, lead to stability in rates over time, apply
uniformly to all issuers in a market, and are based on the geographic
boundaries of counties, three-digit zip codes, or metropolitan
statistical areas and non-metropolitan statistical areas.
(c) Application of variations based on age or tobacco use. With
respect to family coverage under health insurance coverage, the rating
variations permitted under paragraphs (a)(1)(iii) and (a)(1)(iv) of
this section must be applied based on the portion of the premium
attributable to each family member covered under the coverage.
(1) Per-member rating. The total premium for family coverage must
be determined by summing the premiums for each individual family
member. With respect to family members under the age of 21, the
premiums for no more than the three oldest covered children must be
taken into account in determining the total family premium.
(2) Family tiers under community rating. If a state does not permit
any rating variation for the factors described in paragraphs
(a)(1)(iii) and (a)(1)(iv) of this section, the state may require that
[[Page 13437]]
premiums for family coverage be determined by using uniform family
tiers and the corresponding multipliers established by the state. If a
state does not establish uniform family tiers and the corresponding
multipliers, the per-member-rating methodology under paragraph (c)(1)
of this section will apply in that state.
(3) Application to small group market. In the case of the small
group market, the total premium charged to the group is determined by
summing the premiums of covered participants and beneficiaries in
accordance with paragraph (c)(1) or (c)(2) of this section, as
applicable. Nothing in this section precludes a state from requiring
issuers to offer, or an issuer from voluntarily offering, to a group
premiums that are based on average enrollee amounts, provided that the
total group premium is the same total amount derived in accordance with
paragraph (c)(1) or (c)(2) of this section, as applicable.
(d) Uniform age bands. The following uniform age bands apply for
rating purposes under paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section:
(1) Child age bands. A single age band for individuals age 0
through 20.
(2) Adult age bands. One-year age bands for individuals age 21
through 63.
(3) Older adult age bands. A single age band for individuals age 64
and older.
(e) Uniform age rating curves. Each state may establish a uniform
age rating curve in the individual or small group market, or both
markets, for rating purposes under paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this
section. If a state does not establish a uniform age rating curve or
provide information on such age curve in accordance with Sec. 147.103,
a default uniform age rating curve specified in guidance by the
Secretary will apply in that state which takes into account the rating
variation permitted for age under state law.
(f) Special rule for large group market. If a state permits health
insurance issuers that offer coverage in the large group market in the
state to offer such coverage through an Exchange starting in 2017, the
provisions of this section applicable to coverage in the small group
market apply to all coverage offered in the large group market in the
state.
(g) Applicability date. The provisions of this section apply for
plan years (in the individual market, policy years) beginning on or
after January 1, 2014.
(h) Grandfathered health plans. This section does not apply to
grandfathered health plans in accordance with Sec. 147.140.
0
6. A new Sec. 147.103 is added to part 147 to read as follows:
Sec. 147.103 State reporting.
(a) 2014. If a state has adopted or intends to adopt for the 2014
plan or policy year a standard or requirement described in this
paragraph, the state must submit to CMS information about such standard
or requirement in a form and manner specified in guidance by the
Secretary no later than March 29, 2013. A state standard or requirement
is described in this paragraph if it includes any of the following:
(1) A ratio narrower than 3:1 in connection with establishing rates
for individuals who are age 21 and older, pursuant to Sec.
147.102(a)(1)(iii).
(2) A ratio narrower than 1.5:1 in connection with establishing
rates for individuals who use tobacco legally, pursuant to Sec.
147.102(a)(1)(iv).
(3) Geographic rating areas, pursuant to Sec. 147.102(b).
(4) In states that do not permit rating based on age or tobacco
use, uniform family tiers and corresponding multipliers, pursuant to
Sec. 147.102(c)(2).
(5) A requirement that that issuers in the small group market offer
to a group premiums that are based on average enrollee amounts,
pursuant to paragraph Sec. 147.102(c)(3).
(6) A uniform age rating curve, pursuant to Sec. 147.102(e).
(b) Updates. If a state adopts a standard or requirement described
in paragraph (a) of this section for any plan or policy year beginning
after the 2014 plan or policy year (or updates a standard or
requirement that applies for the 2014 plan or policy year), the state
must submit to CMS information about such standard in a form and manner
specified in guidance by the Secretary.
(c) Applicability date. The provisions of this section apply on
March 29, 2013.
0
7. A new Sec. 147.104 is added to part 147 to read as follows:
Sec. 147.104 Guaranteed availability of coverage.
(a) Guaranteed availability of coverage in the individual and group
market. Subject to paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, a health
insurance issuer that offers health insurance coverage in the
individual or group market in a state must offer to any individual or
employer in the state all products that are approved for sale in the
applicable market, and must accept any individual or employer that
applies for any of those products.
(b) Enrollment periods. A health insurance issuer may restrict
enrollment in health insurance coverage to open or special enrollment
periods.
(1) Open enrollment periods--(i) Group market. A health insurance
issuer in the group market must allow an employer to purchase health
insurance coverage for a group health plan at any point during the
year. In the case of health insurance coverage offered in the small
group market, a health insurance issuer may limit the availability of
coverage to an annual enrollment period that begins November 15 and
extends through December 15 of each year in the case of a plan sponsor
that is unable to comply with a material plan provision relating to
employer contribution or group participation rules as defined in Sec.
147.106(b)(3), pursuant to applicable state law and, in the case of a
QHP offered in the SHOP, as permitted by Sec. 156.285(c) of this
subchapter. With respect to coverage in the small group market, and in
the large group market if such coverage is offered in a Small Business
Health Options Program (SHOP) in a state, coverage must become
effective consistent with the dates described in Sec. 155.725(h) of
this subchapter.
(ii) Individual market. A health insurance issuer in the individual
market must allow an individual to purchase health insurance coverage
during the initial and annual open enrollment periods described in
Sec. 155.410(b) and (e) of this subchapter. Coverage must become
effective consistent with the dates described in Sec. 155.410(c) and
(f) of this subchapter.
(2) Limited open enrollment periods. A health insurance issuer in
the individual market must provide a limited open enrollment period for
the events described in Sec. 155.420(d) of this subchapter, excluding
paragraphs (d)(3) (concerning citizenship status), (d)(8) (concerning
Indians), and (d)(9) (concerning exceptional circumstances). In
addition, a health insurance issuer in the individual market must
provide, with respect to individuals enrolled in non-calendar year
individual health insurance policies, a limited open enrollment period
beginning on the date that is 30 calendar days prior to the date the
policy year ends in 2014.
(3) Special enrollment periods. A health insurance issuer in the
group and individual market must establish special enrollment periods
for qualifying events as defined under section 603 of the Employee
Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended. These special
enrollment periods are in addition to any other special enrollment
periods that are required under federal and state law.
(4) Length of enrollment periods. With respect to the group market,
enrollees must be provided 30 calendar days after
[[Page 13438]]
the date of the qualifying event described in paragraph (b)(3) of this
section to elect coverage. With respect to the individual market,
enrollees must be provided 60 calendar days after the date of an event
described in paragraph (b)(2) and (b)(3) of this section to elect
coverage.
(5) Effective date of coverage for limited open and special
enrollment periods. With respect to an election made under paragraph
(b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section, coverage must become effective
consistent with the dates described in Sec. 155.420(b) of this
subchapter.
(c) Special rules for network plans. (1) In the case of a health
insurance issuer that offers health insurance coverage in the group and
individual market through a network plan, the issuer may do the
following:
(i) Limit the employers that may apply for the coverage to those
with eligible individuals in the group market who live, work, or reside
in the service area for the network plan, and limit the individuals who
may apply for the coverage in the individual market to those who live
or reside in the service area for the network plan.
(ii) Within the service area of the plan, deny coverage to
employers and individuals if the issuer has demonstrated to the
applicable state authority (if required by the state authority) the
following:
(A) It will not have the capacity to deliver services adequately to
enrollees of any additional groups or any additional individuals
because of its obligations to existing group contract holders and
enrollees.
(B) It is applying paragraph (c)(1) of this section uniformly to
all employers and individuals without regard to the claims experience
of those individuals, employers and their employees (and their
dependents) or any health status-related factor relating to such
individuals, employees, and dependents.
(2) An issuer that denies health insurance coverage to an
individual or an employer in any service area, in accordance with
paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section, may not offer coverage in the
individual or group market, as applicable, within the service area to
any individual or employer, as applicable, for a period of 180 calendar
days after the date the coverage is denied. This paragraph (c)(2) does
not limit the issuer's ability to renew coverage already in force or
relieve the issuer of the responsibility to renew that coverage.
(3) Coverage offered within a service area after the 180-day period
specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section is subject to the
requirements of this section.
(d) Application of financial capacity limits. (1) A health
insurance issuer may deny health insurance coverage in the group or
individual market if the issuer has demonstrated to the applicable
state authority (if required by the state authority) the following:
(i) It does not have the financial reserves necessary to offer
additional coverage.
(ii) It is applying this paragraph (d)(1) uniformly to all
employers or individuals in the group or individual market, as
applicable, in the state consistent with applicable state law and
without regard to the claims experience of those individuals, employers
and their employees (and their dependents) or any health status-related
factor relating to such individuals, employees, and dependents.
(2) An issuer that denies health insurance coverage to any employer
or individual in a state under paragraph (d)(1) of this section may not
offer coverage in the group or individual market, as applicable, in the
state before the later of either of the following dates:
(i) The 181st day after the date the issuer denies coverage.
(ii) The date the issuer demonstrates to the applicable state
authority, if required under applicable state law, that the issuer has
sufficient financial reserves to underwrite additional coverage.
(3) Paragraph (d)(2) of this section does not limit the issuer's
ability to renew coverage already in force or relieve the issuer of the
responsibility to renew that coverage.
(4) Coverage offered after the 180-day period specified in
paragraph (d)(2) of this section is subject to the requirements of this
section.
(5) An applicable state authority may provide for the application
of this paragraph (d) on a service-area-specific basis.
(e) Marketing. A health insurance issuer and its officials,
employees, agents and representatives must comply with any applicable
state laws and regulations regarding marketing by health insurance
issuers and cannot employ marketing practices or benefit designs that
will have the effect of discouraging the enrollment of individuals with
significant health needs in health insurance coverage or discriminate
based on an individual's race, color, national origin, present or
predicted disability, age, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation,
expected length of life, degree of medical dependency, quality of life,
or other health conditions.
(f) Applicability date. The provisions of this section apply for
plan years (in the individual market, policy years) beginning on or
after January 1, 2014.
(g) Grandfathered health plans. This section does not apply to
grandfathered health plans in accordance with Sec. 147.140.
0
8. A new Sec. 147.106 is added to part 147 to read as follows:
Sec. 147.106 Guaranteed renewability of coverage.
(a) General rule. Subject to paragraphs (b) through (d) of this
section, a health insurance issuer offering health insurance coverage
in the individual or group market is required to renew or continue in
force the coverage at the option of the plan sponsor or the individual,
as applicable.
(b) Exceptions. An issuer may nonrenew or discontinue health
insurance coverage offered in the group or individual market based only
on one or more of the following:
(1) Nonpayment of premiums. The plan sponsor or individual, as
applicable, has failed to pay premiums or contributions in accordance
with the terms of the health insurance coverage, including any
timeliness requirements.
(2) Fraud. The plan sponsor or individual, as applicable, has
performed an act or practice that constitutes fraud or made an
intentional misrepresentation of material fact in connection with the
coverage.
(3) Violation of participation or contribution rules. In the case
of group health insurance coverage, the plan sponsor has failed to
comply with a material plan provision relating to employer contribution
or group participation rules, pursuant to applicable state law. For
purposes of this paragraph the following apply:
(i) The term ``employer contribution rule'' means a requirement
relating to the minimum level or amount of employer contribution toward
the premium for enrollment of participants and beneficiaries.
(ii) The term ``group participation rule'' means a requirement
relating to the minimum number of participants or beneficiaries that
must be enrolled in relation to a specified percentage or number of
eligible individuals or employees of an employer.
(4) Termination of plan. The issuer is ceasing to offer coverage in
the market in accordance with paragraph (c) or (d) of this section and
applicable state law.
(5) Enrollees' movement outside service area. For network plans,
there is no longer any enrollee under the plan
[[Page 13439]]
who lives, resides, or works in the service area of the issuer (or in
the area for which the issuer is authorized to do business); and in the
case of the small group market, the issuer applies the same criteria it
would apply in denying enrollment in the plan under Sec.
147.104(c)(1)(i).
(6) Association membership ceases. For coverage made available in
the small or large group market only through one or more bona fide
associations, if the employer's membership in the bona fide association
ceases, but only if the coverage is terminated uniformly without regard
to any health status-related factor relating to any covered individual.
(c) Discontinuing a particular product. In any case in which an
issuer decides to discontinue offering a particular product offered in
the group or individual market, that product may be discontinued by the
issuer in accordance with applicable state law in the applicable market
only if the following occurs:
(1) The issuer provides notice in writing to each plan sponsor or
individual, as applicable, provided that particular product in that
market (and to all participants and beneficiaries covered under such
coverage) of the discontinuation at least 90 calendar days before the
date the coverage will be discontinued.
(2) The issuer offers to each plan sponsor or individual, as
applicable, provided that particular product the option, on a
guaranteed availability basis, to purchase all (or, in the case of the
large group market, any) other health insurance coverage currently
being offered by the issuer to a group health plan or individual health
insurance coverage in that market.
(3) In exercising the option to discontinue that product and in
offering the option of coverage under paragraph (c)(2) of this section,
the issuer acts uniformly without regard to the claims experience of
those sponsors or individuals, as applicable, or any health status-
related factor relating to any participants or beneficiaries covered or
new participants or beneficiaries who may become eligible for such
coverage.
(d) Discontinuing all coverage. (1) An issuer may elect to
discontinue offering all health insurance coverage in the individual or
group market, or all markets, in a state in accordance with applicable
state law only if--
(i) The issuer provides notice in writing to the applicable state
authority and to each plan sponsor or individual, as applicable, (and
all participants and beneficiaries covered under the coverage) of the
discontinuation at least 180 calendar days prior to the date the
coverage will be discontinued; and
(ii) All health insurance policies issued or delivered for issuance
in the state in the applicable market (or markets) are discontinued and
not renewed.
(2) An issuer that elects to discontinue offering all health
insurance coverage in a market (or markets) in a state as described in
this paragraph (d) may not issue coverage in the applicable market (or
markets) and state involved during the 5-year period beginning on the
date of discontinuation of the last coverage not renewed.
(e) Exception for uniform modification of coverage. Only at the
time of coverage renewal may issuers modify the health insurance
coverage for a product offered to a group health plan in the following:
(1) Large group market.
(2) Small group market if, for coverage available in this market
(other than only through one or more bona fide associations), the
modification is consistent with state law and is effective uniformly
among group health plans with that product.
(f) Application to coverage offered only through associations. In
the case of health insurance coverage that is made available by a
health insurance issuer in the small or large group market to employers
only through one or more associations, the reference to ``plan
sponsor'' is deemed, with respect to coverage provided to an employer
member of the association, to include a reference to the employer.
(g) Applicability date. The provisions of this section apply for
plan years (in the individual market, policy years) beginning on or
after January 1, 2014.
(h) Grandfathered health plans. This section does not apply to
grandfathered health plans in accordance with Sec. 147.140.
0
9. Amend Sec. 147.145 by revising paragraph (b)(1) and adding
paragraph (b)(3) to read as follows:
Sec. 147.145 Student health insurance coverage.
* * * * *
(b) Exemptions from the Public Health Service Act and the
Affordable Care Act --(1) Guaranteed availability and guaranteed
renewability--(i) For purposes of sections 2741(e)(1) and 2742(b)(5) of
the Public Health Service Act, student health insurance coverage is
deemed to be available only through a bona fide association.
(ii) For purposes of section 2702(a) of the Public Health Service
Act, a health insurance issuer that offers student health insurance
coverage is not required to accept individuals who are not students or
dependents of students in such coverage.
(iii) For purposes of section 2703(a) of the Public Health Service
Act, a health insurance issuer that offers student health insurance
coverage is not required to renew or continue in force coverage for
individuals who are no longer students or dependents of students.
* * * * *
(3) Single risk pool. Student health insurance coverage is not
subject to the requirements of section 1312(c) of the Affordable Care
Act.
* * * * *
PART 150--CMS ENFORCEMENT IN GROUP AND INDIVIDUAL INSURANCE MARKETS
0
10. The authority citation for part 150 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Secs. 2701 through 2763, 2791, and 2792 of the
Public Health Service Act (42 U.S.C. 300gg through 300gg-63, 300gg-
91, and 300gg-92), as amended.
0
11. Amend Sec. 150.101 by revising paragraphs (a) and (b)(2) to read
as follows:
Sec. 150.101 Basis and scope.
(a) Basis. CMS's enforcement authority under sections 2723 and 2761
of the PHS Act and its rulemaking authority under section 2792 of the
PHS Act provide the basis for issuing regulations under this part 150.
(b) * * *
(2) Enforcement with respect to health insurance issuers. The
states have primary enforcement authority with respect to the
requirements of title XXVII of the PHS Act that apply to health
insurance issuers offering coverage in the group or individual health
insurance market. If CMS determines under subpart B of this part that a
state is not substantially enforcing title XXVII of the PHS Act,
including the implementing regulations in parts 146, 147, and 148 of
this subchapter, CMS enforces them under subpart C of this part.
0
12. Amend Sec. 150.103 as follows:
0
a. Remove the definition of ``HIPAA requirements;''
0
b. Revise the definition of ``Individual health insurance policy or
individual policy;'' and
0
c. Add the definition of ``PHS Act requirements'' in alphabetical
order.
The revision and addition read as follows:
Sec. 150.103 Definitions.
* * * * *
[[Page 13440]]
Individual health insurance policy or individual policy means the
legal document or contract issued by the issuer to an individual that
contains the conditions and terms of the insurance. Any association or
trust arrangement that is not a group health plan as defined in Sec.
144.103 of this subchapter or does not provide coverage in connection
with one or more group health plans is individual coverage subject to
the requirements of parts 147 and 148 of this subchapter. The term
``individual health insurance policy'' includes a policy that is--
(1) Issued to an association that makes coverage available to
individuals other than in connection with one or more group health
plans; or
(2) Administered, or placed in a trust, and is not sold in
connection with a group health plan subject to the provisions of parts
146 and 147 of this subchapter.
PHS Act requirements means the requirements of title XXVII of the
PHS Act and its implementing regulations in parts 146, 147, and 148 of
this subchapter.
* * * * *
0
13. In part 150, remove the words ``HIPAA requirement'' or ``HIPAA
requirements,'' and add in their place ``PHS Act requirement'' or ``PHS
Act requirements,'' respectively, wherever they appear in the following
places:
0
a. Section 150.103, in the definition of ``Complaint''.
0
b. In the heading of subpart B of part 150.
0
c. Section 150.201.
0
d. Section 150.203, in the introductory text and paragraphs (a) and
(b).
0
e. Section 150.205(d) and (e)(1).
0
f. Section 150.207, in the section heading and text.
0
g. Section 150.209.
0
h. Section 150.211, in the introductory text.
0
i. Section 150.213(b) and (c).
0
j. Section 150.217, in the introductory text.
0
k. Section 150.219(a).
0
l. Section 150.221(a).
0
m. Section 150.301.
0
n. Section 150.303(a) introductory text, (a)(3), and (b).
0
o. Section 150.305(a)(1), (b)(2), and (c)(2).
0
p. Section 150.309.
0
q. Section 150.311, in the introductory text and paragraphs (d), (f)
introductory text, (f)(3), and (g).
0
r. Section 150.313(a) and (e)(3)(iv).
0
s. Section 150.317(a)(1) and (a)(3).
0
t. Section 150.319(b)(1) introductory text, (b)(1)(ii), and
(b)(1)(iii).
0
u. Section 150.343(a).
0
v. Section 150.465(c).
PART 154--HEALTH INSURANCE ISSUER RATE INCREASES: DISCLOSURE AND
REVIEW REQUIREMENTS
0
14. The authority citation for part 154 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Section 2794 of the Public Health Service Act (42
U.S.C. 300gg-94).
0
15. In Sec. 154.200, revise the third sentence and add a fourth
sentence to paragraph (a)(2) and paragraph (b) to read as follows:
Sec. 154.200 Rate increases subject to review.
(a) * * *
(2) * * * A state-specific threshold shall be based on factors
impacting rate increases in a state to the extent that the data
relating to such state-specific factors is available by August 1.
States interested in proposing a state-specific threshold for approval
are required to submit a proposal to the Secretary by August 1.
(b) The Secretary will publish a notice no later than September 1
of each year, to be effective on January 1 of the following year,
concerning whether a threshold under paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this
section applies to the state; except that, with respect to the 12-month
period that begins on September 1, 2011, the threshold under paragraph
(a)(1) of this section applies.
* * * * *
0
16. Revise Sec. 154.215 to read as follows:
Sec. 154.215 Submission of rate filing justification.
(a) If any product is subject to a rate increase, a health
insurance issuer must submit a Rate Filing Justification for all
products in the single risk pool, including new or discontinuing
products, on a form and in a manner prescribed by the Secretary.
(b) The Rate Filing Justification must consist of the following
Parts:
(1) Unified rate review template (Part I), as described in
paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) Written description justifying the rate increase (Part II), as
described in paragraph (e) of this section.
(3) Rating filing documentation (Part III), as described in
paragraph (f) of this section.
(c) A health insurance issuer must complete and submit Parts I and
III of the Rate Filing Justification described in paragraphs (b)(1) and
(b)(3) of this section to CMS and, as long as the applicable state
accepts such submissions, to the applicable state. If a rate increase
is subject to review, then the health insurance issuer must also
complete and submit to CMS and, if applicable, the state Part II of the
Rate Filing Justification described in paragraph (b)(2) of this
section.
(d) Content of unified rate review template (Part I): The unified
rate review template must include the following as determined
appropriate by the Secretary:
(1) Historical and projected claims experience.
(2) Trend projections related to utilization, and service or unit
cost.
(3) Any claims assumptions related to benefit changes.
(4) Allocation of the overall rate increase to claims and non-
claims costs.
(5) Per enrollee per month allocation of current and projected
premium.
(6) Three year history of rate increases for the product associated
with the rate increase.
(e) Content of written description justifying the rate increase
(Part II): The written description of the rate increase must include a
simple and brief narrative describing the data and assumptions that
were used to develop the rate increase and including the following:
(1) Explanation of the most significant factors causing the rate
increase, including a brief description of the relevant claims and non-
claims expense increases reported in the rate increase summary.
(2) Brief description of the overall experience of the policy,
including historical and projected expenses, and loss ratios.
(f) Content of rate filing documentation (Part III): The rate
filing documentation must include an actuarial memorandum that contains
the reasoning and assumptions supporting the data contained in Part I
of the Rate Filing Justification. Parts I and III must be sufficient to
conduct an examination satisfying the requirements of Sec.
154.301(a)(3) and (4) and determine whether the rate increase is an
unreasonable increase. Instructions concerning the requirements for the
rate filing documentation will be provided in guidance issued by CMS.
(g) If the level of detail provided by the issuer for the
information under paragraphs (d) and (f) of this section does not
provide sufficient basis for CMS to determine whether the rate increase
is an unreasonable rate increase when CMS reviews a rate increase
subject to review under Sec. 154.210(a), CMS will request the
additional information necessary to make its determination. The health
insurance
[[Page 13441]]
issuer must provide the requested information to CMS within 10 business
days following its receipt of the request.
(h) Posting of the disclosure on the CMS Web site:
(1) CMS promptly will make available to the public on its Web site
the information contained in Part II of each Rate Filing Justification.
(2) CMS will make available to the public on its Web site the
information contained in Parts I and III of each Rate Filing
Justification that is not a trade secret or confidential commercial or
financial information as defined in HHS's Freedom of Information Act
regulations, 45 CFR 5.65.
(3) CMS will include a disclaimer on its Web site with the
information made available to the public that explains the purpose and
role of the Rate Filing Justification.
(4) CMS will include information on its Web site concerning how the
public can submit comments on the proposed rate increases that CMS
reviews.
0
17. Revise Sec. 154.220 to read as follows:
Sec. 154.220 Timing of providing the rate filing justification.
A health insurance issuer must submit a Rate Filing Justification
for all rate increases that are filed in a state on or after April 1,
2013, or effective on or after January 1, 2014 in a state that does not
require the rate increase to be filed, as follows:
(a) If a state requires that a proposed rate increase be filed with
the state prior to the implementation of the rate, the health insurance
issuer must submit to CMS and the applicable state the Rate Filing
Justification on the date on which the health insurance issuer submits
the proposed rate increase to the state.
(b) For all other states, the health insurance issuer must submit
to CMS and the state the Rate Filing Justification prior to the
implementation of the rate increase.
Sec. 154.225 [Amended]
0
18a. In Sec. 154.225(a), introductory text, remove the words
``Preliminary Justification'' and add in their place ``Rate Filing
Justification.''
Sec. 154.230 [Amended]
0
18b. In Sec. 154.230(b) and (c)(1), remove the words ``Preliminary
Justification'' and add in their place ``Rate Filing Justification.''
0
19. Amend Sec. 154.301 as follows:
0
a. Amend paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (a)(3)(xi) by removing ``; and'' and
adding in its place a period.
0
b. Amend paragraphs (a)(4)(i), (a)(4)(ii), and (a)(4)(vi) through
(a)(4)(x) by removing the semicolons and replacing them with periods.
0
c. Revise paragraphs (a)(4)(iii) through (a)(4)(v), and (b).
0
d. Add new paragraphs (a)(3)(iii), (a)(3)(iv), and (a)(4)(xiii) through
(a)(4)(xv). The revisions and additions read as follows:
Sec. 154.301 CMS's determinations of effective rate review programs.
(a) * * *
(3) * * *
(iii) The reasonableness of assumptions used by the health
insurance issuer to estimate the rate impact of the reinsurance and
risk adjustment programs under sections 1341 and 1343 of the Affordable
Care Act.
(iv) The health insurance issuer's data related to implementation
and ongoing utilization of a market-wide single risk pool, essential
health benefits, actuarial values and other market reform rules as
required by the Affordable Care Act.
(4) * * *
(iii) The impact of cost-sharing changes by major service
categories, including actuarial values.
(iv) The impact of benefit changes, including essential health
benefits and non-essential health benefits.
(v) The impact of changes in enrollee risk profile and pricing,
including rating limitations for age and tobacco use under section 2701
of the Public Health Service Act.
* * * * *
(xiii) The impacts of geographic factors and variations.
(xiv) The impact of changes within a single risk pool to all
products or plans within the risk pool.
(xv) The impact of reinsurance and risk adjustment payments and
charges under sections 1341 and 1343 of the Affordable Care Act.
* * * * *
(b) Public disclosure and input. In addition to satisfying the
provisions in paragraph (a) of this section, a state with an effective
rate review program must provide, for the rate increases it reviews,
access from its Web site to at least the information contained in Parts
I, II, and III of the Rate Filing Justification that CMS makes
available on its Web site (or provide CMS's Web address for such
information) and have a mechanism for receiving public comments on
those proposed rate increases.
* * * * *
PART 156--HEALTH INSURANCE ISSUER STANDARDS UNDER THE AFFORDABLE
CARE ACT, INCLUDING STANDARDS RELATED TO EXCHANGES
0
20. The authority citation for part 156 continues to read as follows:
Authority: Title I of the Affordable Care Act, sections 1301-
1304, 1311-1312, 1321, 1322, 1324, 1334, 1342-1343, and 1401-1402,
Pub. L. 111-148, 124 Stat. 119 (42 U.S.C. 18042).
0
21. A new Sec. 156.80 is added to subpart A to read as follows:
Sec. 156.80 Single risk pool.
(a) Individual market. A health insurance issuer must consider the
claims experience of all enrollees in all health plans (other than
grandfathered health plans) subject to section 2701 of the Public
Health Service Act and offered by such issuer in the individual market
in a state, including those enrollees who do not enroll in such plans
through the Exchange, to be members of a single risk pool.
(b) Small group market. A health insurance issuer must consider the
claims experience of all enrollees in all health plans (other than
grandfathered health plans) subject to section 2701 of the Public
Health Service Act and offered by such issuer in the small group market
in a state, including those enrollees who do not enroll in such plans
through the Exchange, to be members of a single risk pool.
(c) Merger of the individual and small group markets. A state may
require the individual and small group insurance markets within a state
to be merged into a single risk pool if the state determines
appropriate. A state that requires such merger must submit to CMS
information on its election in accordance with the procedures described
in Sec. 147.103 of this subchapter.
(d) Index rate--(1) In general. Each plan year or policy year, as
applicable, a health insurance issuer must establish an index rate for
a state market described in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section
based on the total combined claims costs for providing essential health
benefits within the single risk pool of that state market. The index
rate must be adjusted on a market-wide basis based on the total
expected market-wide payments and charges under the risk adjustment and
reinsurance programs in the state and Exchange user fees. The premium
rate for all of the health insurance issuer's plans in the relevant
state market must use the applicable market-wide adjusted index rate,
subject only to the plan-level
[[Page 13442]]
adjustments permitted in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(2) Permitted plan-level adjustments to the index rate. For plan
years or policy years beginning on or after January 1, 2014, a health
insurance issuer may vary premium rates for a particular plan from its
market-wide index rate for a relevant state market based only on the
following actuarially justified plan-specific factors:
(i) The actuarial value and cost-sharing design of the plan.
(ii) The plan's provider network, delivery system characteristics,
and utilization management practices.
(iii) The benefits provided under the plan that are in addition to
the essential health benefits. These additional benefits must be pooled
with similar benefits within the single risk pool and the claims
experience from those benefits must be utilized to determine rate
variations for plans that offer those benefits in addition to essential
health benefits.
(iv) Administrative costs, excluding Exchange user fees.
(v) With respect to catastrophic plans, the expected impact of the
specific eligibility categories for those plans.
(e) Grandfathered health plans in the individual and small group
market. A state law requiring grandfathered health plans described in
Sec. 147.140 of this subchapter to be included in a single risk pool
described in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section does not apply.
(f) Applicability date. The provisions of this section apply for
plan years (as that term is defined in Sec. 144.103 of this
subchapter) in the group market, and for policy years (as that term is
defined in Sec. 144.103 of this subchapter) in the individual market,
beginning on or after January 1, 2014.
0
22. A new Sec. 156.155 is added to subpart B to read as follows:
Sec. 156.155 Enrollment in catastrophic plans.
(a) General rule. A health plan is a catastrophic plan if it meets
the following conditions:
(1) Meets all applicable requirements for health insurance coverage
in the individual market (including but not limited to those
requirements described in parts 147 and 148 of this subchapter), and is
offered only in the individual market.
(2) Does not provide a bronze, silver, gold, or platinum level of
coverage described in section 1302(d) of the Affordable Care Act.
(3) Provides coverage of the essential health benefits under
section 1302(b) of the Affordable Care Act once the annual limitation
on cost sharing in section 1302(c)(1) of the Affordable Care Act is
reached.
(4) Provides coverage for at least three primary care visits per
year before reaching the deductible.
(5) Covers only individuals who meet either of the following
conditions:
(i) Have not attained the age of 30 prior to the first day of the
plan or policy year.
(ii) Have received a certificate of exemption for the reasons
identified in section 1302(e)(2)(B)(i) or (ii) of the Affordable Care
Act.
(b) Coverage of preventive health services. A catastrophic plan may
not impose any cost-sharing requirements (such as a copayment,
coinsurance, or deductible) for preventive services, in accordance with
section 2713 of the Public Health Service Act.
(c) Application for family coverage. For other than self-only
coverage, each individual enrolled must meet the requirements of
paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
Dated: February 15, 2013.
Marilyn Tavenner,
Acting Administrator, Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services.
Approved: February 20, 2013.
Kathleen Sebelius,
Secretary, Department of Health and Human Services.
[FR Doc. 2013-04335 Filed 2-22-13; 11:15 am]
BILLING CODE 4120-01-P